Skip to main content

Full text of "The Nursing sister : a manual for candidates and novices of hospital communities"

See other formats


Library 
Use 
Only 


1 1     m,  .    t 

ST.  JOHN'S  HuZriTk*.  UBRARY  SFFLu.,  a. 


DATE  DUE 


PRINTED  IN  U.S.A. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 

CARLI:  Consortium  of  Academic  and  Research  Libraries  in  Illinois 


http://www.archive.org/details/nursingsisterman1899stjo 


St.  John's  Hosp 
Health  Science  Lii  i 
800  E.  Carpenter 
Springfield,  iL  627 


The  Nursing  Sister 


A  MANUAL 


—FOR- 


CANDIDATES  AND  NOVICES 


— OF— 


HOSPITAL  COMMUNITIES. 


PREPARED    BY 


St.  John's  Hospital  Training  School 

SPRINGFIELD,  ILLINOIS. 


SPRINGFIELD,  ILL.; 
H.  W.  Rokker  Co.,  Printers  and  Binders. 

1899. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1899,  by 

REV.  L.  HINSSBN, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress. 


PREFACE 


In  compiling  this  manual,  several  hand-books  of 
nursing  have  been  consulted  and  their  contents 
more  or  less  used.  My  motive  for  adding  another 
to  the  many  useful  and  excellent  books  on  nursing 
already  in  existence  was,  because  I  have  not  suc- 
ceeded so  far  in  finding  a  single  one  among  them 
exactly  adapted  to  meet  the  special  wants  of  young 
beginners  in  Hospital  communities,  viz.:  the  candi- 
dates and  novices.  Most  of  them  as  a  rule  apply 
for  admission  to  the  community  when  they  are  yet 
very  young.  All  are  actuated  by  the  holiest  motives 
which  religion  inspires,  to  devote  their  lives  to  the 
alleviation  of  suffering  humanity  for  Christ's  sake, 
but  are  often  without  much  experience  of  practical  life 
and  with  no  knowledge  of  Hospital  work  whatever. 
Many  a  candidate  loses  her  courage  before  the  first 
year  of  probation  is  at  an  end  on  account  of  the 
great  task  before  her,  viz.:  of  learning  within  the 
two  years  of  probation  the  prescribed  hand-books 
and  all  practical  work  that  is  required  of  a  nurse 
if  she  expects  to  pass  the  last  examination  success- 
fully. Undoubtedly,  the  practical  side  of  th«  train- 
ing of  a  nurse  is  the  most  important  ore,  but  the 
theoretical  instruction  must  go  hand  in  hand  with 
it.  The  latter,  as  a  rule,  offers  the  most  difficulties 
for  young  beginners.  Many  of  the  inevitable  diffi- 
culties might  be  lessened  if  the  best  method  of 
meeting  them  is  pursued.  After  some  years  of 
practical  experience  in  our  Training  School  this  best 
method  seemed   to  be,  to  analyze  at  the  daily  in- 


iv  Preface. 

structions  the  particular  chapter  on  the  art  of 
nursing,  in  short,  well  chosen  questions  and  an- 
swers, easy  to  remember,  and  then  let  the  practical 
instruction  follow.  This  is  the  history  of  the  origin 
of  the  present  Manual.  It  is  a  short,  popular  guide 
on  the  art  of  nursing,  which  gives  the  substance  of 
larger  hand-books,  and  prepares  the  candidates  and 
novices  gradually  and  easily  for  the  study  of  more 
difficult  books  on  nursing  and  the  final  examina- 
tion. The  method  has  been  tried  in  our  Training 
School  and  has  proved  a  complete  success. 

L.  H. 


CONTENTS 


Chapter  I. 

Qualifications  of  the  Nursing  Sister,  Personal  Appear- 
ance, Her  Conduct  Toward  the  Doctor,  the  Patient, 
the  Family  and  Servants,  Meals.  Pest  and  Exercise.      1-14 

Chapter  II. 

The  Sick  Room,  Private  Room  in  Hospital,   Hospital 

Wards 14-20 

Chapter  III. 
Deodorizer,  Thermometer.  A^entilation,  etc 20-24 

Chapter  IV. 
Changing  and  Airing  of  Bed  Clothes,  etc 24-29 

Chapter  V. 
Bathing 29-31 

Chapter  YI. 

Bed  Sores,  Giving  Medicine 32-34 

Chapter  YII. 
Things  Important  to  Write  Down,  Clinical  Record. . . .     34-36 

Chapter  Y1II. 
Pood  at  Night,  Manner  of  Serving  Meals,  etc 37-41 

Chapter  IX. 
Observation  of  Symptoms 41-48 

Chapter  X. 
Bed  Making,  Laying  Out  Corpse 48-52 

Chapter  XL 

Cleaning  of  Room,  Washing,  Bathing  Patient,  Chang- 
ing of  Clothes 52-54 

Chapter  XII. 

Ventilation,  Temperature,  Taking  of  Temperature 54-57 


vi  Contents. 

Chapter  XIII. 

Bandaging 57-62 

Chapter  XIV. 

Night  Watching,  Food,  Medicine 62-65 

Chapter  XY. 

Atomizer,  Bed  Rest,  Catheter 65-68 

Chapter  XVI. 

Enemas,  Syringe.  Bed  Pans,  etc 68-81 

Chapter  XVII. 

Leeches,  Cupping,  Poultices 81-91 

Chapter  XVIII. 

Counter  Irritants 91-95 

Chapter  XIX. 

Lotions,  Liniments,  Ointments 95-97 

Chapter  XX. 

Cold  Applications 97-99 

Chapter  XXL 

Hot  Applications,  Dry  Fomentations 99-102 

Chapter  XXII. 

Baths,  Cold  Douche,  Hot  Plunge  Bath,  Sponge  Bath, 

Vapor  Bath,  Cold  Plunge  Bath 102-111 

Chapter  XXIII. 
Massage 112-113 

Chapter  XXIV. 
Special  Medical  Cases,  Typhoid  Fever 113-124 

Chapter  XXV. 
Diet  List  for  Convalescents  of  Typhoid  Fever 124-126 

Chapter  XXVI. 
Typhus,  Scarlet  Fever,  Smallpox 126-133 

Chapter  XXVII. 
Chickenpox.  Measles.  Spasmodic  Croup 133-136 


Contents.  vii 

Chapter  XXVIII. 

Membraneous  Croup 137-140 

Chapter  XXIX. 

Diphtheritis,  Whooping  Cough 141-144 

Chapter  XXX. 

Pneumonia 144-148 

Chapter  XXXI. 

Pleurisy,  Cholera  Morbus,  Asiatic  Cholera 148-152 

Chapter  XXXII. 

Diarrhoea,  Dysentery,  Intestinal  Colic,  Hepatic  Colic.  .152-154 

Chapter  XXXIII. 

Gastritis,  Dyspepsia,  Peritonitis,  Appendicitis 154-158 

Chapter  XXXIV. 

Sore  Throat,  Bronchitis,  Asthma 158-160 

Chapter  XXXV.  * 

Laryngitis,  Catarrh,  Dropsy , 160-162 

Chapter  XXXVI. 

Bright's  Disease,  Renal  Colic,  Urticaris,  Eczema 162-164 

Chapter  XXXVII. 

Herpes,  Itch,  Cerebral  Apoplexy,  Paralysis 164-168 

Chapter  XXXVIII. 

Neuralgia,  Epilepsy,  Hysteria,  St.  Vitus  Dance 168-172 

Chapter  XXXIX. 

Cerebral  Meningitis,  Rheumatism,  Malaria  Fever 172-176 

Chapter  XL. 

Temperature,  Pulse,  Respiration,  Urine 176-183 

Chapter  LXI. 

Disinfecting  in  Communicable  Diseases 183-187 

Chapter  XLII. 
Surgical  Nursing,  Wounds,  Operations 187-206 


viii  Contents. 

Chapter  XLIII. 

Laparotomy 206-210 

Chapter  XLIV. 

Rules  for  Sisters  in  the  Surgical  Ward  and  Operating 

Room 210-211 

Chapter  XLV. 

Gynaecological  Cases 211-216 

Chapter  XL VI. 

Fractures,  Hemorrhage 217-226 

Chapter  XL VII. 

Emergencies,  Fractures  and  Dislocations 226-235 

Chapter  XLVIII. 

The  Human  Body 235-252 


I. 
THE  NURSING  SISTER. 

Q.    What  are  the  essential  qualifications  of   a  Sister  of 
Charity? 

1.  Love  of  God  and  fellow-creature. 

2.  Good  religious  and  secular  education. 

3.  Purity  of  intention:  all  for  Jesus. 

4.  Strength  of  body  and  mind. 

5.  Cheerful  disposition. 

6.  Cleanliness  to  perfection. 

7.  Equanimity  of  mind. 

.  8.    Patience  and  perseverence. 
Q.    What  else  is  required  of  a  Sister  that  has  to  nurse  the 
sick? 

She  must  be  well  trained,  conscientious  and  confi- 
dential. 

Q.    What  is  necessary  in  all  cases  of  serious  illness? 

In  all  cases  of  serious  illness,  whether  a  Sister  can  be 
secured  or  not,  there  should  be  a  certain  person  in  the  house 
who  should  be  responsible  for  the  patient  to  the  physician. 

Q.    What  will  be  the  consequence  if  two  or  three  persons 
take  charge  of  a  oatient? 

If  two  or  three  different  persons  take  orders  and  re- 
port symptoms  it  will  invariably  cause  confusion  and  mis 
takes ;  there  must  be  but  one  head. 

Q.     What  distresses  a  patient  more  in  a  Sister  than  in  a 
stranger? 

Want  of  order  and  common  sense. 

Professional  Nurse. 
Q.    How  will  a  well-trained  and  conscientious  nurse  deal 
with  all  her  patients? 


The  Nursing  Sister. 


A  really  conscientious  nurse  will  deal  as  kindly  and 
faithfully  with  the  poor  and  hospital  patients  as  those  sick  in 
pleasant  homes. 

Q.    When  is  a  Sister  generally  called  for  private  nursing 
outside  the  hospital? 

A  Sister  is  ordinarily  called  to  a  private  family  when 
the  family  is  worn  out  and  needs  immediate  relief. 

Q.    What  can  a  Sister  therefore  not  expect  when  she  is 
called  for  private  nursing? 

A  Sister  can  not  expect  to  begin  with  a  good  night's 
rest,  though  she  may  arrive  tired  and  after  a  long  journey. 

Q.    How  will  the  Sister   generally  find  a  family  at  her 
arrival? 

Exhausted  from  care,  watching  and  anxiety,  and  for 
this  reason  she  must  be  ready  to  shoulder  the  burden  which 
they  are  not  able  to  bear  a  moment  longer. 
Q.    What  must  she  therefore  do? 

She  must  at  once  take  her  official  position,  not  wait- 
ing to  be  told  what  to  do,  but  commencing  at  once  what  is  to 
be  done. 

Q.    What  should  she  realize? 

She  should  realize  that  a  life  is  entrusted  to  her  keep- 
ing and  that  she  alone  is  responsible  to  the  physician. 

Importance  of  Personal  Appearance. 

Q.     What  will  much  help  towards  inspiring  the  patient's 
confidence  for  a  sister? 

A  pleasant  personal  appearance. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  secured? 

It  can  be  secured  by  extrem'e  neatness  in  dress,  clean 
handkerchiefs  and  aprons,  attention  to  the  skin,  the  hands, 
the  teeth,  etc,  All  these  things  distinguish  a  well  trained 
sister  from  an  ignorant  one. 

Q.    What  should  be  worn  at  night? 
Warm  night  slippers. 


The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    What  should  be  avoided? 

Bundling  up  in  shawls,  which  are  likely  to  catch  in 
things  and  do  mischief. 

Keeping  Hands  in  Order. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  to  keep  the  hands  in  order? 

A  tew  drops  of  glycerine  rubbed  in  at  night  will  keep 
the  hands  smooth  if  care  is  taken  to  wipe  them  dry  each  time 
they  are  put  in  water? 

Q.    What  water  is  best  used  on  hands? 

Hot  water  is  thought  better  than  warm  or  cold. 

Q.    To  what  should  a  nurse  accustom  herself  in  using  her 
hands? 

To  alight  touch. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

A  sensitive  patient  is  often  disturbed  by  the  weight 
of  a  hand,  or  by  moist,  clammy  hands. 

Another  Aid  to  Make  a  Sister  Personally  Acceptable. 

Q.    What  else  will  aid  in  making  a  Sister  personally  ac- 
ceptable to  the  patient? 

Great  care  in  frequently  changing  and  airing  her 
clothes. 

Q.     What  removes  disagreeable  odors  from  sweats,  etc? 
A  few  drops  of  ammonia  in  the  water  used  for  wash- 
ing will  remove  disagreeable  odors  from  perspiration. 

Q.    What  will  be  very  refreshing  and  can  be  accomplished 
easy? 

A  daily  bath,  with  a  simple  basin  and  towel,  in  the 
following  manner:  Wring  out  a  rough  cloth  in  soap  and  wa- 
ter, and  rub  yourself  briskly  from  head  to  foot. 

Q.    How  long  will  this  bath  take? 

Five  minutes  will  suffice  each  day  and  help  in  keeping 
you  healthy,  fresh  and  pleasant. 


The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    What  should   never   be  done    in  the  presence  of  a 
patient? 

Never  trim  your  finger  nails,  though  they  must  be 
kept  scrupulously  clean:  never  use  an  ear  or  tooth-pick. 

Conduct  Towards  Servants. 

Q.    How  should  a  sister  conduct  herself  towards  the  ser- 
vants of  a  family'? 

She  should  be  careful  not  to  cause  them  unnecessary 
trouble  and  work. 

Q.    What  should  she  always  acknowledge? 

Any  little  service  rendered,  by  saying,  thank  you. 
Q.     What  should  you  let  them  feel? 

Let  them  feel  as  far  as  possible,  that  you  have  come  to 
share,  not  to  increase. the  extra  work,  that  sickness  always 
brings  to  a  house. 

Q.    What  should  the  sister  do  with  the  dishes  used  for 
the  patient? 

The  sister  should  wash  and  return  to  their  places 
cups,  plates,  spoons,  etc.,  used  for  the  patient. 
Q.    To  what  should  she  not  add  unnecessary? 
To  the  laundry. 

Conduct  Towards  the  Family. 

Q.    What  has  the  family  to  expect  from  a  sister? 

The  family  has  a  right  to  expect  from  a  sister  a  cheer- 
ful, helpful  spirit  in  all  things. 

Q.    About  what  should  she  not  be  too  particular? 

She  should  not  be  too  particular  about  the  dignity  of 
her  vocation. 

Q.    What  is  her  duty  towards  the  doctor? 

To  carry  out  all  his  orders. 
Q.    What  must  she  do  for  the  patient? 

All  that  is  essential  for  the  patient  in  the  way  she 
knows  best. 


The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    After  doing  this,  what  should  she  be  ready  to  accept 
from  the  family? 

Besides  this  there  are  many  little  things,  about  which 
•she  should  cheerfully  accept  the  suggestions  from  members  of 
the  family,  doing  them  in  their  way,  to  please  them. 
Q.    What  should  the  sister  never  forget'? 

She  should  never  forget  that  the  family  have  a  burden 
of  anxiety  to  bear,  when  a  dear  member  is  seriously  ill. 
Q.    How  should  a  sister  try  to  lighten  this  burden? 

She  should  try  to  lighten  this  burden  by  a  kind  and 
considerate  manner  towards  all  the  household. 
Q.    What  should  the  sister  remember? 

She  should  remember  that  she  is  responsible  to  the 
family  as  well  as  to  the  physician,  whose  orders  she  must  fol- 
low. 

About  the  Meals  of  the  Sister. 

Q.    What   understanding   should  she   make   about   the 
■meals? 

For  the  patient's  sake,  as  well  as  for  her  own,  and  in 
obedience  to  the  rules  of  the  community,  the  sister  should 
request  the  family  where  she  is  nursing,  from  the  beginning, 
that  her  meals  be  served  alone  out  of  the  sickroom. 

Q.    What  should  a  sister  never  betray  towards  a  patient? 
She  should  never  betray  towards  a  patient,  by  looks 
or  words,  any  lack  of  consideration,  and  try  to  settle  every 
thing  peacefully  and  quietly. 

Q.    To  Whom  Does  Her  Time  Belong? 
The  time  of  the  sister  belongs  to  those  who  have  em- 
ployed her. 

Q.    What  can  the  sister  do  if  she  has  some  time  at  leisure? 
If  the  patient  is  not  seriously  ill,  there  may  be  many 
hours,  during  which  the  sister  can  assist  the  family  in  sewing, 
after  she  has  finished  the  needle  work  brought  from  the  hos- 
pital. 


6  The  .Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Where  should  the  sister  never  bring  her  sewing? 

The  sister  should,  on  no  account,  bring  her  sewing  in 
the  presence  of  any  sick  person  or  convalescent. 
Q.    What  must  the  sister  avoid  besides  this'? 

She  must  never  turn  up  the  gas  bright  in  a  sickroom 
in  order  to  be  able  to  sew  or  knit. 
Q,    Why? 

Because  the  bright  light  is  not  pleasant  to  the  eyes  of 
a  sick  person.  Moreover  one  gas  burner  consumes  a  large 
amount  of  air  needed  for  the  patient. 

Rest  and  Exercise. 

Q.    When  can  a  sister  take  rest,  when  her  patient  is  very 

ill? 

If  the  patient  is  very  ill,  rest  can  only  be  taken  at  odd 

times,  when  he  can  safely  be  trusted  with  some  member  of 

the  family. 

Q.    What  is  very  important  for  the  sister  to  cultivate  in 

regard  to  sleep? 

She  should  accustom  herself  to  the  habit  of  light 
sleep. 

Q.    What  is  often  necessary  with  very  ill  patients? 

It  some  times  is  necessary  to  be  wide  awake  all  night. 
Q.    What  should  a  sister  provide  for  in  this  case? 

In  this  case  the  sister  must  not  neglect  to  provide  for 
a  cup  of  coffee  and  some  refreshments,  to  be  taken  if  possible, 
in  an  adjoining  room. 

Q.    What  else  should  be  kept  in  an  adjoining  room? 

The  little  things  and  utensils  necessary  to  use  in  care 
of  the  sick. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  be  allowed  occasionally? 

She  must  be  relieved  occasionally  from  her  work,  and 
allowed  at  least  four  hours  undisturbed  sleep,  and  a  little  ex- 
ercise in  the  fresh  air  not  less  than  twice  a  week. 

Q.    In  what  case  does  the  sister  get  sufficient  fresh  air? 
In  cases  where  she  is  permitted  to  go  to  mass  in  the 
morning. 


The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    If  there  is    no    arrangements    made  for  this  what 
should  the  sister  do? 

The  sister  should  pleasantly  ask  for  relief. 
Q.    In  case  relief  is  not  given,  is  she  allowed  to  show  dis- 
satisfaction? 

Never.  Nor  should  she  show  unwillingness  to  go  to 
the  patient,  even  when  off  duty,  and  never  let  him  see  that 
she  is  tired  or  disturbed  about  anything. 

Before  Entering  the  Room. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  before  entering  the  patient's 
room? 

The  mantle  should  be  taken  off. 
Q.     What  next? 

Make  herself  ready  for  work,  inform  herself  where 
towels  and  clean  linen  are  kept,  where  to  put  soiled  cloth- 
ing, and  where  to  empty  and  wash  vessels. 

H  >w  to  Greet  a  Patient. 
Q.    How  can  you  best  greet  a  patient  on  seeing  him  the 
first  time? 

On  entering  the  room  the  first  time,  a  pleasant  look 
or  bow  are  sufficient. 

Q.    What  will  make  you  acquainted  with  the  patient? 
The  first  service  skillfully  rendered  will  make  you  ac- 
quainted with  the  patient  and  often  confirm  or  destroy  his 
confidence  in  you. 

Q.    Where  should  the  sister  not  sit  in  the  sick  room? 
She  should  not  sit,   where  the  patient  cannot  help 
seeing  her:  she  should  no:  appear  to  watch  him,  though  she 
must  observe  him  constantly. 

Whispering  in  a  Sick  Room. 
Q.    What  may  whispering  in  a  sick  room  be  called  under 
circumstances? 

There  may  be  circumstances  in  which  a  whispered 
conversation  may  be  called  cruelty  against  the  patient. 


8  The  Nursing  Sistek. 

Q.    Why? 

Because  it  is  impossible  that  the  patient's  attention 
should  not  be  strained  to  hear  what  is  whispered. 
Q.     What  is  also  injurious  for  the  same  reason? 

Walking;  on  tip  toes  and  moving  stealthily  about  the 
room. 

Q.     What  will  seldom  annoy  the  patient? 

A  low.  distinct  tone,  when  conversation  is  necessary, 
and  a  light  step  will  seldom  annoy. 

Q.  Will  a  patient  easily  complain  of  things  that  annoy 
him? 

No:  a  patient  will  often  refrain  from  complaining  of 
these  things,  lest  he  should  be  thought  selfish. 

Q.  What  must  a  sister  do,  therefore,  in  regard  to  these 
things? 

She  must  all  the  more  take  care  to  protect  the  patient 
from  them. 

Other  Things  that  Disturb  a  Patient. 

Q.     What  other  things  disturb  a  patient? 

Sitting  on  the  bed,  the  rattling  of  newspapers,  the 
turning  over  of  leaves  with  a  snap,  the  swinging  of  a  rock- 
ing chair,  sewing,  and  the  clicking  of  knitting  needles,  one  or 
all,  are  sometimes  seriously  annoying  to  the  patient. 

Q.    What  injures  a  patient  mostly? 

Unnecessary  or  unexplained  noise,  though  slight,  in- 
jures a  sick  person  much  more  than  necessary  noise  of  a  much 
greater  amount. 

How  to  Promote  the  Peace  of  Mind  and  Serenity  of 

the  Patient. 

Q.  How  can  a  sister  promote  the  peace  of  mind  and  se- 
renity of  her  patient? 

She  can  do  this  by  moving  about  quietly,  promptly 
putting  things  in  their  places  knowing  the  right  thing  to  do. 
Q.    How  should  she  do  all  these  things? 
Without  any  hurry. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  9 

Q.     What  should  the  sister  never  ask  of  the  patient? 

The  sister  should  not  call  upon  the  patient  to  give  his 
decision  on  anything,  or  let  him  be  startled  by  anyone  or 
anything. 

Q.     What  should  the  sister  always  anticipate'? 

She  should  anticipate  little  wants,  but  never  question 
in  regard  to  them. 

Q.    What  should  the  sister  not  do  if  the  patient  is  de- 
lirious? 

She  should  not  contradict  him. 
Q.    But  what  should  she  do  in  this  case? 

She  should  humor  his  notions  quietly,  whatever  they 
may  be,  or  say  nothing  unless  questioned. 

Q.    What  must  be  carefully  avoided  in  fever  delirium? 

All  appearance  of  fear. 
Q.    Where  must  the  sister  do  her  thinking? 

She  must  do  her  thinking  inside  of  her  head,  and  not 
oblige  the  patient  to  hear  her  say,  for  example:  "There!  I 
must  go  and  see  about  that  beef  tea,  but  I  guess  I'll  wash  up 
the  spoons  first,"  etc. 

Q.    How  should  a  sister  listen  to  the  patient? 

The  sister  should  listen  attentively  to  the  patient 
when  he  speaks,  and  never  ask  him  to  repeat. 

Q.    Is  it  advisable  for  a  sister  to  speak  to  the  patient 
from  a  distance? 

Never,  from  a  distance,  or  standing  behind  him. 
Q.    How  should  she  shut  a  door,  and  how  can  creaking  be 
prevented? 

Shut  the  door  quickly  and  softly,  oil  the  hinges,  if 
rusty,  to  prevent  squeaking. 

Other  Things  that  are  Never  to  be  Spoken  of  Be- 
fore a  Patient. 

Q.    About  what  may  a  sister  never  speak  to  a  patient? 
She  may  on  no  account  speak  of  the  sicknesses  and 
diseases  of  other  patients,  or  of  disagreeable  hospital  experi- 


10  The  Nursing  Sister. 

ences,  operations  performed,  and  sufferings  witnessed,  news- 
paper reports  of  crimes  and  calamities,  or  anything  that  may 
excite  painful  emotions. 

Q.    How  should  every  conversation  of  the  siste*r  with  the 
patient  be? 

It  should  be  cheerful,  brief,  not  too  loud. 

Q.    From    what   should    the  sister    divert  the    patient 
always? 

She  should  divert  the  patient  always  from  glo-uny 
thoughts,  and  avoid  too  much  talking  of  any  kind. 

The  Symptoms  of  a  Sick  Person  not  a  Topic  of  Conver- 
sation. 

Q.    Of  what  else  should  a  sister  never  speak  in  the  pres- 
ence of  the  patient? 

She  should  never  speak  of  the  symptoms  unless  ques- 
sioned  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    What  more  should  the  sister  avoid? 

Never  give  an  unfavorable  opinion  of  his  condition  to 
any  one  in  his  hearing. 

Lowr  Spirited  Patients. 
Q.    What  should  a  sister  do  with  a  low  spirited  patient? 
If  she  can  conscientiously  encourage  a  patient,' she 
should  do  so. 

Q.    How  should  she  best  do  this?. 

Keep  him  cheerful  and  free  from  anxiety. 
Q.    What  should  the  sister  do  on  her  part? 

She  should  never  look  gloomy  or  anxious  herself,  or 
give  up  hope  while  there  is  life. 

Insensible  Patients. 
Q.    What  should  a  sister  never  say  in  the  presence  of  an 
insensible  patient? 

Though  a  patient  seems  insensible  or  in  a  stupor, 
never  say  anything  loud  in  his  presence  which  he  ought  not 
to  hear. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  11 

Q.    Why? 

His  hearing  may  be  acute,  though  he  may  not  be 
able  to  speak  or  move. 

Duties  Towards  the  Doctor. 
Q.    What  duties  has  a  sister  towards  the  doctor? 

She  must  implicitly  obey  all  his  directions,  carefully 
report  in  writing  every  symptom  and  the  exact  history  of  the 
day  since  his  last  visit. 

Q.    What  must  she  encourage  on  the  patient's  part? 

She  must  encourage  full  confidence  in  the  doctor  on 
the  part  of  the  patient. 

Q.    What  may  a  sister  never  discuss? 

She  may  never  discuss  the  doctor's  treatment  of  the 
case. 

A  Sister  not  Justified  in  Leaving  a  Case  Without  Per- 
mission. 

Q.    Is  a  sister  allowed  to  leave  a  case    whenever   she 
pleases? 

Having  once  assumed  the  responsibility  of  a  patient, 
it  is  her  duty  to  remain  with  the  patient  as  long  as  she  can 
be  of  any  use,  unless  obedience  or  her  own  health  obliges  her 
to  leave. 

Q.    What  should  she  do  if  the  case  has  become  chronic  or 
incurable? 

In  this  case  the  sister  is  not  obliged  to  remain,  but 
she  should  follow  the  directions  of  her  superiors. 

Q.    How  long  is  a  sister  allowed  to  remain  out  nursing 
without  special  permission? 

One  week  at  a  time,  except  there  is  a  probability 
that  the  patient  will  soon  die. 

Suggestions  for  a  Sister. 
Q.    What  should  a  sister  never  speak  of  on  her  return 
from  nursing? 

Tales  out  of  school. 


12  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  may  a  sister  never  talk  about? 

Never  about  her  own  exploits  in  nursing,   personal 
items  of  physician,  or  other  things,  out  of  the  hospital,  neither 
before  the  family,  nor  single  patients,  or  in  recreation. 
Q.     What  ought  a  sister  feel  regarding  all  this? 

She  should  remember,  that  gossip,  though  it  may 
gratify  curiosity  for  the  moment,  will  not  in  the  end  increase 
the  respect  for  the  sister,  nor  for  religious  in  general. 
Q.  How  should  a  sister  be  in  her  mind  and  manners? 
A  sister  should  have  in  her  thoughts,  the  purity  of 
intention,  and  in  her  manners,  be  meek  and  firm,  in  her 
words,  discreet  and  prudent. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  preserve  in  all  occurences  of  her 
vocation? 

She  must  preserve  purity  of  heart,  the  modesty  of 
her  eyes,  and  guard  her  tongue. 

Concerning  Callers. 

Q.    What  will  a  sister,  who  respects  herself,  never  allow 
whilst  on  duty? 

No  sister  who  respects  herself  will  ever  allow  her  du- 
ties to  be  interrupted  or  neglected  by  callers. 

Q.    In  what  points  must  a  sister  be  extremely  careful? 
In  the  matter  of  so-called  private  friendships,  for 
they  are  forbidden  by  the  rule  and  dangerous  to  virtue. 

Q.    What  are  often  the  consequences  of  such  friendships? 

Every  woman,  and  more  so  a  religious,  will  injure  her 

reputation  for  life,  if  she  associatesjwith  unworthy  persons, 

men  or  women,  or  with  those  to  whom  the  slightest  suspicion 

attaches. 

Q,     How  should  a  sister  associate  with  men? 

Her  conduct  should  be  modest,  earnest  and  brief,  not 
more  than  what  is  necessary. 

Q.    When  can  a  sister  be  a  great  comfort  and  aid  in  a 
family? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  13 

In  times  of  greatest  distress,  or  when  it  is  clear  that 
the  patient  is  dying,  then  quiet  self-possession  and  sincere 
sympathy  will  be  of  the  first  importance. 
Q.    What  should  a  sister  do  in  this  case? 

She  should  do  all  she  can  for  the  patient,  and  then,  if 

not  needed,  stand  aside,   that  the  family  may  be  nearest  to 

him. 

Q.    When  death  has  come,  is  there  any  need  of  hurry? 

When  death  has  come,  there  is  no  need,  as  in  hospital 

wards,  to  hurry  along  the  arrangements. 

Q.    How  long  should  the  relatives  be  left  undisturbed. 

Until  they  leave  the  room  voluntarily. 

Q.     What  may  be  done  then,  and  how  should  it  be  done? 

Then  a  sister  may  do  what  is  necessary.    She  should 

be  very  careful  that  everything  is  done  tenderly,  and  that 

great  care  is  taken  against  exposure. 

Q.    What  can  the  sister  do  after  the  corpse  is  laid  out? 

She  should  leave  the  room,  clothing,  etc.,  in  perfect 

order,  and  put  out  of  sight  medicine  or  other  traces  of  the 

sickness. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  bedclothes,  etc. 

All  bedding,  towels  and  clothing  should  be  taken  to  the 

laundry;  the  windows  in  the  room  should  be  opened  wide,  the 

shutters  closed. 

Special,  Obligations  for  a.  Sister  to  Consider  all  Con- 
fidential Communications  of  the  Patient  Sacred. 
Q.     What  is  a  sister  bound  to  hold  sacred? 

She  is  bound  to  hold  sacred  the  confidences  which  she 
may  have  received  from  a  patient,  and  never  betray  any  family 
secrets,  and  her  good  reputation  must  follow  her  in  this  re- 
spect wherever  she  goes. 

Q.    What  will  be  the  consequence  if  a  sister  is  not  careful 
in  talking  about  family  affairs? 

If  it  is  once  known  that  a  sister  likes  to  gossip,  then 
she  will  bring  disgrace  upon  the  hospital  where  she  comes 
from  and  the  religious  life  in  general. 


14  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Telling  Sad  News. 
Q.     What  is  the  sister  sometimes  called  upon  to  tell  the 
patient? 

It  may  sometimes  happen  that  the  sister  is  called 
upon  to  tell  the  patient  that  death  is  near. 

Q.    Without  whose  permission  should  this  never  be  done"? 

Without  the  doctor's  permission. 
Q.     In  what  case  should  she  'not  do  it  at  all? 

If  there  he  any  member  of  the  family,  or  clergyman, 
or  other  person  to  whom  the  duty  rightfully  belongs. 
Q.    If  a  sister  must  speak,  how  should  she  do  it? 

She  should  speak  with  the  greatest  possible  gentle- 
ness. 

Q.    What  is  death  to  many  a  weary  wanderer? 

Death  is  a  relief  for  many  a  weary  wanderer  on  earth 
and  it  will  be  a  consolation  for  him  that  he  will  soon  be  re- 
leased through  death  from  his  sufferings.  A  sister  must  show 
all  courage  of  a  Christian  soul,  and  tact  of  a  wise  nurse  at  the 
time  of  death  of  a  patient. 

Q.    Without  what  qualities  is  a  sister  not  fit  for  a  nurse? 
Without  a  quiet,  cheerful  Christian  faith  no  woman 
is  properly  fitted  for  a  nurse,  especially  not  when  a  patient  is 
dying. 

The  Patient's  Room. 

Q.    What  room  is  the  best  for  a  patient? 

A  room  on  the  south  side  of  the  house  which  has  an 
open  fire-place. 

Q.     What  should  a  sister  do  if  such  a  room  can  be  had? 
Should  there  be  such  a  room  to  which  the  patient  can 
be  removed,  the  sister  should  pleasantly  suggest  the  change  to 
the  family. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  the  fire-place  be  stopped  up? 
If  the  chimney  is  stopped  up  with  a  fire-board,  news- 
papers, blower  or  bunch  of  straw,  the  sister  should  at  once  re- 
move it  and  make  the  chimney  free. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  15 

Q.    How  should  the  room  he  kept? 

Bright  and  cheerful,  unless  the  condition  of  the 
patient  requires  it  darkened. 

Q.    Should  the  sunlight  be  left  in  or  not? 

Let  the  sunlight  in  freely,  always  shading  the 
patient's  face. 

Q.    What  should  the  sister  do  if  the  bed  faces  the  window? 
She  should  turn  it  around  or,  better,  set  up  a  screen. 
Q.    What  is  very  trying  on  the  eyes  of  a  patient? 

Bars  and  streaks  from  ill-fitting  blinds  are  very  trying 
on  the  eyes. 

Q.    Should  the  bed  stand  up  close  to  the  wall? 

The  bed  should  be  pulled  out  from  the  wall  as  far  as 
possible,  that  the  air  may  have  an  access  to  it  from  all  sides, 
and  the  sister  may  move  easily  about  it. 

Q.    If  the  physician  prefers  a  darkened  room  what  should 
the  sister  do? 

The  sister  must  accustom  herself  to  moving  about 
quietly  in  it  and  let  no  consideration  for  ner  own  convenience 
lead  her  to  object  to  the  order  of  the  doctor. 

Q.     What  should  be  carried  out  of  the  room? 

All  ornaments  and  anything  not  needed,  for  it  will 
only  make  a  lodging  place  for  the  dust. 

Q.    What  should  be  clone  with  rocking  chairs? 

Take  away  rocking  chairs  that  visitors  may  not  be 
tempted  to  swing  in  them. 

Q.    How  should  the  washstand  be  kept? 

Everything  about  the  washstand  should  be  kept  clean . 
Q.    Where  should  the  various  little  things  be  kept? 

If  there  is  no  adjoining  room  or  closet  in  which  the 
various  little  matters  which  you  require  in  your  work  may  be 
put,  then  keep  them  out  of  sight  behind  a  screen. 

Private  Rooms  ra  a  Hospital,. 

Q.    How    should  the  walls  of  a  private  room  in  a  hos- 
pital be? 

Either  whitewashed  or  painted  in  a  light  color. 


16  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  may  hang  on  the  walls? 

Nothing  but  a  crucifix. 
Q.    How  shall  the  floor  be? 

The  floor  should" be  oiled,  varnished  or  painted  and  a 
rug  along  side  of  the  bed. 
Q.    What  furniture? 

A  bedstead  with  springs  (iron  one  preferred),  mat- 
tress and  bed-clothes,  wardrobe,  bureau,  washstand,  two 
chairs,  easy  chair,  bedside,  table  and  commode. 

Q.    What  kind  of  goods  may  be  used  for  cushions,  tidies 
and  covers? 

Only  washable  goods. 

Hospital  Wards. 

Q.    WThat  is  absolutely  necessary  in  a  hospital  ward? 

The  first  requisite  is  scrupulous  cleanliness. 
Q.     Why? 

1.  Because  in  a  ward  there  are  a  greater  number  of 
lives  at  stake. 

2.  No  amount  of  ventilation  will  keep  the  air  fresh 
in  a  ward  that  is  not  clean. 

Q.    What  is  dust  in  a  ward? 

Not  only  dirt,  but  danger. 
Q.    Of  what  does  dust  consist? 

It  consists  largely  of  organic  matter,  which  must  be 
taken  away,  not  merely  stirred  up  and  redistributed. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

By  carefully  dusting  and  sweeping  the  floor  with  a 
damp  broom,  with  long  strokes,  and  washing  the  floor  fre- 
quently with  clear  water  which  cannot  be  changed  too  often. 
Q.    What  is  the  consequence,  if  a  ward  is  swept  carelessly 
and  clouds  of  dust  are  raised? 

The  dust  will  be  driven  over  the  beds  and  into  the 
eyes  and  mouths  of  its  unfortunate  occupants,  who  cannot  get 
out  of  the  way,  but  can  only  stay  and  be  choked,  or  their 
lungs  affected  by  poisonous  germs. 


The  Nursing  SrsTER.  17 

Q.    What  must  be  immediately  removed  from  the  wards'? 

All  vessels  must  be  immediately  removed  upon  use, 

and  thoroughly  cleaned.    Never  brin.r  a  slop  pale  into  the 

ward,  all  waste  matters,  even  water  used  for  washing,  should 

be  at  once  carried  out. 

Q.    What  should  at  once  be  removed  besides  this? 

All  soiled  clothes.  Before  sending  them  to  the  laun- 
dry, see  that  there  be  no  pins  left  in  them,  that  they  are  dis- 
tinctly marked  with  the  letter  of  the  ward,  and  if  private 
property,  with  the  number  of  the  room  or  ward  and  name  of 
the  patient.  Roll  every  dirty  thing  in  a  bundle  by  them- 
selves. 

Q.    What  takes  the  first  and  what  takes  the  second  place 

in  a  ward? 

Cleanliness,  everywhere  next  to  Godliness,  takes  pre- 
cedence in  a  hospital  ward  of  all  other  virtues:  Order, 
heaven's  first  law,  has  a  secondary  but  still  very  important 
place.  A  well  kept  ward  is  characterized  by  neatness  and 
uniformity. 

Q.    What  adds  a  great  deal  to  the  attractive  appearance 
of  a  ward? 

A  little  care  to  have  things  straight.   The  beds  should 

be  in  an  exact  line,  chairs,  tables  and  rugs  at  the  same  angle, 
to  each  other.  No  clothes  may  be  tucked  about  the  beds  or 
flung  over  the  chairs. 

Q.    What  must  be  inspected  daily? 

The  bedside  tables,  and  no  rubbish  allowed  to  ac- 
cumulate in  them. 

Q.    What  is  often  the  consequence  if  this  is  neglected? 
The  patient  will  be  apt  to  stow  away  dirty  clothes,  re- 
mains of  meals,  dead  flowers,  apple  peels  or  any  refuse  that 
may  need  to  be  disposed  of. 

Q.    What  may  never  be  thrown  away. 

Nothing  that  can  in  any  way  be  utilized.  If  supplies 
are  furnished  liberally  it  should  not  be  thought,  those  little 
bits  are  of  no  account,  but  they  should  be  made  to  go  as  far  as 

possible. 
—2 


18  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.     Why? 

Because  hospital  supplies  are  expensive  and  it  is  the 
sisters  duty  to  see  that  nothing  is  wasted. 

Q.    What  else  must  a  sister  do  regarding  these  supplies'? 

She  must  see  that  they  are  well  kept  up,  everything 

expected,  to  be  on  hand,  renewed  before  quite  exhausted  and 

always  kept  in  the  same  place,  so  if  wanted  they  can  easily  be 

found. 

Q.    How  can  much  confusion  be  avoided? 

By  getting  every  thing  ready,  even  the  smallest  detail, 
before  beginning  the  process.  Have  a  clear  idea  in  mind  of 
what  is  to  be  done  and  never  get  excited.  You  will  then  be 
able  to  be  prompt  without  hurrying,  quite  and  methodical  in 
movement,  and  will  doubtless  soon  achieve  a  reputation  as  a 
neat  and  skillful  nurse. 

Bedside  Tables. 

Q.    What  should  be  placed  for  the  patient's  use  at  the 
head  of  the  bed? 

A  small,  light  table,  with  a  drawer. 
Q.    What  should  be  placed  on  this  table? 

A  glass  of  water  or  of  cracked  ice,  covered  with  a 
saucer  or  a  napkin. 

Q.    What  else  may  be  placed  upon  this  table  if  the  case 
permits? 

An  orange  nicely  prepared  in  little  sections;  just  large 
enough  for  a  mouthful,  or  any  other  ripe  fruit,, if  the  doctor 
permits. 

Q.    Upon  what  should  the  fruit  be  placed? 

Over  a  bowl  in  which  there  is  ice. 
Q.    Is  there  anything  else  that  may  be  allowed  to  be 
placed  upon  this  table? 

A  few  very  fresh  flowers,  nothing  else. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  is  a  stationary  wash 
stand  in  the  room. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  19 

If  there  be  a  stationary  wash  basin  in  the  room,  put 
in  the  plug,  and  fill  the  basin  full  of  water,  which  must  be 
changed  from  time  to  time. 

Q.    What  may  be  stuffed  into  the  basin? 

♦    A  towel,  and  then  cover  it  with  a  stiff  paper  or  board. 
Q.    Should  anytning  be  emptied  in  this  basin? 

Never  should  anything  be  emptied  into  it,  nor  should 
the  basin  be  used  in  any  way. 

Reasons  for  Not  Using  Stationary  W^.shstands. 

Q.    Why  should  no  water,  used  for  any  purpose  in  a  sick 
room,  be  emptied  into  a  stationary  washstand? 

The  water  you  bath  your  patient  in,  or  use  for  any 
purpose  about  the  sick  room,  is  very  impure,  and  if  emptied 
into  the  basin  will  form  a  slime  round  the  pipes,  and  the  im- 
purity will  escape  into  the  room  again  in  the  form  of  foul  air. 

Q.    How  is  often  the  waste  pipe  of  a  stationary  basin'? 
It  is  almost  sure  to  1  e  defective,  sooner  or  later,  and 
sewer  gas  may  rise  through  it  from  other  parts  of  the  house  or 
from  the  streets  and  poison  the  air  of  the  sick  room. 

Slop  Pails. 
Q.    Should  slop  pails  be  allowed  in  a  room? 

Slop  pails  should  never  be  allowed  in  a  sick  room. 
Q.    How  should  vessels  be  carried  out? 

All  vessels  should  be  carried  out  of  the  room,  emptied 
and  washed  immediately,  and  towels  kept  constantly  clean  for 
this  purpose. 

Bedpans  and  Other  Vessels. 
Q.     Where  should  bedpans  and  other  urinals  never  be 
kept? 

Never  allow  vessels,  bedpans  or  urinals  to  stand, 
where  they  can  be  seen,  either  by  patients  or  by  persons  com- 
ing into  the  room. 

Q.     Where  should  they  be  kept?' 

In  a  closet  or  adjoining  room,  if  possible,  and  never 
put  them  under  the  bed. 


20  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Where  can  they  be  placed  for  instant  use? 

If  they  must  be  ready  for  instant  use,  put  them  near 
the  bed,  and  throw  a  clean  towel  over  them. 
Q.    What  should  be  kept  in  the  vessels? 

Always  keep  a  deoderizer  in  them. 
Q.    What  shall  be  put  in  the  water  in  which  they  are 
washed? 

Put  a  little  washing  soda  or  soap  in  the  water. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  vessels  before  bringing 
them  to  the  patient? 

Vessels  should  be  warmed  before  they  are  brought  to 
the  patient,  if  the  weather  is  cold. 

A  Deoderizer. 
Q.    What  makes  a  splendid  deoderizer? 

A  pound  of  sulphate  of  iron  (copperas)  dissolved  in 
two  quarts  of  rainwater,  makes  an  excellent  deoderizer,  and 
has  no  disagreeable  smell. 
Q.    How  can  it  be  used? 

Pour  a  little  into  the  vessels  after  washing  them,  and 
keep  it  in  them. 

Q.    What  effect  has  this  on  towels? 
This  mixture  will  stain  towels. 

A  Disinfectant  for  Vessels. 
Q.    What  will  make  a  good  disinfectant? 

The  following  mixture:    Water,  two  and  one-half  gal- 
lons: sulphate  of  iron,  two  pounds;  carbolic  acid,  four  pounds. 
Q.     How  can  it  be  used? 

In  communicable  diseases,  in  typhoid  fever  and 
dysentary,  always  keep  it  in  the  veseels,  and  pour  some  in  the 
closet  every  day. 

Thermometer. 
Q.    How  high  should  the  thermometer  in  a  sickroom  be? 
Never  let  the  thermometer  rise  above  70  degrees,  un- 
less in  special  cases,  such  as  croup,  when  the  doctor's  direc- 
tions must  be  followed. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  21 

Q.    How  high  should  temperature  he  at  night? 

From  60  to  65  degrees,  unless  the  doctor  direct  other- 
wise; ask  him  about  it. 

Ventilation. 

Q.    Are  cold  rooms  always  well  ventilated? 

By  no  means:  the  air  in  a  cold  room  may  be  very  im- 
pure? 

Q.    What  else  can  at  times  be  suggested  for  good  venti- 
lation? 

That  a  door  be  swung  rapidly  and  quietly  back  and 
forth:  it  will  force  the  bad  air  out  of  the  room,  and  draw  in 
the  fresh  air  from  the  window,  which  is  down  at  the  top. 

The  Door  in  the  Hall. 

Q.    Why  should  the  door  of  a  sick  room  not  be  left  open 
into  the  hall? 

Because  you  cannot  ventilate  a  room  by  merely  hav- 
ing the  door  open  into  the  hall.  Only  the  stale  air  comes 
into  the  room,  and  the  noise  is  heard  from  the  whole  house. 

Q.    In  what  case  should  the  door  into  the  adjoining  room 
be  left  open? 

If  the  adjoining  room  can  be  ventilated  through  an 
open  window. 

Q.    For  what  time  would  this  suffice? 
This  would  be  sufficient  for  night. 

Fumigating. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  said  about  fumigating? 

That  the  burning  of  pastilles,  or  coffee,  the  sprinkling 
of  perfume,  etc.,  does  not  purify  the  air;  it  simply  covers  the 
toad  air. 

Q.    From  where  alone  does  clean  air  come? 
Only  from  the  outside  of  the  house. 


22  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  can  you  protect  a  patient  while  ventilating? 
By  placing  a  screen  before  tbe  window  or  arranging 
the  blinds  or  shutters  so  there  be.no  direct  draft  on  the  pa- 
tient. 

Q.    If  there  is  an  open  fireplace  in  the  room,  what  should 
be  done? 

Put  a  lighted  lamp  or  candle  in  it. 
Q.    For  what  purpose? 

This  will  draw  the  foul  air  up  the  chimney,  while  the 
fresh  air  from  the  window  takes  its  place. 

Q.  '  What  will  do,  if  there  cannot  be  a  constant  Are  kept 
up  in  the  fireplace. 

A  few  sticks,  lighted  several  times  a  day,  and  the 
lamp  kept  burning  at  all  other  times  in  the  chimney,  will  se- 
cure constant  ventilation. 

Q.    How  often  should  the  windows  be  opened  wide  in  a 
sick  room? 

If  the  case  permits,  three  times  a  day,  at  least. 
Q.    If  this  cannot  be  done,  what  can  be  done  instead? 
An  adjoining  room  can  be  filled  with  fresh  air,  wait- 
ing until  it  is  warmed  a  little,  then  opening  the  door  and  let- 
ting the  fresh  air  into  the  sick  room. 

Q.    In  what  case  is  the  patient  not  allowed  to  breathe  in 
the  cold  air? 

In  all  cases  that  involve  the  throat,  lungs  or  nasal 
passages,  croup,  sore  throat,  diphtheria,  pneumonia,  typhoid, 
scarlet  fever  and  measles,  which  occasion  to  be  throat  trou- 
bles. In  all  these  cases  the  patient  must  be  covered  and  re- 
main so  until  the  fresh  air  be  sufficiently  warmed. 

Putting  the  Room  in  Order. 

Q.    Whose  duty  is  it  to  keep  the  patient's  room  in  order 
and  what  does  it  require? 

It  is  the  sister's  duty,  and  requires  good  management 
and  common  sense. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  23 

Q.    What  time  should  it  be  done? 

Choose  the  time  when  the  patient  will  be  least  dis- 
turbed, which  is  generally  after  breakfast. 

Q.     What  must  the  sister  avoid  if  she  intends  to  put  the 
room  in  order? 

She  must  never  move  about  restless,  fussy,  when  the 
patient  is  eating. 

Q.    What  should  be  used  for  dusting? 

Never  use  a  feather  duster;  dust  the  furniture,  wood- 
work, etc.,  with  a  cloth. 

Q.    Where  is  the  rug  put  and  how  is  the  carpet  swept? 
The  rug  should  be  hung  in  the  air.     Dip  a  cloth  in 
water  and  wring  it  out  dry  and  pass  it  quickly  over  the  carpet. 
Q.    Where  is  this  especially  necessary? 

Under  the  bed:  for  this  purpose,  therefore,  the  cloth 
can  be  fastened  around  the  broom. 

Q.    What  should  be  put  around  the  bed  while  the  moving 
is  going  on? 

A  screen. 
Q.    When  can  the  room  be  cleaned  thoroughly? 

Only  when  the  patient  can  be  moved  out  for  a  while. 

Where  Bottles,  Spoons  and  Glasses  Be  Kept. 
Q.    Where  should  glasses,  spoons,  etc.,  be  kept. 

All  of  these  things  should  be  kept  out  of  sight  on  a 
table. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  the  medicine  is  changed? 

The  boxes  and  bottles  which  are  no  longer  needed 
should  be  set  aside  in  a  closet  so  as  to  avoid  mistakes. 

Q.    How  can  you  avoid  the  staining  of  spoons  from  the 
medicine? 

By  having  a  bowl  of  water  with  the  medicine  and 
keeping  the  spoons  in  it. 

Q.    What  is  mostly  used  for  giving  medicine? 
A  graduated  glass. 


24  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    la  what  case  must  a  spoon  be  used? 

When  the  medicine  is  oily. 
Q.    What  should  always  be  on  hand  with  the  medicine? 
One  or  two  cloths  to  wipe  the  glass  or  spoon  after  it 
is  washed. 

Q.    If  you  have  a  medicine  glass  for  one  person  alone,  how 
often  should  it  be  washed? 

As  often  as  it  is  used. 
Q.    Where  should  all  washing  of  spoons  and  glasses  be 
done? 

Out  of  the  patient's  room. 
Q.     Why? 

Because  the  rattling  is  very  annoying  for  the  patient. 

How  to  Change  the  Bedclothes. 

Q.    How  can  you  change  the  under  sheets? 

Fold  the  under  sheet,  then  remove  the  soiled  sheet 
with  the  same  motion  which  puts  on  the  fresh  one. 

Q.     What  must  first  be  done  with  the  sheet? 

It  must  first  be  warmed  and  aired,  then  fold  half  of  it 
up  small  and  fiat  through  its  whole  length,  lay  the  folded  part 
next  and  close  to  the  patient,  pushing  before  it  the  soiled  un- 
der sheet  folded  in  the  same  way. 

Q.  How  can  the  sheets  then  be  put  under  the  patient? 
Press  down  the  mattress  close  by  the  patient  and 
gently  work  the  two  folds,  the  soiled  and  the  clean  one,  under 
the  back.  The  head  and  the  feet  can  be  slightly  raised  to  allow 
the  folds  to  pass:  after  this  is  done  you  have  only  to  pull  the 
sheet  smooth  and  tuck  it  in. 

Q.     What  should  be  done  with  the  pillows? 

They  should  be  changed  several  times  a  day;  slip  a 
cool  fresh  one  under  the  patient's  head  and  take  away  the 
warm  one. 

Q.    If  the  bed  is  wide  what  can  be  done  for  the  patient's 
comfort? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  25 

The  patient  can  be  gently  moved  from  one  side  to  the 
other,  turning  and  never  dragging  him,  and  always  have  a  fresh 
one  ready  for  the  night. 

Q.     How  can  the  upper  sheet  be  changed"? 

Air  and  warm  the  sheet  and  then  roll  it  in  its  width; 
pass  it  under  the  sheet  which  you  are  to  change,  commencing 
at  the  foot  of  the  bed  and  bring  it  up  as  smoothly  as  possible, 
unrolling  it  as  you  move  it  up. 

Q.     What  shall -be  done  with   the  soiled  sheet  when  the 
clean  one  is  over  the  patient? 

It  should  be  drawn  down  and  removed  at  the  foot  end 
of  the  bed. 

Q.    What  can  be  avoided  in  this  way? 

Removing  the  blankets  and  chilling  the  patient. 

Securing  a  Fresh  Feeling   Bed   With  a  Few  Sheets. 
Q.    What  ought  to  be  changed  often? 

Sheets  ought  to  be  changed  oftener  than  they  com- 
monly are. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  the  supply  is  limited? 

Then  keep  at  least  two  upper  sheets  in  use  at  one 
time,  and  alternate  them,  take  the  one  that  has  been  in  use 
all  day  and  hang  it  in  another  room  to  air. 

Q.    What  sheet  is  to  be  put  over  the  patient  at  night? 
The  sheet  which  has  been  banging  in  another  room 
to  air  since  morning,  but  care  must  be  taken  that  it  is  not 
■damp  or  chilly. 

Q.     For  what  purpose? 

This  will  help  to  secure  a  good  night  for  the  patient- 
Q.    What  should  be  clone  with  the  patient  as  soon  as  he  is 
well  enough  to  be  lifted? 

He  should  then  be  lifted  upon  a  lounge,  then  carry  the 
mattress  and  pillows  and  bedding  out  of  the  room  and  air  them 
by  an  open  window. 

Q.    What  is  the  best  covering  for  a  bed? 

Clean  sheets  and  blankets;  no  heavy  quilt  or  counter- 
pane should  be  used. 


26  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Bed  for  Long  Occupation. 

Q.  With  what  must  a  bed  be  protected  in  case  of  serious 
illness? 

With  a  rubber  sheet  and  a  draw-sheet,  which  must  be 
large  enough  to  be  laid  across  the  bed  under  the  patient  and 
be  tucked  in  well  at  the  sides. 

Why  is  the  draw-sheet  used? 

Because  it  can  easily  be  removed  and  changed  with 
very  little  disturbance  to  the  patient,  and  is  necessary  also  in 
order  to  protect  him  from  the  heating  effect  of  the  rubber 
cloth,  which,  if  too  near  the  person,  promotes  weakening  per- 
spiration. 

Airing  Clothing,  Etc. 
Q.     Where  should  the  airing  of  the  clothing  be  done? 

No  clothing  in  use,  no  flannel  or  damp  towels  should 
be  aired  in  the  sick  room.  Soiled  articles  of  all  kinds  should 
at  once  be  removed. 

Q.     How  many  night-dresses  should  «be  kept  in  use? 

Two:  one  for  the  day  and  one  for  the  night.  Always 
hang  the  one  you  take  off  by  an  open  window  for  awhile,  and 
warm  it  before  using  it  again. 

Q.    How  many  sets  of  blankets  should  be  kept  in  use? 
Two,  if  possible;  airing  one  set  in  the  open  air  while 
the  other  is  in  use. 

The  Patient. 

Q.  How  can  you  lift  a  very  ill  patient  from  one  bed  into 
another? 

The  bed  should  be  made  ready  for  use  and  pushed 
close  to  the  one  occupied.  Two,  or  better,  four  persons,  should 
then  take  by  its  corners  the  sheet  upon  which  the  patient  liesr 
and  very  slowly  and  gently  lift  and  place  him  on  the  fresh 
bed,  removing  the  sheet  after  he  has  rested  awhile. 

Q.  If  there  be  only  one  sister  to  do  this,  how  can  she 
proceed? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  27 

Then  the  clean  bed  must  be  of  the  same  height  as  the 
one  occupied.     A  large  rubber  cloth  should  be  laid  under  the- 
patient,  who  is  drawn  with  it  to  the  edge  of  the  bed. 
Q.    How  far  must  the  rubber  cloth  extend? 

It  must  extend  over  the  fresh  bed  and  make  a  smooth 
surface,  to  cross  which  the  patient  can  easily  be  pulled  on  a 
drawsheet  to  the  fresh  bed,  and  the  rubber  cloth  may  be  re- 
moved. 

Q.     Should  a  patient  help  himself? 

Never,  if  he  is  very  ill.  Never  let  him  sit  up  or  turn 
himself  alone.  Make  it  your  rule  to  save  his  strength  in  every- 
way. 

Lifting  a  Helpless  Patient. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  a  patient  has  slipped  down  in 
bed? 

He  should  then  be  put  on  his  pillows  again,  but  he- 
must  never  be  dragged. 

Q.    How  can  he  be  lifted  upon  the  pillows? 

If  the  patient  is  strong  enough,  he  can  clasp  his  hand& 
around  the  neck  of  the  sister,  by  this,  distributing  his  weight 
more  equally.  The  sister  will  generally  find  it  easy  to  gently 
lift  him  up  an  inch  from  the  bed  and  raise  him  upon  the  pil- 
lows. 

Q.     What  should  the  sister  do  if  the  patient  is  too  heavy? 

If  the  patient  is  too. heavy  and  too  helpless  to  use  his 

arms,  it  is  better  to  drag  the  sheet  upon  which  he  is  lying  up 

towards  the  bed  head,  and  cover  the  space  left  at  the  foot 

with  another  sheet. 

Q.     How  should  a  patient  be  lifted  on  the  night-chair? 
The  patient  should  clasp  his  hands  round  the  neck  of 
the  sister,  and  in  this  position  gently  be  moved  along  towards 
the  chair. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  helped  back  to  bed? 

It  can  be  managed  in  the  same  way;  the  patient  being 
seated  on  the  edge  of  the  bed,  the  feet  can  be  lifted  from  the 


28  The  Nursing  Sister. 

floor  with  the  right  hand,  and  the  body  be  supported  with  the 
left  hand,  and  in  this  manner  be  brought  into  the  right  posi- 
tion. 

Q.    How  can  this  be  done  if  there  are  two  persons? 

Then  one  sister  should  place  herself  behind  the 
patient  and  pass  her  arms  under  his  arms,  and  clasp  her  hands 
over  his  chest.  His  head  and  shoulders  will  in  this  way  rest 
against  the  sister's  chest. 

Q.    How  does  the  second  sister  take  hold? 

She  clasps  her  hands  under  the  patient's  knees  and 
raises  them  a  little,  then  both  lift  him  at  the  same  moment 
and  bring  him  into  the  desired  position. 

Q.     How  must  this  all  be  done? 

This  must  all  be  done  slowly  and  care  must  taken  to 
put  him  down  gently  without  any  jar  or  twist. 

Q.    What  should  not   be   attempted   if   the  patient  is 
heavy? 

Taking  him  out  of  the  bed  should  not  be  attempted. 
In  this  case  the  bed  pan  or  urinal  should  be  used  in  place  of 
the  night-chair. 

Arranging  the  Pillows. 

Q.     How  should  the  pillows  be  placed? 

They  should  be  placed  so  as  to  raise  the  head  and  also 
to  support  the  shoulders,  so  that  the  lungs  can  breath  freely- 
Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  in  propping  a  patient  up? 
See  that  the  first  pillow  is  well  pulled  down  to  the 
small  of  the  back.    Commence  with  that  pillow,  and  put  the 
others  each  one  behind  the  last. 
Q.    What  will  this  prevent? 

It  will  keep  them  from  slipping. 
Q.    What  is  very  important  for  the  patient's  comfort? 
One  or  two  small  pillows  or  sofa-cushions,  which  can 
be  covered  with  a  linen  case  and  moved  about  easily,  just  as 
any  part  needs  a  support. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  29 

The  Manner  of  Bathing. 

Q.    What  must  be  avoided  in  bathing. 

Exposing  and  fatigueing  the  patient. 
Q.    What  should  be  brought  into  the  room? 

Towels,  soap,  brushes,  clean  clothing  and  everything 
that  is  required. 

Q.    What  should  be  avoided? 

Going  and  coming,  first  fetching  this,  then  that  for- 
gotten article.    It  makes  the  patient  nervous. 
Q.     What  should  be  spread  on  the  bed? 

A  rubber  sheet  and  folded  sheet  or  draw  sheet. 
Q.    How  can  the  bath  be  given? 

Slip  the  arms  out  of  the  sleeves,  and  then  pass  your 
hands  under  the  bed  clothes,  using  freely  a  warm,  soapy  cloth. 
The  cloth  should  not  be  too  wet,  wring  it  out,  and  frequently 
dip  it  into  the  basin,  and  change  the  water  once  or  twice. 
Q.    What  may  be  done  to  cool  and  refresh  the  patient?. 

Sponge  face  and  hands  several  times  a  day. 
Q.    What  may  be  put  in  the  water? 

A  little  cologne  or  alcohol,  and  a  few  drops  of  tr.  of 
myrrh  or  cologne  in  the  water,  which  should  be  given  to 
wrinse  out  the  mouth. 

Q.    What  maybe  used  in  place  of  a  tooth  brush? 
A  soft  linen  cloth. 

Plunge  Bath. 

Q.     What  kind  of  a  bath  tub  is  most  convenient  if  the 
patient  is  able  to  take  a  plunge  bath? 

A  portable  bathtub  which  can  be  used  at  the  bedside. 
Q.     Where  and  how  must  the  bath  be  prepared  if  there 
is  no  portable  bathtub? 

Then  the  bath  should  be  prepared  in  the  bathroom, 
the  temperature  of  the  water  and  room  must  be  tested  with  a 
thermometer,  the  room  should  be  sufficiently  warm  to  prevent 
any  chill  on  emerging  from  the  bath. 


30  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  is  the  patient  taken  into  the  hath  room"? 

The  night  clothes  are  removed  before  the  patient 
leaves  the  bed,  and  a  bathing  apron  is  put  on,  or  the  patient  is 
rolled  in  a  sheet,  then  wrapped  in  a  blanket  and  carried  or 
wheeled  into  the  bathroom. 

Q.    How  is  the,  patient  put  into  the  bath? 

He  is  lifted  into  the  bathtub,  with  the  apron   on  or 
rolled  in  a  sheet,  for  the  length  of  time  ordered  by  the  doctor. 
Q,    What  should  be  done  on  removing  the  patient  from 
the  bath? 

He  should  be  quickly  wrapped  in  a  warm  dry  sheet, 
then  in  a  blanket  and  carried  back  to  bed. 

Q.    Of  what  advantage  is  this  manner  for  a  weak  pa- 
tient? 

In  this  way  a  weak  patient  can  be  made  dry  without 
extra  fatigue;  a  little  rubbing  after  he  lies  in  bed  is  sufficient. 
Q.    How  should  he  be  rubbed? 

With  long  strokes,  not  with  little  pats  here  and  there? 
Q.     What  is  done  after  he  is  dry. 

The  damp  sheet  and  blanket  are  removed  and  the 
night  clothes  put  on. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  a  number  of  baths  are  or- 
dered in  one  day? 

Then  it  is  best  to  roll  the  patient  in  a  blanket,  and 
not  fatigue  him  with  putting  his  night  clothes  off  and  on. 

Changing  of  Night  Clothes. 

Q.    How  can  the  night  clothes  be  changed? 

Have  everything  ready  at  hand,  well  aired  and 
warmed  before  you  begin.  Then  you  commence,  in  drawing 
the  clothes,  by  slightly  raising  the  patient,  up  under  his  back 
to  the  neck,  and  then  slip  them  over  his  head. 

Q.    What  makes  this  motion  somewhat  easier? 

If  it  is  possible  for  the  patient  to  bend  his  head  for- 
ward. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  31 


Q.    What  is  taken  off  last? 

The  sleeves;  if  any  part  is  afflicted  this  should  be 
freed  last  from  the  clothes. 

Q.    How  can  it  best  be  managed  if  the  patient  wears 
flannel  shirts*? 

They  should  be  open  in  front  and  slipped  inside  of  the 
night  gown,  sleeves  in  sleeves,  before  beginning  to  make  the 
change. 

Q.    How  are  the  clean  clothes  put  on? 

The  afflicted  part  is  dressed  first.    If  an  arm  or  leg 
is  afflicted,  the  sleeve  should  be  ripped  before  it  is  put  on. 
Q.    What  makes  a  good  protection  for  a  patient? 

A  flannel  sack  put  on  the  outside  of  the  clean  gown, 
and  it  should  always  be  worn  when  there  is  much  exposure. 

Footbath. 
Q.    How  can  you  give  a  footbath? 

Spread  a  rubber  cloth  over  the  sheet:   have  the  water 
at  the  right  temperature,  tested  by  the  elbow,   to  which  it 
should  feel  hot:  put  the  foot  tub  in  the  bed;  place  the  patient 
on  his  back;  draw  up  his  knees  and  put  the  feet  in  water. 
Q.    What  must  be  covered? 

The  knees  and  the  tub  must  be  covered  with  an  extra 
blanket  to  keep  the  steam  from  the  bed  clothes. 

Combing  the  Hair. 
Q.    How  can  the  pillows  and  bed  be  protected  during  the 
^time  the  hair  is  combed? 

By  spreading  a  large  towel  or  cloth  about  the  patient. 
Q.    How  should  the  hair  be  combed? 

The  hair  should  be  lifted  in  locks,   with  one  hand, 
and  gently  combed  or  brushed  with  the  other. 
Q.    How  should  the  hair  never  be  fastened? 

Never  in  a  hard  knot  which  presses  on  the  patient's 
.head  while  lying. 

Q.    How  can  the  hair  be  arranged  best? 
In  two  braids. 


32  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Bedsores. 

Q.     What  is  generally  the  cause  of  bedsores? 

Bedsores  are.  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten,  the  result  of 
bad  nursing.    Prevention  is  better  than  cure. 

Q.     In    order  to  prevent   bedsores  what  must  a  sister 
not  do? 

She  must  not  let  false  modesty  prevent  her  from  doing 
her  duty  in  this  matter.  She  should  sponge  the  exposed 
parts,  or  those  upon  which  pressure  comes,  daily  with  alcohol 
and  water,  dust  them  with  starch  and  keep  the  under  sheet 
perfectly  dry  and  smooth,  and  clothing  clean. 

Q.    What  persons  are  very  liable  to  have  bedsores? 

Very  thin  and  very  heavy  persons,  even  without 
being  very  sick. 

Q.    How  can  pressure  be  avoided? 

By  changing  the  position  of  the  patient  every  few 
hours  and  by  using  air  pillows. 

Q.  What  should  be  done  as  soon  as  red  spots  appear? 
The  affected  parts  should  be  at  once  attended  to  care- 
fully, the  alcohol  bathing  should  be  tried  three  or  four  times 
a  day.  followed  by  dusting  with  powder  or  bathed  with  the 
white  of  an  egg  and  rainwater  or  brandy,  and  dusted  with 
oxide  of  zinc. 

Q.    What  should  be  tried  if  this  fails  to  help? 

Air  or  water  bed,  if  it  can  be  gotten. 
Q.     To  whom  must  the  red  spots  be  shown? 

To  the  doctor. 
Q.     What  is  generally    discontinued    after  the  skin    is 
broken  and  what  is  applied? 

The  bathing  of  alcohol  is  discontinued,  because  its 
use  is  painful  after  the  skin  is  broken.  The  sore  place  is  fre- 
quently dressed  with  oxide  of  zinc  or  some  other  ointment 
prescribed  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    What  do  neglected  bedsores  often  do? 

They  part  off  from  the  sound  flesh,  and  often  lay  bare 
the  deeper  tissues  even  to  the  bone. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  33 

Q.    What  is  often  used  to  separate  the  sloughing  part? 

Charcoal  poultices. 
Q.    How  long  is  this  kept  up? 

Until  the  gangrenous  portion  is  removed. 
Q.    How  is  the  sore  dressed  and  the  dressing  kept  in 
place'? 

It  is  dressed  antiseptically  and  the  dressing  kept  in 
place  with  strips  of  adhesive  plaster. 

The  Giving  of  Medicine. 

Q.    How  should  medicine  be  given? 

It  should  be  given  as  near  the  exact  time  as  possible, 
and  the  exact  dose  as  ordered  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    Is  a  sister  allowed  to  trust  her  eye  when  giving  medi- 
cine? 

Never:  she  must  measure  it  always  in  a  graduated 
glass  or  drop  it  with  care. 

Q.    How  can  medicine  be  given  in  drops? 

The  prescribed  number  of  drops  may  be  dropped  on  a 
lump  of  sugar  or  in  a  medicine  glass  or  spoon.  Wet  the  cork 
with  the  medicine  and  touch  it  to  the  mouth  of  the  bottle  at 
that  place  where  the  medicine  is  to  be  dropped  out  and  by 
this  prevent  the  medicine  from  flowing  out  too  fast. 
Q.    What  should  every  *rnedicine  bottle  have? 

A  label  with  the  exact  direction  of  the  doctor  and  the 
name  of  the  patient. 

Q.     What  will  a  trustworthy  sister  always  do? 

She  will  always  look  on  the  label  of  the  bottle  before 
taking  the  cork  out,  whether  she  thinks  it  is  right  or  not.  A 
good  nurse  should  in  this  matter,  as  in  all  other  things,  ac- 
quire the  habit  of  caution. 

Q.    On  which  side  of  the  bottle  should  the  medicine  be 
poured  out? 

On  the  side  opposite  to  the  label,  so  as  not  to  soil  the 

label. 

—3 


34  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.     What  must  be  done  immediately  after  the  medicine 
is  poured  into  the  graduated  glass? 

The  bottle  must  be  corked  at  once. 
Q.    Why? 

Otherwise  the  medicine  will  lose  its  strength. 
Q.     What  should  she  do  before  she  gives  the  medicine? 
She  must  first  look  at  the  label  on  the  bottle  and  then 
at  the  patient,  to  be  sure  that  it  is  the  patient  for  whom  the 
medicine  is  prepared. 

Q.    If  the  sister  neglects  to  give  the  medicine  at  the  ap- 
pointed time,  what  must  she  do? 

If  it  is  three  minutes  too  late,  she  must  ask  the  sis- 
ter superior  for  permission  to  give  the  medicine;  if  it  is  five 
minutes  too  late,  then  she  must  ask  mother  superior's  per- 
mission. 

Q.     What  must  be  done  every  time  after  the  medicine  is 
given? 

Every  time  after  giving  medicine,  the  sister  must 
wash  the  medicine  glass  or  spoon  in  a  small  bowl  on  the  medi- 
cine waiter,  and  wipe  them  carefully. 

Things  Important  Enough  to  Write  Dowtn. 

Q.    What  things  should  be  written  down  by  the  nursing 
sister? 

(1).  The  hours  at  which  medicine  is  to  be  given, 
and  each  time  when  it  is  given,  the  hour  to  be  crossed  in  the 
tablet. 

(2).  How  much  beef  tea  or  milk  the  doctor  has  or- 
dered for  the  patient. 

(3).    How  often  this  nourishment  should  be  given. 

(4).  How  long  intervals  should  be  left  between  cer- 
tain kinds  of  medicine  and  certain  kinds  of  food. 

Q.    But  what  must  be  done  if  this  is  left  to  the  discretion 
of  the  sister? 

She  must  carefully  arrange  the  time  for  giving  food 
in  such  a  way  as  not  to  destroy  the  patient's  appetite  by 


The  Nursing  Sister.  35 

giving  medicine  immediately  before  the  food,   or  nauseate 
him  by  giving  it  too  soon  afterwards. 

Q.    What  will  a  good  nurse  have  for  all  these  things? 
She  will  have  a  well  arranged  time-table  for  all  these 
things,  written  out  for  the  day,  and  will  need  all  her  ingenuity 
and  care  to  keep  the  hours  of  medicine  and  food  exactly 
apart. 

Clinical  Eecord. 

Q.    What  should  be  noted  in  the  clinical  record? 

An  exact  account  of  what  has  taken  place  since  the 
physician's  last  visit;  how  the  temperature  and  pulse  have 
varied  and  at  what  hours  changes  occurred;  how  often  there 
has  been  a  movement  of  the  bowels,  and  what  the  character 
was;  the  character  and  quantity  of  urine  passed;  whether  the 
sleep  was  quiet  or  restless;  what,  and  at  what  hours,  food  and 
stimulants  were  taken;  when  medicines  were  given.  In  a 
word,  all  the  symptoms  the  physician  is  interested  to  know, 
and  that  are  of  importance  for  him  to  know. 

Q.    What  will  this  save? 

All  this,  put  plainly  and  in  as  few  words  as  possible, 
in  writing,  will  save  a  great  deal  of  talking  in  the  patient's 
room,  and  avoid  anxiety  on  his  part  about  his  own  symptoms. 

Q.    Of  what  benefit  will  it  be  for  the  doctor  and  also 
for  the  sister? 

It  will  economize  the  doctor's  time  and  will  obviate 
mistakes  if  the  sister  should  happen  to  be  called  away  or  is 
taking  her  necessary  rest  when  the  doctor  calls,  and  some  one 
else  is  in  temporary  charge. 

Q.    Why  should  a  sister  be  so  careful  about  these  little 
things? 

Because  it  is  this  systematic  carefulness  in  these  little 
things  which  makes  the  difference  between  a  good  nurse  and 
a  poor  one. 


36  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Precautions   on  Leaving   the   Patient  to  Another's 

Care. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  do  if  she  is  obliged  to  leave  her 
patient  in  some  other  care  for  a  while? 

She  must  write  down,  what  is  to  be  done  in  her  ab- 
sence, the  time  for  giving  medicine  or  stimulants,  or  food,  etc. 
Q.    How  long  may  she  stay? 

No  longer  than  the  exact  time  provided  for. 
Q.    What  arrangements  must  the  sister  make  in  case  she 
has  to  sleep? 

She  must  arrange  to  be  called  at  a  certain  hour.  This 
is  important,  for  the  sister's  mind  must  be  relieved  of  anxiety 
about  awakening. 

Q.    How  should  a  sister  always  be  towards  a  patient? 
Kind  and  intelligent;  he  will  then  watch  for  her  re- 
turn, and  prefer  her  to  any  one  else. 

Protecting  the  Patient. 
Q.    Against  what  must  a  sister  protect  her  patient? 

Against  all,  perhaps  well-meaning,  but  injudicious 
interference. 

Q.    How  can  she  do  this? 

By  not  allowing  visits  or  conversations  in  his  pres- 
ence, that  may  injure  or  fatigue  him,  such  as  accounts  of 
other  people's  diseases,  or  recommendations  of  sure  cures  and 
other  quack  treatments,  etc. 

Q.    Who  should  be  kept  out  of  the  sick  room? 

Thoughtless  people  and  noisy  children  and  as  much 
as  possible  all  visitors. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  the  coming  and  going  of  visitors,  chatting 
and  questioning,  fatigue,  and  are  often  injurious  for  the  pa- 
tient. Besides,  the  more  persons  are  in  a  room,  the  less  fresh 
air  there  is. 

Q.    What  can  a  sister  do  in  regard  to  keeping  the  patient 
quiet  through  the  night? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  37 

By  preventing  him  from  hearing  news,  especially  in 
the  evening,  or  anything  that  may  excite  him.  Keep  his 
mind  quiet  for  the  night,  and  be  very  careful  that  his  first 
sleep  is  not  disturbed.  A  patient  who  is  roused  out  of  his 
first  sleep,  very  often  has  his  whole  night's  rest  destroyed. 

Q.    What  else  is  of  great  importance? 

That  no  clock  strikes  during  the  night,  in  the  room 
•or  hospital.  Bells  should  be  covered,  so  that  they  cannot  be 
heard  through  the  whole  house  and  disturb  the  patient  every 
time  it  rings,  for  it  is  cruel  to  disturb  the  sleep  of  a  poor  in- 
valid, even  for  a  minute,  without  absolute  necessity. 

Q.    What  must  the  sister  be  especially  careful  about  in 
regard  to  bad  news? 

If  during  the  illness  bad  news  of  any  kind  has  come 
to  the  family,  she  must  not  allow  it  to  be  told  to  the  patient 
without  the  doctor's  permission.  Under  no  circumstances 
should  the  patient  be  suddenly  shocked  or  pained  by  such 
communications. 

Q.    What  else  must  the  sister  do  that  the  patient  be  not 
disturbed  at  night? 

She  should  make  all  the  arrangements  for  the  night 
early,  have  the  fire  in  order,  the  different  articles  needed  at 
night  at  hand,  the  room  aired,  the  last  medicine  and  food 
promptly  given,  the  bedside  table  ready,  and  the  light  turned 
down  and  shaded  from  the  eyes  of  the  patient.  Tin  shields 
are  best  for  gasburners. 

Food  at  Night. 

Q.    What  patients  must  be  fed  at  night? 

With  very  sick  patients  medicine  and  feeding  go  on 
regularly  during  the  twenty-four  hours,  day  and  night.  Be- 
sides these,  all  patients  suffering  from  exhaustion  or  slowly 
recovering  from  a  wearing  illness,  should  take  some  light  and 
nourishing  food  just  before  retiring. 


38  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  may  be  given? 

A  glass  of  milk,  not  to  cold,  a  cup  of  gruel,  or  a  cup  of 
well-made  beef  tea,  will  support  the  patient  through  the 
night,  and  prevent  the  feeling  of  exhaustion  in  the  morning. 

Q.    If  a  patient  is  very  ill,  at  what  time  will  he  need  the 
closest  attention? 

Toward  morning:  for  at  this  period  of  the  lowest  tem- 
perature the  fatal  chill  often  occurs,  and  the  patient  may  be 
lost  from  the  want  of  a  little  external  warmth. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  such  is  the  case? 

The  fire  should,  if  necessary,  be  replenished,  the  feet 
and  legs  should  be  kept  warm,  and  whenever  a  tendency  to 
chilling  is  discovered,  hot  bottles,  hot  bricks  or  warm  flan- 
nels, with  some  warm  drink,  should  be  made  use  of  until  the 
temperature  is  restored. 

Q.    What  should  be  provided  for  towards  morning,   even 
in  case  the  patienf  is  not  very  ill? 

Some  light  nourishment.  The  patient  has  perhaps 
been  restless  and  wakeful,  or  is  exhausted  by  heavy  sleep,  or 
is  feeble  from  old  age,  or  convalescing  from  severe  sickness,, 
with  the  longing  for  food,  which  is  sometimes  felt  on  recovery 
from  fever. 

Q.    When  should  this  be  provided  for  and  where  should 
it  be  kept? 

It  should  be  provided  for,  the  evening  before,  and  not 
wait  until  breakfast  time.  It  should  be  had  on  hand  in  some 
accessible  place,  not  in  the  patient's,  or  any  other  occupied 
room. 

Q.     What  nourishment  would  do  in  this  case? 

A  cup  of  gruel,  beef  tea,  coffee  or  milk,  or  anything 
which  the  patient  is  allowed  to  eat,  and  that  can  be  heated 
on  a  spirit  lamp  or  gas  stove. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  before  the  patient  takes  this? 
The  patient's  mouth  should  first  be  washed  out  with- 
a  soft  cloth,  or  water  given  him  to  wrinse  out  his  mouth. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  39 


Q.    What  is  often  the  effect  of  this  morning  nourish- 
ment? 

The  patient  will  often  have  a  refreshing  morning  nap. 
<c>.     Should  any  cooking  he  done  in  the  sickroom? 

Never,  if  it  can  possibly  be  helped.  All  warming 
should  be  done  either  in  the  adjoining  room  or  in  the  kitchen, 
but  never  in  the  presence  of  the  patient. 

The  Proper  Manner  of  Serving  Meals. 

Q.    How  should  the  meals  be  served  to  the  patient? 

Serve  them  upon  a  tray  or  a  bedtray,  which  is  covered 
with  a  clean  napkin.  Have  cups  and  spoons  shining  and 
clean.  Be  careful  not  to  slop  the  tea  into  the  saucer,  and 
bring  too  much  of  anything. 

Q.    What  should  the  sister  be  especially  careful  about? 
That  all  necessary  things  are  on  the  tray  when  it  is 
brought  to  tne  patient.     If  she  is  obliged  to  go  for  something 
forgotten,  she  should  never  set  the  waiter  on  the  bed,  but  on 
the  table. 

Q.    What  should  the   sister  never  do  in  the  presence  of 
the  patient? 

Never  taste  the  tood. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  as  soon  as  the  patient  has  eaten 
his  meals? 

The  tray  should  at  once  be  taken  out  of  the" room. 
Q.    Should  any  food  be  kept  in  the  sickroom? 

No.  A  cup  of  beef  tea  which  may  be  soon  needed 
can  be  kept  in  the  nearest  cool  place,  carefully  covered.  The 
ledee  outside  the  window  in  the  shade,  will  answer,  if  there 
be  no  better  place,  but  never  on  a  window  facing  the  front  of 
a  hospital.  It  should  be  taken  away  from  the  bed  even  if  you 
have  to  give  it  in  ten  minutes  again. 

Q.     Where  should  medicine,  food  and  stimulants   never 
be  kept? 

Never  where  the  patient  can  see  or  smell  them.  Food 
should  never  be  left  standing  on  the  table  with  the  idea  that 


40  The  Nursing  Sister. 

perhaps  the  patient  will  take  little  by  little.  If  the  patient 
wishes  anything,  it  should  be  brought  promptly,  hot  or  cold, 
the  right  quantity,  quietly,  without  too  much  stir. 

Feeding  a  Patient. 
Q.    How  can  you  feed  a  patient? 

Prop  him  up  gently:  in  cold  weather  put  something 
around  his  shoulders,  and  a  napkin  under  his  chin  and  over 
the  sheet.     Do  this  whenever  anything  is  put  in  his  mouth. 

Q.    What  should  a  sister  avoid  and  what  should  she  no- 
tice while  feeding  the  patient? 

She  should  not  hurry  the  patient  and  avoid  talking  to 
him  while  he  is  eating.  Xotice  the  quantity  taken,  and  re- 
port to  the  doctor  in  definite  terms.  For  instance,  he  took 
four  tablespoons  full  of  soup  or  a  wineglass  of  punch,  etc. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  consult  regarding  nourishment*? 
The  hours  when  the  patient  can  best  take  his  food; 
she  must  try  to  prevent  faintness  by  all  means. 

Q,     What  has  been  the  consequence  of  neglect  in  this 

matter? 

Xot  few  lives  are  lost  by  mere  starvation,  where  a 

little  ingenuity  and  a  great  deal  of  perseverence  might  have 

averted  the  result. 

Q.    If  a  patient  feels  faint  at  a  certain  time  one  day,  how 
can  this  be  prevented  the  following  day? 

By  giving  him  the  beef  tea  or  stimulants  just  before 
that  time  the  following  day. 

Q.    How  can  you  pursuade  the  patient  to  eat? 

Bring  the  food,  whatever  it  is,  to  him.  Do  not  say, 
"Don't  you  think  you  can  take  a  little  of  this  or  that,  unless 
you  have  it  in  your  hands  at  the  time;  the  patient  will  get 
over  the  fancy  for  it  while  you  are  gone  to  prepare  it. 

Q.     What  should  be  done  regarding  diet? 

It  should  be  varied  as  much  as  possible,  when  allowed, 
but  with  a  very  sick  patient  do  not  use  up  what  little  appetite 
or  power  or  digestion  there  may  be,  with  foolish  things,  viz.: 
jelly  or  other  sweets. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  41 


Q.    How  can  you  feed  a  helpless  patient? 

By  giving  him  his  food  in  manageable  mouthfuls,  and 
not  hurrying.  When  he  has  finished,  wipe  or  wash  the  mouth 
gently,  take  away  the  bed-rest,  and  let  the  patient  down 
slowly  with  your  hand  under  the  pillows. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  the  patient  cannot  take  much 
food  at  a  time? 

In  such  a  case  give  food  frequently  at  short  intervals. 
Q.    Should  the  patient  be  waked  for  food  in  such  a  case? 
Ask  the  doctor  about  that.    Sleep  is  sometimes  more 
important  than  food.    Great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  inter- 
rupt the  sleep  uunecessarily. 

Q,    What  should  be  remembered  at  the  same  time? 

That  patients  sometimes  sink  away  in  their  sleep, 
whilst  if  they  had  been  roused  and  fed  they  might  have  lived. 
Six  small  meals  are  better  for  most  sick  people  than  three 
large  ones. 

Q.    How  can  you  feed  a  delirious  patient? 

Rouse  the  patient's  attention  as  much  as  possible, 
call  him  by  his  name,  press  the  spoon  against  the  lower  lip, 
and  move  it  gently  back  and  forth. 

Q.    What  will  generally  be  the  consequence? 

The  lips  will  part  involuntarily,  and  then  the  spoon 
should  be  passed  in,  far  back  in  the  mouth,  and  emptied 
slowly.  The  patient  must  be  slightly  raised  by  a  hand  under 
the  pillow. 

Q.    What  do  unconscious  patients  often  suffer  from? 

From  thirst,  and  must  therefore  have  water  given  to 
them  from  time  to  time,  or  the  tongue  and  mouth  become 
very  dry  and  the  breathing  more  difficult. 

Observation  of  Symptoms. 

Q.     What  distincts  a  trained  nurse  from  an   untrained 
one? 

A  great  point  of  distinction  between  a  trained  nurse 
and  an  untrained  one  is  the  ability  of  the  former  to  observe 


42  The  Nursing  Sister. 

accurately  and  describe   intelligibly  what  comes  under  her 
notice  in  the  sick  room. 

Q.     Why  is  this  point  so  very  important? 

Because  a  nurse,  who  is  constantly  with  the  patient 
or  around  him  has  a  much  better  opportunity  of  becoming  ac- 
quainted with  his  real  condition  than  the  physician,  who  per- 
haps spends  only  one-half  hour  or  less  with  him  occasionally, 
that  is,  if  she  knows  how  to  observe  and  report  symptoms 
correctly  and  distinctly. 

Q.    What  does  the  visit  of  the  physician  often  cause? 

The  very  excitement  of  this  visit  will  often  tempo- 
rarily change  the  entire  aspect  of  the  patient  and  make  him 
appear  better  or  worse  than  he  really  is. 

Q.    What  must  the  physician  know  in  order  to   form  a 
correct  judgment  about  the  case? 

He  must  know  what  goes  on  in  his  absence,  as  well  as 
in  his  presence,  and  for  such  information  he  is  forced  to  rely 
almost  wholly  upon  the  sister. 

Q.    What  is,  therefore,  of  the  greatest  importance? 

That  the  sister  cultivates  the  habit  of  a  critical  obser- 
vation, and  simple,  direct,  truthful  statement.  Even  where 
there  is  no  intention  to  deceive,  very  few  persons  are  capable 
of  making  a  report  of  anything  which  shall  neither  be  de- 
ficient, exaggerated  or  perverted. 

Q.  What  does  the  doctor  want  to  know  from  a  sister? 
He  wants  to  know  facts,  not  opinions,  and  a  nurse 
who  can  tell  him  exactly  what  has  happened,  without  obscur- 
ing it  in  a  cloud  of  generalities,  hasty  interferences,  or  second 
hand  information,  will  be  recognized  as  an  invaluable  assist- 
ant. 

Q.    How  are  symptoms  classified? 

Subjective,  viz.:  these  which  are  evident  only  to  the 
patient;  and  objective,  viz.:  which  may  be  conceived  by  out- 
side observers  and  simulated,  feigned  for  purpose  of  deceit, 
either  to  excite  sympathy,  or  from  other  motives. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  4S 

Q.    What  is  required  to  be  able  to  distinguish  between 
real  and  feigned  symptoms? 

It  requires  both  experience  and  judgment.  For  it 
may  happen  that  an  expert  villain  (malingerer)  will  now  and 
then  deceive  doctors  and  sisters  into  the  treatment  of  a 
malady,  that  has  no  real  existence,  while  on  the  other  hand 
genuine  suffering  may  chance  to  be  mistaken  for  fraud  or 
hysteria,  if  the  usual  objective  manifestations  are  absent. 
Q.     What  cases  are  always  more  or  less  suspicious? 

Those  that  are  entirely  subjective  (that  is,  where 
symptoms  are  only  evident  to  the  patient),  as  diseases  unac- 
companied by  any  outward  sign  are  comparatively  rare. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  before  an  opinion  is  passed  in  re- 
gard to  true  or  deceitful  symptoms? 

The  patient  must  be  closely  watched  without  him  no- 
ticing it,  for  it  is  better  to  be  duped  once  in  a  while  than  to 
fail  to  give  aid  or  sympathy  where  it  is  really  needed.  The 
sister  should  let  nothing  pass  unseen,  and  note  the  most 
fleeting  signs.  By  doing  this  she  can  soon  judge  to  some  ex- 
tent, whether  his  statements  are  to  be  relied  upon,  and 
whether  he  has  a  tendency  to  exaggerate  his  ills,  or  to  make 
light  of  them. 

Q.    To  whom  does  the  decision  of  the  existence  of  a  dis- 
ease solely  belong? 

To  the  doctor,  but  he  will  be  largely  guided  by  the  ob- 
servations of  the  attentive  sister,  and  she  herself  will  often  be 
called  upon  to  judge  as  to  the  urgency  of  special  indications. 
Q.     What  may  a  sister  be  called  upon  to  judge? 

Whether  she  shall  send  for  the  doctor  in  the  middle 
of  the  night,  or  apply  her  own  resources,  whether  she  should 
give  or  withhold  the  medicine  left  to  be  used  only  in  emer- 
gency, or  whether  she  should  alter  or  let  alone  any  arrange- 
ment which  has  proved  unexpectedly  uncomfortable. 
Q.     What  position  does  a  sufferer  take? 

Instinctively  the  position  most  calculated  for  ease? 


44  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  does  tbe  patient  generally  lay  when  one  lung  is 

affected? 

The  patient  then  lays  on  th^at  side,  so  that  the  healthy 

one,  which  has  to  do  the  most  work,   may  have  the  greatest 
freedom  of  motion. 

Q.    What  position  suggests  peritonitis? 

Lying  on  the  back,  with  the  knees  drawn  up  so  as  to 
relax  the  abdominal  muscles. 

Q.    What  position  does  a  patient  take  in  colic? 

You  may  find  the  patient  lying  on  the  abdomen,  as 
pressure  relieves  pain  of  such  character. 

Q.    What  may  be  looked  upon  as  a  sign  of  improvement? 
If  a  patient  who  has  been  lying  persistently  on  his 
back,  turns  over  to  his  side. 

Q,     What  is  a  sure  sign  that  the  distress  of  difficulty  in 
breathing  is  removed? 

If  the  patient,  who  has  been  forced  to  sit  up,  lies 
down  and  composes  for  sleep. 

Q.    In  what  cases  does  this  inability  to  breathe  occur? 

In  cases  where  the  lungs  or  heart  are  affected. 
Q.    What  is  usually  a  favorable  sign? 

Lying  quietly,  but  in  acute  rheumatism  the  patient 
is  quiet  because  the  least  motion  causes  him  pain.    Again  ex- 
treme weakness  may  render  it  too  great  an  exertion  to  move. 
Q.    When  does  restlessness  occur? 

Restlessness  is  ominous  in  most  organic  diseases? 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  a  very  bad  sign? 

Slipping  down  in  bed. 
Q.    Which  are  the  most  important  indices  of  a  disease? 
Pulse,    respiration  and  temperature  are    sometimes 
called  the  three  vital  signs. 

Q.    What  should  be  observed  about  the  pulse? 

The  frequency  and  force. 
Q.    What  should  be  observed  about  the  respirations? 

The  rate,  any  peculiarities,  whether  it  is  abdominal  or 
thoric,  if  regular  or  irregular,  easy  or  labored,  and  whether  or 
not  accompanied  by  pain. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  45 


Q.    In  what  case  is  lung  disease  accompanied  by  pain,  and 

when  not? 

There  is  no  pain  in  diseases  of  the  lung  substance 
alone;  when  the  pleura  is  affected,  then  there  is  a  sharp  pain. 
Q.    By  what  are  most  disorders  of  the  respiratory  organs 
accompanied? 

By  a  cough. 
Q.    What  is  this  caused  by? 

By  an  irritation  of  the  air  passage,  and  is  often  the 
effort  of  expulsion  of  some  foreign  matter. 

Q.    What  is  the  matter  coughed  up  called? 

Sputa. 
.Q    What  is  a  cough  said  to  be  if  not  accompanied  by  ex- 
pectoration? 

A  dry  cough. 
Q.     How  is  the  expectoration  generally  in  the  bronchitis? 
First  simply  mucus,  later  pus;  in  chronic  cases  it  is 
thick  and  yellow. 

Q.    How  is  it  in  consumption? 

At  first  very  tenacious,  sometimes  frothy;  at  an  ad- 
vanced stage  pus  with  streaks  of  blood,  sometimes  peculiar 
cheesy  lumps  are  expectorated. 
Q.    How  in  pneumonia? 

In  pneumonia  it  is  for  the  most  part  scanty;  after  a 
certain  stage  it  has  a  rusty  color. 

Q.     What  is  the  character  in  gangrene  of  the  lungs? 

Dark  greenish  sputa,  very  free  and  offensive. 
Q.    How  in  cancer  of  the  lungs? 
A  peculiar  gelatinous  form. 
Q.    What  more  should  be  observed  about  the  cough? 

Whether  it  is  worst  in  daytime  or  nighttime,  if  it 
is  first  increased  by  moving  about  or  on  first  waking,  whether 
hard  or  loose,  choking,  hard  or  incessant. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  a  patient  complains  of  cold 
without  apparent  reason? 

Take  the  temperature. 


46  The  .Nursing  Sister. 

Q.     What  does  a  sense  of  coldness  along  the  spine  often 
signify? 

A  chill,  and  the  temperature  will  be  found  rather 
elevated  than  lowered.  Although  the  patient  shivers,  the 
temperature  rises,  because  the  small  blood-vessels  (capillaries) 
are  so  contracted  that  the  blood  cannot  get  to  the  surface  to 
be  cooled. 

Q.    What  always  follows  a  genuine  chill'? 

High  fever. 
Q.    When  should  the  temperature  be  taken? 

During  and  after  the  chill. 
Q.     What  should  be  carefully  noted? 

The  time  of  occurrence  of  the  chill,  duration  and 
number. 

Q.    What  often  accompanies  the  fall  of  febrile  temper_ 
ature? 

Free  perspiration. 
Q.    What  else  can  produce  this  perspiration? 

Extreme  weakness. 
Q.    Is  the  moisture  or  dryness  of  the  skin  important? 
Yes,  it  is  always  important.     A'high  fever  with  a  wet 
skin  is  more  alarming  than  the  same  temperature  with  dry 
skin. 

Q.    What  should  be  noticed  about  the  perspiration? 

In  what  part  of  the  body  the  moisture  appears,  at 
what  time,  in  connection  with  what  symptoms,  whether  it  is 
cold  or  warm,  and  if  there  is  any  peculiar  odor  about  it. 

Q.     What  certain  symptoms  are  often  found  in  pulmonary 
diseases? 

.  A  high  color  on  one  cheek  alone. 
Q.    What  does  a  sudden  change  of  color  give  a  warning 


for: 


It  gives  warning  for  fainting  (syncope). 
Q.    What  accompanies  internal  hemorrhage? 
Extreme  paleness. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  47 


Q.    What  indicates  nausea? 

Paleness  about  the  m  >uth,  with  compressed  or 
slightly  paled  lips. 

Q.    What  should  especially  be  noticed? 

Any    eruption    or  rash;  this   must   be  promptly  re- 
ported, its  character,  location,  extent,  time  of  appearance. 
Q.    What  should  be  noticed  about  the  tongue? 

Whether  it  is  dry  or  coated,  or  swollen. 
Q.    How  is  the  tongue  likely  to  be  in  fever? 

Furred. 
Q.    Is  a  furred  tongue  always  a  sign  of  disease? 

No;  for  some  people  have  a  furred  tongue  in  good 
health,  or  it  is  induced  by  slight  constipation. 

Q.    What  opportunity  should  be  taken  in  looking  at  the 
tongue? 

Notice  the  odor  of  the  breath  and  the  state  of  the 
teeth  and  gums. 

Q.    What  must  be  looked  out  for,  while  calomel  or  other 
medicine  containing  mercury,  is  given? 

For  looseness  of  the  teeth  and  sore  gums. 
Q.    What  is  this  soreness  called? 

Salivated. 
Q.    What  is  a  very  common  symptom? 

Nausea. 
Q.    How  is  it  usually  reliev.  d? 

By  vomiting. 
Q.    What  should  be  noted  about  vomiting? 

Whether  it  is  persistently  accompanied  by  straining 
or  pain,  the  intervals  since  taking  food  or  medicine,  the 
amount  vomited  and  the  character. 

Q.    What  will  generally  be  the  character? 

Undigested  food;  it  may  contain  bile,  blood  or  even 
faecal  matter. 

Q.    What  may  the  vomiting  of  faecal  matter  indicate? 
This  is  an  important  symptom  and  may  indicate  in- 
testinal obstruction,  and  may  call  for  immediate  operation. 


48  The  Nursing  Sistek, 


Q.    What  effect  have  some  drugs,  as  iron  and  bismuth, 
upon  stools? 

They  blacken  the  stools. 
Q.    What  color  are  the  stools  in  jaundice? 

Very  light  clay-colored. 
Q.    What  is  important  to  note  about  stools? 

Frequency  and  quantity  of  the  evacuation,  if  solid  or 
fluid,  the  presence  of  mucus,  pus,  blood  or  worms. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  is  any  doubt  about  the 
character  of  the  stools? 

It  should  be  saved  for  the  doctor's  inspection. 
Q.    What  is  always  more  or  less  important? 

Hemmorrhage  from  any  organ.     Even  a  slight  nose- 
bleed may  be  an  initial  symptom  of  a  typhoid. 
Q.    What  must  be  carefully  observed? 

The  color,  quantity  and^general  character. 
Q.    What  should  be  noted  in  regard  to  pain? 

Whether  it  is  acute,  dull,  aching,  stinging,  burning, 
steady,  spasmodic,  etc. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  it  is  uncertain   whether  a  cir- 
cumstance is  of  any  value? 

It  should  be  noted,  for  it  is  better  to  report  to  the 
physician  a  dozen  superfluous  items,  than  to  omit  one  of  im- 
portance. Memory  should  never  be  trusted,  but  everything 
written  down. 

Bedmakixg. 
Q.    What  is  one  of  the  most  important  daily  duties  of  a 
sister  of  charity? 

The  making  of  the  bed. 
Q.    What  does  the  gocd  making  up  of  a  bed  impart  to  the 
patient? 

It  imparts  a  great  relief  to  the  patient  if  his  bed  is 
arranged  and  made  up  well. 

Q.    How  should  you  make  up  a  bed  for  a  patient  who  is 
not  very  ill? 


The  Nckslng  Sister.  49 


(1).  To  make  up  the  bed  for  a  patient,  who  is  able 
and  allowed  to  leave  the  bed,  you  first  help  the  patient  out  of 
bed,  and  place  him  well  propped,  and  protected  with  covers 
against  taking  cold  in  a  chair,  near  the  bed. 

(2).  Take  the  bedclothes  one  by  one  out  of  the  bed- 
stead and  shake  them  up  well. 

Q.    What  shall  be  done  if  the  bed  has  a  str  iwsack? 

It  shall  be  shaken  up  well,   if  anything  is  soiled  it 
must  be  removed  and  the  pillows  arranged  in  the  proper  way. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  if  the  bed  has  a  mattress  and 
bolster? 

They  must  be  turned  every  day. 
Q.    What  is  to  be  done  with  soiled  sheets'? 

Soiled  sheets  should  be  removed  and  replaced  by 
clean  ones,  which  are  to  be  spread  straight  and  smooth  upon 
the  bed,  to  prevent  bedsores. 

Q.    What  must  be  put  in  the  bed  of  a  patient  who  passes 
the  discharges  into  the  bed? 

In  such  a  case  it  is  necessary  that  a  rubber  sheet  and  a 
draw  sheet  be  placed  in  the  bed. 

Q.    How  shall  the  sheets  be  kept  straight? 

By  tucking  them  securely  under  the  ma' tress  or  straw- 
sack. 

Q.    How  is  the  top  sheet  turned? 

The  upper  sheet  is  turned  down  over  the  cover,  and 
then  turned  down  with  the  covers  towards  the  foot  end  of  the 
bed. 

Q.    How  is  the  patient  then  brought  back  to  bed? 

The  patient  is  then  brought  carefully  and  easy  to  bed. 
Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  in  regard   to  covers  by  pa- 
tients with  fever? 

That  they  are  not  covered  in  an  unreasonable  manner 
with  heavy  covers. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  it  is  impossible  for  the  patient 
to  sit  up? 

Such  patients  are  placed  on  a  couch  or  stretcher. 
—4 


50  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  required  when  a  patient  is  to  be  laid  upon  a 
stretcher? 

To  raise  a  patient  carefully  from  his  bed,  and  put  him 
on  a  stretcher,  or  change  him  from  one  bed  to  another,  it  re- 
quires several  sisters  and  certain  manipulations. 

Q.    Where  is  the  stretcher  placed,  when  a  patient  is  to  be 
placed  upon  it? 

The  stretcher  is  set  near  the  side  of  the  bed,  so  that 
the  head  end  of  the  stretcher  stands  even  with  the  foot  end 
of  the  bed. 

Q.    How  is  the  patient  lifted  upon  it? 

(1 ).  One  of  the  sisters  cla«p<  the  head  and  shoulders 
of  the  patient,  while  the  patient  supports  his  hands  and  arms 
on  the  shoulder  of  the  sister. 

(2).  Another  sister  clasps  the  hips,  a  third  the  knees 
and  limbs. 

Q.    When  and  how  is  the  patient  lifted? 

All  three  lift  the  patient  at  the  same  time,  make  a 
turn,  so  that  the  position  of  his  head  corresponds  with  the 
head  end  of  the  stretcher, 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  lowered? 

The  patient  should  be  lowered  easy  and  gently. 
Q.    In  what  way  should  the  patient  be  put  back  to  bed? 
In  the  same  manner  as  he  was  brought  from  the  bed 
to  the  stretcher.    This  is  also  to  be  observed,  when  the  pa- 
tient is  to  be  brought  into  the  bathtub. 

Laying  Out  a  Corpse. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  observed  when  laying  out  a  corpse?    . 
The  same  tenderness  and  modesty  is  to  be  observed  as 
with  a  living  patient. 
Q.    Why? 

Although  the  body  is  dead  and  without  feeling,  it  is 
venerable,  when  looked  upon  in  the  light  of  faith,  for  it  was 
once  a  temple  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 


St.  John's  Hosnxai 
Heaith  Science  Ubrary 
800  £.  Carpenter 
b  ^Springfield,  IL  62769 

The  Nursing  Sistkr.  51 


Q.    How  should  you,  therefore,  never  handle  the  body? 
One  should  never  handle  the  body  roughly;    always 
lift  it  with  two  or  three  persons,  if  it  is  heavy;  never  let  the 
head  fall,  and  never  step  in  or  over  the  coffin. 

Q.    What  can  be  done  so  as  not  to  be  disturbed  by  the 
family? 

In  order  not  to  be  disturbed,  you  can  lock  the  door  ten 
or  fifteen  minutes. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  provide  for? 

A  sister  must  take  care  that  she  has  sufficient  confi- 
dential assistance,  especially  by  grown  persons. 
Q.    How  should  the  corpse  be  prepared? 

The  face,  the  eyes,  the  ears,   nose,   mouth  and  teeth 
must  be  washed  as  clean  as  possible,  the  hair  combed  neatly. 
Q.    How  should  hands  and  feet  be  cleaned? 

The  hands  and  arms  should  at  least  be  washed 
thoroughly  up  to  the  elbows,  the  fingernails  trimmed.  The 
feet  are  also  thorougly  washed,  the  toe-nails  trimmed  and 
cleaned. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  after  the  corpse  is  washed? 

After  the  body  is  washed,  clean  clothes  are  put  on, 
whereat  the  utmost  modesty  must  be  preserved  and  is  only 
done  under  the  covers. 

Q.    What  is  laid  upon  the  eyes? 

Small  square  pieces  of  linen,   folded  several  times, 
dipped  in  some  liquid,  so  that  the  eyes  remain  closed. 
Q.    What  is  tied  around  the  mouth? 

A  thin,  white  cloth  is  tied  tight  around  it. 
Q.    In  what  position  are  the  hands  placed  if  the  deceased 
was  a  Catholic? 

The  hands  are  folded  as  for  prayer. 
Q.    What  should  the  sisters  pray  who  assist  at  laying  out 
a  corpse? 

The  fourth  penitential  psalm. 
Q.    How  shall  they  pray  it? 

In  a  low  tone,  so  as  not  to  disturb  others. 


52  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  never  be  dropped  carelessly? 
Neither  the  coffin  itself,  nor  the  handles. 

Cleaning  of  the  Rooms  and  Corridors. 

1.    Dusting. 

Q.    When  should  a  room  be  dusted? 

The  room  should  he  dusted  after  sweeping  and  before 
mopping. 

Q.    With  what  should  it  be  done? 

It  can  be  done  with  two  dusting  cloths,  by  first  dust- 
ing with  one  and  then  using  the  other,  or  with  one  dusting 
cloth  and  a  hairbrush. 

Q.    What  should  never  be  used  for  dusting? 

Featherdusters. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  they  only  serve  to  whirl  the  dust  around  in 
the  room,  but  do  not  remove  it,  and  therefore  act  very  in- 
juriously upon  the  lungs. 

Q.    If  the  washstand  and  the  small  table  at  the  head  of 
the  bed  is  covered  with  an  oilcloth,  how  can  it  be  kept  clean? 
They  must  be  washed  off  daily,  likewise  the  articles 
which  are  upon  the  washstand. 

2.    Hopping  the  Boom. 

Q.    How  can  a  room  be  thoroughly  cleaned? 

If  the  room  is  to  be  mopped,  all  furniture,  tables, 
chairs,  etc.,  are  moved  from  their  places,  or,  if  possible,  car- 
ried out  of  the  room,  then  wipe  up  to  the  washboard  with  a 
clean,  soft  cloth. 

Q.    How  is  the  floor  mopped? 

The  floor  is  mopped  with  a  coarse  mop  rag  and  a 
stick,  but  great  care  must  be  taken,  not  to  touch  the  wash- 
board, and  thereby  spoil  the  paint. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  53 

Q.    How  should  you  wring  out  the  cloth? 

The  first  time  it  should  be  fairly  wet,  the  second  time 
wring  it  out  tight  and  rub  it  over  the  floor  vigorously. 

Q.    What  should  never  be  left  standing  after  mopping? 

Pools  of  water. 

Cleaning  the  Patient. 

1.     Washing. 

Q.    How  can  a  patient  be  washed? 

If  the  patient  is  not  too  weak,  and  can  sit  up,  then  he 
is  washed  while  he  is  sitting  up,  and  also  combed. 
Q.    With  what  is  the  patient  generally  washed? 

Face  and  hands  are  generally  washed  with  tepid 
water. 

Q.    In  what  cases  must  this  be  omitted? 

If  the  patient  is  afflicted  with  rash,  erysipelis,  mea- 
sles, scarlet  fever,  smallpox,  etc. 

2.  Bathing. 

Q.    What  directions  must  be   followed  at  bathing  the 
patient? 

The  doctor's  directions  must  be  strictly  followed. 
Q.    How  are  baths  distinguished? 

We  distinguish  full  baths,  or  local  baths,  that  is  bath- 
ing certain  parts  of  the  body. 

Q.    How  is  a  full  or  plunge  bath  given? 

If  the  patient  has  enough  strength  to  walk  he  will  go 
to  the  bathroom  and  take  his  bath  there  precisely  as  pre- 
scribed by  the  doctor  in  regard  to  temperature,  time  and 
mixture. 

Q.    How  are  weak  patients  taken  to  the  bathroom? 

Very  weak  patients  are  undressed  in  bed,  a  bathing 
apron  or  gown  put  on,  wrapped  in  a  blanket,  and  carefully 
placed  with  the  apron  into  the  bath. 


54  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  shall  be  given  to  weak  patients  before  the  bath? 
Weak  patients  should  always  take  a  stimulant  before 
the  bath. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  the  patient  should  faint  while 
bathing? 

If  the  patient  should  nevertheless  faint,  the  bath 
must  at  once  be  interrupted  and  the  case  must  be  reported  to 
the  doctor. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  after  the  bath? 

Immediately  after  the  bath  the  patient  must  be 
well  rubbed  and  brought  to  bed,  and,  if  necessary,  some  re- 
freshments given. 

3 .    Changing  the  Clothes. 
Q.    How  should  a  sister  change  the  clothes  and  underwear 
of  a  patient? 

To  change  the  clothes  of  a  patient  it  requires  great 
care  and  practice. 

Q.    How  can  a  nightgown  or  shirt  be  changed? 

If  a  nightgown  or  shirt  is  to  be  changed,  then  lift  the 
patient  slightly,  draw  the  shirt  or  gown  up  under  the  back  up 
to  the  neck  and  then  over  the  head. 
Q.    What  is  stripped  off  last? 

The  sleeves. 
Q.    If  the  arm  be  the  afflicted  part  what  care  must  be 

taken? 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  afflicted  part  be  released 

from  the  clothes  last. 

Q.    How  are  the  clean  clothes  put  on  the  patient? 

In  putting  on  the  clean  clothes,  the  reverse  is  fol- 
lowed from  the  taking  off,  namely,  the  afflicted  part  is  taken 
first. 

Ventilation. 
Q.    In  what  does  the  proper  ventilation  of  a  room  consist? 
The  proper  ventilation  of  a  room  consists  in  trying 
constantly  to  renew  the  used  and  foul  air,  through  fresh  air 
from  outdoors. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  55 

Q.    What  can  be  done  for  this  purpose? 

For  this  purpose  keep  the  window  farthest  from  the 
patient,  day  and  night,  down  at  least  an  inch  from  the  top, 
so  that  fresh  air  can  constantly  come  in. 
Q.    What  shall  be  done  besides  this? 

Besides  this  the  windows  should  be  opened  wide  three 
times  a  day,  morning,  noon  and  evening,  in  dry  weather. 

Q.    What  special  care  should  be  taken  during  this  time? 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  patient  is  protected  from 

draught,  by  covering  and  keeping  him  covered  with  extra 

blankets  until  the  temperature  again  rises  to  68  or  70  degrees 

after  ventilating. 

Q.    Is  ventilation  of  great  importance  in  hospitals? 

Yes:  ventilation  of  halls  and  rooms  in  a  hospital  is  of 
the  greatest  importance. 
Q.     Why? 

Because  fresh  air  is  half  the  medicine,  while  foul  air 
is  almost  poison. 

Q.    What  is  therefore  one  of  the  most  important  duties  of 
a  nurse? 

To  be  just  as  conscientious  about  ventilating  as  about 
giving  medicine  and  performing  other  important  duties. 

Q.    How  can  the  ventilation  in  a  hospital  be  best  regu- 
lated? 

An  intelligent  and  prudent  sister  should  be  appointed 
in  every  house,  who  has  to  attend  to  the  ventilation  in  the 
whole  house  three  times  a  day  in  the  rooms,  with  the  above 
mentioned  precautions. 

Q.     Is  it  enough  to  ventilate  the  halls  three  times  a  day? 

-  No;  the  halls  should  be  ventilated  more  frequently, 

at  least  five  times  a  day,  especially  then  when  on  account  of 

bad  weather  the  ventilation  in  the  rooms  is  impossible  through 

the  open  window. 


56  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Temperature  of  the  Room.    ^ 
Q.     What  besides  the  bedstead  and  table  is  an  absolute 
necessary  article  in  the  sick  room. 

A  thermometer  for  the  regulating  of  the  temperature 
of  the  room. 

Q.    How  should  the  temperature  be  kept? 

The  temperature  should  be  kept  equal,  never  below 
65  degrees  and  never  above  70  degrees. 

Q.    How  can  this  heat  be  replaced  in  winter? 

In  winter  the  temperature  must  be  replaced  through 
artificial  heat,  as  stove,  water,  air  or  steam  heat. 

Q.    Of  what  advantage  is  an  open  fireplace  in  a  sickroom? 
If  an  open  fireplace  can  be  had  in  a  sickroom,  it  will 
serve  a  double  purpose,  affording  the  necessary  heat  and  ven- 
tilation. 

Q.    What  special  care  should  be  taken  in  summer  time? 
In  summer,  care  should  be  taken  to  exclude  the  rays 
of  the  sun,  through  rouleaux  or  blinds,  and  by  sprinkling 
water  or  ether  to  remove  the  close  air. 

Taking  Temperature. 

Q.    What  is  the  normal  temperature  of  the  human  body? 

The  normal  temperature  is  98  4-10  degrees. 
Q.    How  is  the  temperature  taken  if  the  patient  is  awake 
and  conscious? 

Then  it  is  safest  to  put  the  thermometer  in  the 
mouth. 

Q.    How  is  the  thermometer  placed  in  the  mouth? 

It  is  placed  in  the  mouth  beneath  the  tongue,  the 
lips  closed  for  3  to  5  minutes. 

Q.    In  what  case  should  che  thermometer  never  be  p'aced 
in  the  mouth? 

It  should  never  be  placed  in  the  mouth  if  the  patient 
is  not  wide  awake,  or  if  he  is  irr.  sponsible,  for  then  there  is 
danger  that  he  may  break  the  thermometer  by  biting  it,  and 
this  would  cause  immediate  danger  of  life. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  57 

Q.    "Where  should  the  thermometer  be  placed  in  this  case*? 
In  this  case  the  thermometer  should  he  placed  under 
the  clothes,  in  the  patient's  axilla,  between  the  upper  arm  and 
the  chest,  while  the  arm  is  closely  pressed  to  the  chest. 

Q.    How  long  should  the  thermometer  remain  in  the 
axilla? 

At  least  five  minutes. 
Q.     When  is  the  temperature  generally  taken? 

The  temperature  is  generally  taken  in  the  morning  at 
8  and  in  the  evening  at  6  o'clock. 

Q.    In  what  cases  is  the  temperature  to  be  taken  more 
frequently? 

In  cases  of  typhoid  fever  the  temperature  is  taken 
more  frequently,  according  to  the  directions  of  the  doctor. 

Q.    On  what  shall  the  clinical  thermometer  be  kept  and 
brought  to  the  room? 

It  should  be  kept  on  a  small  waiter  or  plate  with 
clean  sponge,  small  bottle  or  glass  of  a  weak  solution  of  car- 
bolic acid,  and  a  clock  or  watch  with  a  minute  hand. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  is  the  carbolized  solution  used? 
For    washing    the    thermometer    before   and    after 
using  it. 

Q.     What  shall  be  put  in  the  bottom  of  the  bottle? 

A  little  cotton  to  avoid  breaking  the  thermometer  in 
case  it  slips  and  strikes  the  bottom. 

Q.    How  often  should  this  solution  be  changed? 
Twice  a  week. 

Bandaging. 

Q.    What  is  the  first  thing  to  be  shown  in  bandaging  in- 
struction? 

To  roll  a  bandage  by  hand. 
Q.    How  is  it  done? 

It  is  taken  into  the  right  hand,  the  end  of  the  strip  is 
folded  over  upon  itself,  until  you  have  a  little  roll  stiff  enough 
to  keep  in  shape. 


58  The  Nurstng  Sister. 

Q.    In  which  hand  is  the  roll  taken? 

It  is  taken  into  the  right  hand  between  the  thumb 
and  middle  finger.  Then  turn  it,  let  the  bandage  pass  over 
the  back  of  the  left  hand,  between  the  forefinger  and  thumb, 
and  be  pressed  with  the  thumb  of  the  other  hand  against  the 
roll. 

Q.    With    what  part  of    the  human    body    should  the 
teacher  begin  this  instruction? 

First  with  the  hand,  then  with  the  arm. 
Q.    How  long  should  this  be  practiced? 

Until  every  novice  has  acquired  a  facility  to  make  and 
reverse  the  bandages,  and  the  reverses  are  even  and  straight. 
Q.    What  next? 

Then  the  elbow  is  bandaged,  the  upper  arm,  the  sin- 
gle and  double  shoulder-brace,  the  fingers,  the  foot,  the  heel, 
finally  the  head  and  the  eyes. 

Q.    What  are  bandages  used  for? 

To  hold  the  dressings  in  place,  to  give  support,  or  pre- 
vent motion. 

Q.    How  shall  a  bandage  be  removed? 

a  bandage  must  be  removed  with  the  greatest  care, 
without  hurry,  without  jerking,  so  that  the  afflicted  partis 
not  concussed,  which  would  cause  the  patient  pain,  or  hemor- 
rhage, or  dislocate  a  set  fracture. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  if  the  bandage  adheres  to  the 
wound? 

In  that  case  it  must  be  moistened  with  an  antiseptic 
solution  to  loosen  it. 

Q.    What  bandages  are  commonly  used? 

Roller  bandages,  many-tailed  bandages  and  T  Band- 
ages. 

Q.    What  are  roller  bandages? 

They  are  strips  of  muslin,  flannel  or  gauze  from  half 
an  inch  to  eight  inches  wide  and  of  different  length,  tightly 
rolled  upon  themselves. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  59 


Q.    What  must  be  trimmed  off  the  bandages? 

Loose  threads  and  the  selvages. 
Q.    What  kind  of  a  bandage  must  be  used  for  moist  or 
wet  dressings? 

Of  material  that  has  been  washed  before. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  inconvenience  may  arise  from  shrinkage. 
Q.    How  can  bandages  be  pieced? 

Lay  the  two  flat  ends  on  each  other,  overlapping  for 
an  inch,  sew  with  long  stitches. 
Q.    How  should  it  be  rolled? 

As  tight  as  possible. 
Q.    How  should  you  unwind  the  bandage  in  putting  on  a. 
roller  bandage? 

No  faster  than  necessary,  keeping  the  roll  close  to  the 
body. 

Q.    How  must  a  well-fitting  bandage  lie? 

Smooth,  without  wrinkles,  making  an  even  pressure. 
Q.    How  must  they  be  applied? 

Not  too  loose,  or  it  will  slip  off,  and  not  too  tight,  or 
it  will  be  painful  and  impede  the  circulation. 

Q.    What  bandage  is  used  when  it  is  important  to  avoid 
motion? 

A  many-tailed  bandage. 
Q.    Of  what  is  this  made? 

Of  a  piece  of  muslin  torn  into  strips  from  each  side  to 
within  an  inch  or  two  of  the  center. 

Q.    What  bandage  is  an  improvement  upon  this? 

The  bandage  of  Scultetus. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  made? 

Take  a  long  strip  of  muslin,  sew  across  it  at  right 
angles  other  strips  overlapping  each  other  by  two-thirds  their 
width. 

Q.    What  other  bandage  is  frequently  used? 

A  "T"  bandage,  being  called  so  because  it  has  the 
form  of  the  Roman  letter  T. 


60  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  a  sling  or  triangular  bandage? 

It  is  either  a  square  or  three-cornered  piece  of  muslin. 
Q.    What  are  rubber  bandages  used  for'? 

To  reduce  or  prevent  swelling. 
Q.    How  should  they  be  put  on'? 

Without  any  reverses,  and  special  care  must  be  taken 
to  avoid  getting  them  too  tight. 

Q.    What  besides  these  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose"? 
An  elastic  stocking  is  usually  used  in  case  of  varicose 
veins. 

Q.    What  is  another  means  of  affording  support  or  protec- 
tion to  a  limb  or  other  parts'? 

By  strapping  with  adhesive  plaster. 
Q.    How  must  the  strips  be  cut? 

Lengthwise. 
Q.    How  can  they  be  warmed  if  necessary'? 

By  holding  the  plain  side  over  a  flame  or  hot  water. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  part  or  limb  to  which 
the  plaster  is  to  be  applied? 

It  must  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  shaved. 
Q.    In  what  cases  is  strapping  employed  in  the  place  of 
bandaging? 

In  cases  of  fractured  ribs,  or  whenever  it  is  desirable 
to  limit  the  movements  of  the  chest. 
Q.    What  advantage  has  strapping? 

It  can  be  employed  to  one  side  only. 
Q.    How  are  plaster  of  pans  bandages  made? 

They  are  prepared  by  rubbing  into  coarse  gauze  or 
muslin  rollers  as  much  of  the  plaster  of  paris  as  they  will 
carry. 

Q.    Where  must  they  be  kept  if  they  are  not  used  at  once? 

In  tin  boxes. 
Q.    What  kind  of  plaster  of   paris  bandages  are  mostly 
used  at  the  present  time? 

Such  as  are  bought  already  prepared,  and  packed  each 
one  alone  in  air-tight  tin  boxes. 


The  NuksiMj  Sister.  61 


Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  limb  before  the  plaster 
of  paris  cast  is  put  oq? 

It  must  be  thoroughly  cleaned,  and,  if  necessary, 
shaved,  then  a  soft  stocking  or  piece  of  soft  flannel  wrapped 
around  it. 

Q.    What  is  done  with  the  bandage  before  it  is  applied? 
As  soon  as  the  doctor  is  ready  it  is  emersed  into  water 
until  well  saturated,  then  squeezed  out  and  handed  to  the 
doctor. 

Q.    What  adds  to  setting  of  plaster  of  paris? 

A  little  salt  put  in  the  water. 
Q.    Is  the  salt  always  used? 

No;  some  surgeons  say  it  spoils  the  cast;  follow  the 
directions  of  the  surgeon. 

Q.   How  long  does  it  generally  take  before  they  are  per. 
fectly  dry? 

About  twelve  hours,  more  or  less,  according  to  thick- 
ness. 

Q.    What  is  required  when  a  plaster  of  paris  jacket  is  ap- 
plied? 

A  frame,  in  which  the  patient  can  be  placed  so  that 
the  feet  do  not  touch  the  floor. 

Q.    What  is  put  on  the  patient  before  the  bandages  are 
applied? 

A  thin,  tight-fitting  woven  undershirt. 
Q.    How  long  must  the  broken  limb  be  kept  perfectly 
quiet,  after  applying  the  plaster  bandages? 
Until  the  cast  is  firm. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  to  keep  it  in  position? 

Sandbags  filled  about  three-quarters  full  of  fine  sand. 
.  Q.    What  will  they  hasten  if  they  are  heated? 
The  drying. 
Q.    When  a  plaster  splint  is  to  be  removed,  what  will  fa- 
cilitate the  process? 

By  moistening  it  along  the  proposed  line  of  incision 
with  diluted  hydrochloric  acid. 


62  The  N cubing  Sister. 

Q.    How  long  is  the  cast  left  on'? 

Until  the  fracture  is  healed,  or  as  long  as  the  afflicted 
part  needs  a  support. 

Q.    With  what  is  it  taken  off'? 

With  a  small  saw  or  scissors  made  for  this  purpose. 
Q.    What  is  necessary,  if  there  is  a  wound  beneath   the 
plaster  cast'? 

That  a  piece  of  the  plaster  is  cut  out,  so  that  the  se- 
cretion can  escape  and  the  wound  he  dressed. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  get  ready  when  a  plaster  of  paris 
cast  is  to  be  applied'? 

Warm  and  cold  water,  plaster  of  paris  bandages,  dry 
plaster  of  paris,  aprons,  towels,  and,  if  needed,  a  frame  and 
a  stocking  sleeve  or  undershirt. 

Night  Watching. 

Q.    What  is  night  watching? 

Night  watching  is  to  watch  by  and  nurse  the  patient 
during  the  hours  of  night. 
Q.    Is  it  necessary? 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  if  the  patient  is  very  ill:  it 

belongs  to  the  regular  arrangements  and  duties  of  a  hospital. 

Q.    At  what  time  does  the  first  night  nurse  come  on  duty'? 

The  first  night  nurse  comes  on  duty  at  8  o'clock  and 

remains  until  half  past  twelve  in  the  morning. 

Q.    The  second'? 

The  second  comes  on  at  half  past  twelve  and  remains  un- 
til half  past  five. 

Q.    What  kind  of  shoes  should  the  night  nurse  wear  and 
for  what  reason'? 

The  night  nurse  wears  soft  shoes  instead  of  leather 
ones,  so  she  may  move  quietly  about  in  the  whole  house. 

Q.    If  a  sister  has  a  special  night  watch  where  should  she 
remain"? 

She  should  then  constantly  remain  in  the  room  or  at 
the  bed  of  the  patient. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  03 

Q.    How  should  a  sister   manage  if  she  has  the  night 
watch  in  the  male  or  female  department,  or  in  the  wards? 

In  this  case  the  sister  makes  her  rounds  in  the  wards 
assigned  to  her  every  hour  or  of  tener  if  necessary,  and  watches 
whether  there  is  anything  to  do. 
Q.    How  must  she  move  about'? 

The  sister  must  move  about  quietly,  without  a  light, 
open  the  door  carefully,  cast  a  glance  over  the  entire  ward. 

Q.    If  everything  is  quiet  and  the  patients  asleep,  what 
should  the  sister  do? 

The  sister  should  shut  the  door  slowly,  without  any 
noise  and  withdraw. 

Q.    If  there  are  some  very  ill   patients  in  a  ward,  what 
should  a  sister  do  then? 

If  there  are  some  very  ill  patients  who  do  not  require 
a  special  night  watch,  the  sister  should  go  up  to  the  bed  and 
observe  the  patient  for  a  few  minutes. 

Q.    What  should  the  sister  do  if  he  is  asleep? 

The  sister  should  then  not  disturb  him.  If  he  wishes 
anything,  he'll  surely  ask  for  it. 

Q.    What  is  of  special  importance  at  night? 

It  is  very  important  at  night  that  the  doors  be  opened 
and  shut  without  making  a  noise. 

Q.    If  any  door  should  make  a  noise,  what  is  to  be  done? 
It  must  be  arranged  in  daytime,  so  that  the  sleep  of 
the  patients  is  not  disturbed  during  the  night. 

Q.    If  the  patient  has  taken  anything   to  sleep,  shall  he 
be  disturbed  to  take  other  medicine? 

No;  this  would  not  only  be  imprudent,  but  cruel.  In 
this  case,  the  sister  should  wait  until  the  patient  wakes  up. 

Q.    In  what  case  is  the  patient  to  be  waked  up  to  take 
other  medicine? 

Only  in  special  cases,  when  the  doctor  has  ordered  it. 
Q.    What  patients  often  have  to  be  awakened  to  take 
nourishment  or  stimulants? 


64  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Fever  patients  or  very  weak  patients,  or  convales- 
cents, if  they  sleep  sound  too  long,  may  be  awakened,  to  give 
them  a  drink  or  stimulants,  provided  the  doctor  has  or- 
dered it. 

Food. 
Q.    Whose  directions  has  the  sister  to  follow  in  regard  to 
nourishment  and  food  for  the  patient? 

Food  should  be  given  according  to  the  directions  of 
the  doctor  as  to  quality,  quantity  and  time. 
Q.    Must  this  rule  always  be  observed? 

All  sisters  are  bound  to  observe  this  rule  strictly. 
Q.    If  this  rule  is  not  followed,  what  might  be  the  conse- 
quence? 

There  is  great  danger  that  the  sisters  will  injure  the 
patient. 

Q.    How  should  the  meals  be  brought  to  a  patient? 

Whoever  brings  the  meals  to  a  patient,  should  see 
that  there  is  a  clean  napkin  on  the  waiter,  that  glasses, 
plates,  dishes,  cups,  knives,  spoons  and  forks  are  perfectly 
clean  and  bright. 

Giving  Medicine. 
Q.    What  are  the  duties  of  the  sister  who  distributes  the 
medicine? 

The  sister  who  gives  the  medicine  to  the  patients, 
must  be  especially  conscientious  and  give  it  exactly  at  the 
prescribed  hour,  and  also  in  the  prescribed  quantity. 

Q.    As  to  the  quantity,  is  she  allowed  to  depend  upon  the 
eye? 

She  is  not  allowed  to  depend  upon  the  eye,  but  should 
use  a  graduated  glass  for  this  purpose  every  time. 

Q.    Why  should  she  use  a  graduated  glass  or  spoon? 

Because  common  teaspoons  and  tablespoons  are  of 
such  varying  sizes  that  it  is  unsafe  to  trust  to  them  in  meas- 
uring doses. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  65 


Q.    Can  a  sister  be  too  exact  in  this  matter? 

It  is  not  possible  to  be  too  exact:  for  to  judge  of  the 
right  quantity  of  doses  by  the  eye  is  a  crime. 

Atomizer. 

Q.    When  is  a  hand-atomizer  used? 

In  cases  where  it  is  necessary  to  throw  a  spray  into 
the  mouth,  throat,  etc.  The  prescribed  fluid  is  either  hot  or 
cold. 

Q.    Is  there  any  other  atomizer? 

Yes;  steam  atomizers. 
Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  when  a  steam  atomizer  is 


used? 

Not  to  have  too  much  or  too  little  water  in  the  kettle. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  if  there  be  too  much  water,  the  hot  water 
would  boil  out  and  scald  the  patient's  mouth,  and  if  not 
enough  the  kettle  would  burst. 

Bedrest. 

Q.  If  there  is  no  bedrest  at  hand,  what  can  be  used  in  its 
place? 

Take  a  high,  flat-backed  chair,  turn  it  up  in  s-uch  a  way 
that  the  four  feet  are  in  the  air,  and  that  it  rests  on  the  edge 
of  the  seat  and  top  of  the  back. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  supported? 

Slip  the  back  of  the  chair  down  in  the  bed,  well  cov- 
ered with  pillows  filled  in  to  the  small  of  the  patient's  back, 
and  supporting  his  back  and  shoulders. 

Q.    In  what  case  is  a  regularly  made  bedrest  necessary? 
When  the  patient  is  permanently  feeble,  then  a  bed- 
rest which  can  be  lowered  and  raised  is  necessary,  and  it 
should  have  arms  or  braces  to  keep  the  patient  from  slipping 
down  on  either  side. 


— o 


66  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Catheters. 

Q.    How  many  different  kind  of  catheters  are  used? 

Three:  glass,  rubber  or  silver  ones. 
Q.    In  what  way  are  the  rubber  ones  the  best*? 

They  are  flexible  and  least  likely  to  hurt  or  injure  the 
patient. 

Q.    What  size  of  rubber  catheters  are  generally  used  for 
female  patients? 

Number  seven. 
Q.    Which  are  the  cleanest? 

The  glass  ones. 
Q.    How  are  the  glass  ones  kept  antiseptic? 

Immediately  after  they  are  used  they  should  be 
washed  with  clear  water,  then  laid  in  cold  or  warm  water 
(not  hot)  and  set  on  the  stove  to  boil  for  about  five  minutes. 
Then  they  are  again  washed  with  sterilized  water  and  kept  in 
a  covered  glass  bottle  or  jar,  which  contains  an  antiseptic  so- 
lution, either  of  carbolic  acid  or  bichloride.  In  this  way  they 
are  always  ready  for  use. 

Q.    What  should  be  kept  at  the  bottom  of  the  glass? 

Some  cotton,  so  that  if  the  catheter  should  happen  to 
slip  it  would  not  strike  the  bottom  of  the  glass,  and  by  this 
prevent  breaking  of  the  catheter. 

Q.    How  are  the  rubber  ones  cleaned? 

They  must  be  washed  thoroughly  immediately  after 
they  are  used,  with  green  soap  or  sapolio  and  hot  water,  and 
let  plenty  of  hot  water  run  through  the  catheter.    Then  wipe 
it  dry  and  keep  it  wrapped  in  a  piece  of  gauze. 
Q,    When  must  the  rubber  ones  be  boiled? 

In  certain  cases  when  the  doctor  requires  it,  always 
before  using  it  from  one  patient  to  another. 

Q.    Where  can  they  be  kept  if  they  are  used  at  short  in- 
tervals? 

In  a  weak  solution  of  carbolic  acid? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  67 


Q.    How  are  the  silver  ones  cleaned? 

They  are  cleaned  and  boiled  in  the  same  way  as  the 
glass  ones,  then  wiped  and  laid  aside. 

Q.    What  catheters  should  he  oiled  before  they  are  used? 

The  flexible  rubber  and  the  silver  ones. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

After  they  are  drawn  through  a  carboiized  solution, 
then  through  sterilized  water,  they  are  oiled  with  the  finger. 
Never  put  the  instrument  into  the  vaseline,  for  this  might 
close  up  the  opening  in  the  instrument  and  also  mix  the  vase- 
line with  the  urine  and  render  it  unfit  for  examination. 

Q.  What  must  the  sister  do  before  she  uses  the  catheter? 
After  having  washed  her  hands  thoroughly  she  must 
lock  the  door,  or,  if  in  a  ward,  place  a  screen  around  the  bed, 
remove  the  covers  with  exception  of  the  sheets.  In  some  cases 
it  will  be  necessary  to  wash  her  hands  in  an  antiseptic  solu- 
tion or  sterilized  water. 

Q.    How  should  the  catheter  be  used? 

Have  the  patient  fiat  on  the  back,  if  possible  with  the 
thighs  slightly  separated.  Then  wash  the  parts  carefully, 
with  sponges  of  gauze  or  cotton  wetted  in  sterilized  water  or 
an  antiseptic  solution.  Take  the  catheter  out  of  the  antisep- 
tic solution,  wash  it  through  sterilized  water,  and  insert  it 
carefully  without  force. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  seems  to  be  an  obstruc- 
tion? 

Then  the  sister  should  stop  at  once,  and  send  for  the 
doctor,  if  the  case  is  urgent. 

Q.    How  should  the  catheter  be  withdrawn? 

After  the  bladder  is  emptied,  the  catheter  is  with- 
drawn as  gently  as  it  was  introduced.  While  removing  the 
catheter,  keep  a  finger  over  the  open  end,  so  that  the  few 
drops  which  it  contains  will  not  fall  on  the  bed. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  after  the  catheter  is  withdrawn? 
The  parts  are  again  washed  as  before. 


68  The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    How  should  this  be  done? 

With  as  little  exposure  as  possible. 
Q,    What  is  to  be  done  with  the  catheter? 

It  must  be  cleaned  and  laid  aside. 
Q.    Whose  duty  is  it  to  attend  to  the  catherization? 

'With  male  patients,  a  man;  with  female  patients,  the 
nurse. 

Q.    May  sisters  assist  at  the  operation  of  the  bladder  of  a 
male  patient? 

Yes;  but  only  then  when  the  doctors  are  extremely 
careful. 

Q.    Who  must  dress  and  treat  the  wound  after  the  opera- 
tion? 

The  surgeon  himself. 
Q.    How  can  the  bladder  be  irrigated? 

Should  it  be  necessary  to  wash  out  the  bladder,  a  long- 
flexible  tube  is  passed  over  the  catheter,  which  is  then  intro- 
duced, then  the  ordered  fluid,  either  warm  or  cold,  is  poured 
into  the  tube  at  the  other  end  with  a  small  pitcher,  or  the 
rubber  tube  is  connected  with  an  irrigator. 

Enemeta-Syringe  and  Enemas. 

Q.    What  is  an  enema? 

It  is  a  fluid  preparation  for  injection  into  the  rectum. 
Q.    For  what  purpose  is  it  most  commonly  given? 

To  obtain  an  action  from  the  bowels. 
Q.    What  syringe  is  most  commonly  used? 

One  that  has  a  rubber  ball  at  one  end  or  in  the  mid- 
dle. 

Q.    What  syringe  is  the  best  and  most  convenient? 

A  fountain  syringe  or  irrigator,  which  is  an  enameled 
tin  bucket  or  rubber  bag,  of  different  sizes,  to  which  a  rubber 
tube  of  about  one  and  one-half  yards  long  is  attached;  at  its 
end  it  has  a  hard  rubber,  metal  or  glass  nozzle  attached. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  69 

Q.    How  can  it  be  kept  clean? 

Before  and  after  its  use  clean  water  should  be  passed 
through  the  syringe  freely,  wiped  dry,  and  if  the  tube  is  of 
metal,  it  must  be  kept  bright. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  when  an  enema  is  to  be  given? 
Have  the  ordered  fluid  in  the  basin  or  irrigator,  the 
right  temperature  and  quantity,  before  bringing  it  into  the 
room. 

Q.    How  should  the  bed  be  protected? 

By  placing  a  rubber  and  draw-sheet  under  the  patient. 
Q.    What  position  should  the  patient  take? 

He  should  lie  on  his  left  side  with  his  knees  drawn  up. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  before  the  tube  is  inserted? 

Some  water  must  be  passed  through  the  rubber  tube 
and  nozzle  from  the  irrigator  to  expel  the  air. 
Q.    How  is  the  nozzle  inserted? 

It  must  be  first  oiled,  then,  if  the  patient  is  able,  he 
can  insert  the  point  himself,  if  not,  then  it  is  the  duty  of  the 
nurse;  if  possible  it  should  be  done  underneath  the  covers. 
Q.    What  direction  must  be  taken? 

Toward  the  small  of  the  back,  and  never  toward  the 
front. 

Q.    What  might  be  the  consequence  if  the  wrong  direction 
would  betaken? 

The  intestine  might  be  seriously  injured. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  after  the  nozzle  is  inserted? 
If  it  is  a  bulb  syriDge  the  bulb  should  be  squeezed  very 
slowly. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  the  patient  complains  greatly  of 
pain? 

Rest  awhile;  after  a  delay  of  a  few  moments,  you  can 
usually  go  on  without  distress. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  the  irrigator  is  used? 

After  the  nozzle  is  inserted  the  irrigator  must  be  ele- 
vated by  hanging  it  up  or  holding  it. 


70  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  if  the  patient  is  unable  to  bear 
any  more? 

It  must  be  stopped  at  once. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  after  an  enema,  if  the  patient 
has  but  little  control? 

The  anus  must  be  supported  by  folding  a  cloth  and 
pressing  it  to  the  anus,  and  the  patient  should  be  kept  per- 
fectly quiet  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes. 

Q.    What  must  the  sister  preserve  while  giving  an  enema? 

She  must  be  quiet,  careful  and  not  hurry  at  all. 
Q.    What  is  frequently  the  reason  for  failure? 

Because  the  sister  does  not  take  time  enough,  or  the 
enema  is  not  retained  long  enough. 

Q.    How  long  should  an  enema  be  retained? 

If  possible,  ten  to  fifteen  minutes. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  used  in  place  of  the  nozzle? 

A  long,  soft  rubber  tube  about  fifteen  inches  long. 
Q.    What  is  the  enema  called  when  this  tube  is  used? 

A  high-up  enema. 
Q.    How  is  this  tube  inserted? 

It  is  first  oiled  with  vaseline,  then  carefully  inserted 
eight  to  ten  inches. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  are  enemas  given? 

Either  to  relieve  or  control  the  bowels,  or  for  the  pur- 
pose of  nourishing  a  patient  who  is  not  able  to  take  the  food 
by  the  mouth. 

Q.    What  may  be  given  for  the  relieving  of  the  bowels? 
From  one  to  two  pints  of  liquid  may  be  used,  to  which 
sometimes  either  soap,  salt,  olive  oil,  castor  oil,  glycerine  or 
ox-gall  are  added. 

Q.    What  is  generally  used  if  the  enema  is  given  to  con- 
trol the  bowels? 

Less  fluid,  probably  thin  boiled  starch  mixed  with, 
cold  water,  and  some  stringent  or  opiate. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  71 


Q.    What  is  taken  for  nourishing  enema? 

Various  things,  such  as  beeftea,   milk  and  brandy, 
strong  beef  soup,  beef  juice  and  brandy,  etc. 
Q.    How  much  is  generally  given? 

Four  to  eight  ounces;  more  than  this  might  irritate 
and  not  be  retained. 

Q.    How  long  must  the  fluid  be  retained? 

As  long  as  possible  and  no  effort  made  to  discharge. 
Q.    What  is  used  for  a  salt  enema? 

One  and  one-half  ounces  of  salt  in  one  pint  of  warm 
water. 

Q.    What  is  used  for  an  oil  enema. 

Either  olive  oil  (sweet  oil)  or  castor  oil,  six  to  eight 
ounces. 

Q.    In  what  cases  is  an  oil  enema  often  used? 

After  an  operation  of  the  rectum  or  anus,  where  there 
is  likely  to  be  a  strain  upon  the  sutures. 
Q.    For  what  is  this  oil  injected? 

In  order  to  soften  faecal  mass. 
Q.    By  what  is  an  oil  enema  followed? 

By  an  enema  of  water  half  an  hour  afterwards. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  oil  before  it  is  injected? 
It  must  be  warmed,  for  if  it  is  cold  it  is  too  thick  to 
pass  through  the  syringe  readily. 

Q.    What  is  used  for  an  opium  enema? 

Make  thin  boiled  starch;  let  it  cool.  Do  not  use  more 
than  one  teaspoonful  of  raw  starch  for  one  enema,  thin  the 
mixture  with  cold  water,  stirring  it  all  the  time,  for  if  it  is 
too  thick  it  will  not  pass  through  the  tube. 

Q.    What  is  added  to  two  ounces  of  this  starch? 

Thirty  drops  of  laudanum,  more  or  less,  as  ordered. 
Children  require  less.    Ask  for  directions  from  the  doctor. 
Q.    What  is  used  for  an  oil  and  turpentine  enema? 

One-half  ounce  of  turpentine,  one  and  one-half  ounces 
castor  oil  and  three-quarters  of  a  pint  of  water  or  soapsuds. 


72  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  may  be  given  for  a  nourishing  enema? 

Strong  beeftea  or  beef  blood  squeezed  from  slightly 
broiled  steak,  four  to  six  ounces;  cream,  one  ounce;  brandy  as 
ordered  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    What  may  be  beaten  together  and  given  by  rectum? 

Egg  and  brandy,  also  milk  and  eggs. 
Q.    How  much  should  be  given  at  one  time? 

Not  more  than  is  likely  to  be  absorbed,  four  to  eight 
ounces;  for  a  child  from  four  to  six  ounces. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  used  in  obstinate  cases  of  consti- 
pation and  intestinal  obstruction? 

In  such  a  case  nothing  proves  so  effective  as  a  high-up 
enema,  containing  twelve  to  sixteen  ounces  of  molasses. 

Q.    In  what  case  is  the  daily  injection  of  a  pint  of  cold 
water  often  advised? 

In  cases  where  constipation  is  accompanied  by  bleed- 
ing haemorrhoids. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  given   to  check   a   haemorrhage 
from  the  bowels? 

An  injection  of  icewater. 
Q.    What  enemas  are  given  in  an  irritable  condition  of 
the  mucous  membrane? 

E  iemas  of  more  soothing  nature,  such  as  thin  gruel 
or  flax-seed  tea  or  barley  water.  These  should  always  be 
warm. 

Q.    For  what  are  anthelmintic  enemas  given? 

To  destroy  worms. 
Q.    How  much  liquid  is  used  in  such  a  case? 

A  small  quantity— one-half  pint  is  sufficient  for  an 
adult;  a  child  requires  less. 

Q.    By  whom  should  the  remedy  to  be  employed  be  pre- 
scribed? 

By  the  physician,  to  suit  the  case. 
Q.    What  remedies  are  often  used? 

Salt,  quassia,  aloes,  tincture  of  iron,  and  a  weak  solu- 
tion of  carbolic  acid  are  among  those  used. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  73 

Q.    What  are  sedatives  given  for  by  an  enema? 

To  relieve  pain  or  quiet. 
Q.    How  much  of  the  medicine  does  it  generally  take? 
One-third  more  of  any  drug  than  the  dose  given  by 
mouth  to  produce  the  same  effect.    Ask  the  doctor. 

Q.    How  must  an  injection  for  this  purpose  be  given  in  or- 
der to  be  retained? 

It  must  be  given  slowly,  and  the  quantity  should  not 
exceed  three  ounces  and  of  a  temperature  not  exceeding  100 
degrees  Fahr.,  and  the  patient  must  be  kept  quiet. 

Q.    What  syringe  can  be  used  for  these  small  enemas? 
A  hard  rubber  syringe  holding  the  exact  quantity. 
Q.    What  may  be  attached  to  this  if  the  fluid  should  be 
thrown  up  high? 

A  flexible  rubber  tube,  which  may  be  inserted  six  or 
seven  inches. 

Q.    Why  are  high-up  enemas  often  preferred? 

Because  they  can  be  given  oftener  and  retained  longer. 
Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken? 

Not  to  let  air  come  in  at  the  time  of  administration  of 
an  enema. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  is  an  enema  of  Clearwater  or  medi- 
cated sometimes  given? 

To  wash  out  rectum  and  intestine  when  irritated. 
Q.    What  are  suppositories? 

A  solid  body  for  introduction  into  the  rectum,  answer- 
ing to  some  extent  the  same  purpose  as  an  enema. 
Q.    What  size  and  form  are  they? 

They  vary  in  size,  and,  while  they  are  firm  enough  to 
retain  their  shape  under  ordinary  condition,  they  are  suffi- 
ciently soft  enough  to  melt  under  the  heat  of  the  body. 
Q.     What  advantage  have  they? 

They  can  be  applied  easier,  and  being  small  are  easily 
retained. 


74  The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    How  should  a  suppository  be  introduced? 

The  suppository,  having  first  been  oiled,  should  be  in- 
troduced very  gradually  and  gently  into  the  rectum,  the 
patient  lying  on  the  left  side  as  for  an  enema. 

Q.   How  high  up  should  the  suppository  be  introduced? 
About  three  inches,  in  order  to  avoid  the  danger  of 
immediate  expulsion. 

Q.    What  suppositories  are  now  frequently  used? 

Glycerine  suppositories. 
Q.    What  must  be  removed  before  the  glycerine  supposi- 
tories are  inserted? 

The  glass  tubes  in  which  they  are  preserved,  and  it  is 
not  necessary  to  oil  them. 

Q.    In  what  space  of  time  do  they  generally  produce  an 
effect? 

In  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes  they  produce  an  action 
from  the  bowels. 

Bedpans. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  in  case  the  use  of  a  bedpan  is  re- 
quired? 

Bend  the  knees  and  introduce  it  from  the  side  of  the 
bed,  and,  if  necessary,  the  point  may  be  covered  with  a  soft 
cloth  to  absorb  moisture. 

Q.    How  can  they  be  warmed? 

By^dipping  them  into  warm  water  for  a  moment,  then 
drying  them  carefully. 

Q.    How  can  the  difficulty  of  using  the  bedpan,  which  is 
often  felt,  be  overcome? 

By  placing  the  patient,  if  the  case  allows  it.  as  much 
in  a  sitting  position  as  possible,  the  back  and  shoulders  firmly 
supported,  keep  the  knees  bent,  and  give  the  feet  something 
to  push  against. 

Q.    What  may  be  used  to  remove  the  weight  of  the  bed- 
clothes? 

A  cradle. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  75 

Q.    What  can  be  done  if  there  is  no  regular  fixture  at 
hand? 

Cut  a  barrel  hoop  into  two  half  circles,  cross  the  two 
pieces  at  right  angles  with  each  other  and  tie  them  firmly  to- 
gether. 

Q.    How  is  the  cradle  applied? 

It  is  placed  over  the  patient's  body  and  the  bedclothes 
laid  over  it. 

Q.    For  what  are  cushions  and  pads  used? 

Various  cushions  and  pads,   which  can   be  changed 
about  from  spot  to  spot  as  any  part  needs  a  support,   are 
sometimes  indispensible  in  nursing. 
Q.    Of  what  should  they  be  made? 

One  or  more  should  be  made  of  hair,  because  they  are 
cooler  and  firmer  than  feathers. 

Q.    With  what  must  they  be  covered? 
With  washable  goods. 

Medicine. 

Q.    How  may  medicines  be  introduced  into  the  system? 

Through  the  mouth  or  skin,  or  mucous  membrane. 
Q.    How  many  ways  are  there  for  introducing  medicine 
through  the  skin? 

Three  different  ways:  in  the  first,  the  medicine  is 
simply  placed  in  contact  with  the  skin,  to  be  absorbed:  in  the 
second,  rubbing  or  heat  is  applied  to  hasten  the  absorbtion;  in 
the  third,  the  skin  is  removed  by  blistering  and  the  medica- 
ment sprinkled  over  the  raw  surface. 
Q.    Is  the  latter  way  used  often? 

No;  it  is  uncertain  and  painful. 
Q.    How  are  medicines  introduced  under  the  skin? 

By  hypodermic  injections. 
Q.    Who  has  to  give  these  injections  frequently? 

The  nursing  sister  and  she  must  be  thoroughly  fa- 
miliar with  the  process. 


76  The  .Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  must  be  observed? 

Several  precautions.  First  see  that  the  syringe  is  in 
good  working  order,  does  not  leak,  and  then  that  the  needle 
is  sharp  and  unobstructed. 

Q.    How  must  the  patient  be  prepared  before  this  injec- 
tion is  made'? 

The  surface  where  the  injection  is  to  be  made,  must 
be  washed  with  soap  and  water,  then  with  alcohol. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  in  order  to  make  sure  that  the 
■syringe  is  clean? 

Fill  the  syringe  with  sterilized  water,  adjust  the 
needle  and  let  the  water  pass  through  the  needle,  then  unscrew 
the  needle,  fill  the  syringe  about  one-half  full  of  alcohol  and 
adjust  the  needle  again,  let  the  alcohol  then  pass  through 
the  needle. 

Q.    How  is  the  medicine  prepared  for  the  injection? 

If  it  is  not  already  prepared  in  a  solution,  then  take 
the  tablet  or  powder,  put  it  in  a  clean  spoon  or  glass  and  add 
about  three-fourths  syringe-fulls  of  sterilized  water  and  dis- 
solve the  medicine. 

Q.    What  may  hasten  its  dissolving? 

By  applying  heat,  by  holding  the  spoon  over  a  light. 
Q.    How  is  the  fluid  then  put  in  the  syringe? 

After  the  needle  is  screwed  off  from  the  syringe,  the 
fluid  is  drawn  up  into  the  syringe,  then  the  needle  adjusted. 
Q.    Wh  it  must  be  done  before  the  injection  is  given? 

Hold  the  instrument  with  the  needle  upwards  and 
force  out  any  bubbles  of  air  that  may  remain  in  it. 
Q.    How  is  the  injection  given? 

Pinch  up  a  loose  fold  of  flesh,  between  the  thumb  and 
finger  insert  the  needle  quickly  to  the  extent  of  an  inch 
deeply  down  among  the  muscles,  withdraw  it  slightly,  then 
inject  slowly  the  contents  of  the  syringe. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  after  the  needle  is  removed? 

The  finger  must  be  kept  on  the  point  of  insertion  for 
a  moment,  to  prevent  the  escape  of  fluid. 


The  Nursing  S.ster.  77 


Q.    What  will  hasten  the  ahsorbtion? 

Gentle  rubbing. 
Q.    How  must  the  needle  be  cleaned? 

After  using,  clean  the  needle  just  as  before  using,  by 
first  pumping  sterilized  water  and  lastly  alcohol  through  it, 
then  wipe  the  needle  and  syringe  dry  and  replace  the  wire  in 
the  needle  at  once. 

Q.    What  does  the  passing  of  alcohol  through  the  needle 
prevent? 

Rusting  of  the  needle. 
Q.    For  what  purpose  are  hypodermic  injections  given? 
Either  to  relieve  pain,  or  induce  sleep  and  whenever  a 
speedy  action  of  a  drug  is  important. 

Q,   How  do  remedies  introduced  this  way  act? 

They  act  more  powerfully  and  more  rapidly  than  any 
other  way. 

Q.    When  is  this  injection  but  slightly  painful? 

If  is  skillfully  performed. 
Q.    How  can  irritating  fluids  such  as  ether,  brandy  or 
camphorated  oil  be  injected  safely? 

By  using  a  clean  aseptic  needle  and  giving  the  injec- 
tion deep  in  the  muscles. 

Q.    When  are  such  injections  frequently  necessary? 

In  a  collapse  (a  sinking  spell),  after  an  operation. 
Q.    What  injection  is  said  to  be  the  least  liable  to  form 
an  abcess? 

Morphine. 
Q.    To  what  are  abcesses  due  in  most  cases? 

Either   to  carelessness  in  injecting,   to  the  use  of  a 
syringe  not  thoroughly  clean,  or  to  an  impure  solution. 
Q.    Are  abcesses  avoidable  in  all  cases? 

No;  in  cases  from  a  lowered  condition  of  the  system, 
which  predisposes  to  inflammation  upon  slight  irritation  they 
are  inavoidable. 

Q.    Which  solutions  are  less  irritating? 

A  diluted  solution  is  less  irritating  than  a  concen- 
trated one. 


78  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  will,  however,  remain  in  some  cases'? 

Painful  spots  for  several  days. 
Q.    How  can  they  be  relieved? 

By  bathing  with  alcohol  or  applying  an  ice-bag. 
Q.    Where  should  the  injection  be  given? 

Into  the  outer  side  of  arm  or  thigh. 
Q.    What  places  must  be  especially  avoided? 

Bony  prominences  and  inflamed  parts,  and  caution 
must  be  observed  against  puncturing  a  vein. 

Q.    What  has  sometimes  been  the  result  from  the  intro- 
duction of  morphine  into  a  vein? 
Death. 
Q.    In  what  condition  must  the  medicine  be,  that  is  to  be 
injected? 

Perfectly  dissolved  and  free  from  the  slightest  im- 
purity. 

Q.    What  is  often  added  to  the  morphine  which  is  to  be 
injected? 

A  little  atropia,  one  hundred  and  fifteenth  of  a  grain 
to  one  fourth  of  a  grain  of  morphine. 
Q.    For  what  purpose? 

Because  it  prevents  nausea  and  lessens  the  danger  of 
poisoning. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  given  to  hysterical  patients? 

An  injection  of  water. 
Q.    What  is  the  most  common  way  of  introducing  medi- 
cine into  the  body? 

Through  the  mucous  membrane,  generally  the  stom- 
ach. 

Q.    In  what  form  are  medicines  brought  into  the  stomach? 
In  various  forms  of  pills,  powders,  tablets  and  solu- 
tions. 

Q.  .How  is  the  trouble  of  swallowing  pills  often  over- 
come? 

By  enveloping  it  in  bread  or  jelly. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  79 


Q.    What  can  be  done  if  the  patient  cannot  swallow  them 
in  this  way? 

It  can  be  pounded  up  and  given  like  powder  in  water, 
wafers,  milk  or  syrup. 

Q.    How  shouid  powders  be  given  which  are  insoluble  in 
water,  such  as  bismuth  or  calomel? 

They  may  be  placed  dry  on  the  tongue,   and  a  drink 
of  water  to  wash  them  down. 

Q.    How  are  powders  given  which  have  an  objectionable 
taste? 

Either  in  capsules  or  wafers. 
Q.    What  is  an  emulsion? 

A  mixture  of  oil  and  water,   made  by  rubbing  with 
gum. 

Q.    WThat  is  a  saturated  solution? 

It  is  a  solution  that  contains  of  any  substance  all  that 
can  be  dissolved  in  it. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  before  any  medicine  is  given? 

(1)  Carefully  read  the  label    before  measuring  the 
dose  and  again  afterwards. 

(2)  In  pouring  keep  the  label  on  the  upper  side,  to 
avoid  defacing  it. 

(3)  Always  shake  the  bottle  before  opening  it;  this 
is  often  important  and  always  harmless. 

(■A)    Never  leave  the  bottle    longer  uncorked    than 
necessary. 

Q.    Where  should  medicines  be  kept? 

In  a  dry,  cool  and  dark  closet. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  dampness  impairs  the  activity  of  most  drugs, 
and  many  are  decomposed  by  light  or  heat. 

Q.    What  is  especially  important  in  a  hospital   ward  re- 
garding medicine? 

Never  to  leave  dangerous  drugs  within  reach  of  a  pa- 
tient. 


80  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    In  what  does  the  responsibility  of  a  nurse  consist  in 
giving  medicine? 

In  giving  promptly,  accurately  and  intelligently,  what 
the  doctor  has  prescribed. 

Q.    In  what  cases  may  a  sister  assume  anything  beyond 
this? 

Only  in  cases  of  unusual  emergency,   and  where  med- 
ical advice  is  unattainable. 

Q.'  What  besides  this  should  a  sister  try  to  learn  about 
medicine? 

To  know  the  effects  which  the  medicines  she  gives  are 
intended  to  produce. 

Q.    Is  it  advisable  to  let  the  patient  always  know  what 
he  is  taking? 
No. 
Q.    What  is  a  sister  never  allowed  to  think  about  the 
time  of  giving  medicine? 

That  half  an  hour  more  or  less  will  make  no  differ- 
ence, or  that  if  by  accident  the  dose  should  be  omitted  one 
hour,  the  error  could  be  rectified  by  doubling  it  next  time. 
Q.    How  long  should  the  time  be  between  medicine  and 


food? 

If  no  special  orders  are  given,  one  half  hour. 
Q.    How  do  most  drugs  act  on  an  empty  stomach? 

Too   powerfully,   and  some  are  too  irritating  to  be 
borne. 

Q.    What  medicines  are  always  given  after  eating? 

Arsenic,  iron  and  cod  liver  oil. 
Q.   How  is  iron  taken? 

Through  a  glass  tube  or  straw,  in  order  to  prevent  in- 
juring the  teeth.    If  this  is  not  done  the  teeth  should  be 
brushed  immediately  after  taking  it. 
Q.    How  can  cod  liver  oil  be  given? 

In  brandy,  strong  hot  coffee,  lemon  juice  or  froth  of 
beer. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  81 

Q.    How  should  the  close  be  poured  in  the  glass,  spoon  or 

cup? 

In  the  center,  so  it  will  nowhere  touch  the  glass,  cup 

or  spoon,  and  can  be  swallowed  easily. 

Q.    How    can    medicine  be  given    if    ordered  in  minim 

doses'? 

If  it  is  to  be  given  in    short  intervals,   then   ten  to 

twelve  drops  may  be  dropped  into  a  glass  and  the  same  num- 
ber of  teaspoons  of  water  added  to  it. 
Q.    What  will  this  avoid? 

Giving  an  overdose. 
Q.    In  what  case  must  the  dose  be  prepared  just  when  it 
is  to  be  given? 

When  the  medicine  is  volatile  or  evaporating. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  necessary  if  the  patient  is  a  child 
or  delirious? 

To  give  medicine  by  force. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

By  compressing  the  nostrils,  so  that  the  mouth  will 
have  to  be  opened  for  breathing. 

Q.    How  is  the  medicine  then  given? 

The  medicine  can  be  carried  by  a  spoon  far  back  in 
the  mouth  and  emptied  slowly  down  the  throat. 
Q.    In  what  case  should  force  be  used? 

If  all  other  means  fail. 
Q.    For  what  reason,  only  if  all  other  means  fail? 

Because  the  excitement  which  it  always  occasions,  is 
injurious  to  the  patient. 

Leeches. 
Q.    When  are  leeches  applied? 

Leeches  are  commonly  applied  when  it  is  desired  to 
take  a  small  quantity  of  blood  from  any  place  of  the  body. 
Q.    Where  should  they  be  applied? 

Xever  over  a  large  blood  vessel,  but  over  a  bony  sur- 
face upon  which  pressure  can  be  made  in  case  of  excessive 

hemmorrhage. 
—6 


82  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  before  the  leeches  are  applied? 
The  part  to  which  they  are  to  be  applied  must  be  per- 
fectly clean,  first  washed  with  soap  and  water,  and  again  with 
pure  water. 

Q.    How  should  the  leech  itself  be? 

Clean,  and  therefore  to  be  washed  and  dried  in  the 
folds  of  a  towel,  before  it  is  applied,  but  never  handled. 
Q.    What  will  prevent  the  leech  to  bite? 

Strong  odors  in  the  room,  such  as  sulphur,  vinegar  or 
tobacco.  Sometimes  they  even  refuse  to  bite  when  the  pa- 
tient has  taken  certain  drugs  internally. 

Q.    How  can  a  leech  be  induced  to  take  hold,  if  he  delays? 
By  making  a  slight  scratch,  or  pricking  your  finger 
and  putting  a  drop  of  blood  on  the  place,  just  sufficient  to 
give  the  taste  of  blood. 

Q.    How  much  blood  will  a  leech  take? 

About  one  teaspoonful. 
Q.    In  what  case  should  the  leech  be  held  in  place  with  a 
test  tube  or  leech  glass? 

If  applied  near  the  eye  or  mouth. 
Q.    What  can  be  done  if  the  leech  is  applied  inside  the 
nostrils  or  mouth? 

A  thread  may  be  put  through  its  tail.  This  will  not 
interfere  with  their  working,  and  will  keep  them  from  being 
swallowed. 

Q.    How  can  a  leech  be  rendered  harmless,   if  by  accident 
it  would  be  swallowed? 

By  drinking  salt  water  freely. 
Q.    How  should  a  leech  be  taken  off? 

It  should  never  be  pulled  off;  if  it  does  not  drop  off 
when  it  has  taken  sufficient  blood  a  little  salt  may  be  sprinkled 
over  it. 

Q.    What  may  result  if  they  are  removed  by  force? 

The  teeth  of  the  leech  will  be  left  in  the  wound, 
where  they  may  occasion  an  abscess  or  inflammation. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  83 

Q.    How  can  the  flow  of  blood  be  increased? 

By  applying  hot  fomentations  or  poultices,  but  the 
poultice  must  never  be  left  on  longer  than  a  few  minutes 
without  examining  it.    There  may  be  too  free  bleeding. 
Q.    How  can  the  bleeding  be  checker!? 

By  making  a  compress  of  folded  squares  of  linen,  one 
on  top  of  the  other,  or  roll  up  firmly  some  scraped  lint  and 
press  it  over  the  bites  for  a  moment,  holding  it  in  place  with 
the  finger  or  strips  of  plaster,  or  a  bandage;  ice  can  also  be 
applied. 

Q.    What  can  be  done  if  the  blood  still  continues  to  flow? 
A  little  burnt  alum  can  be  sprinkled  into  the  bites  or 
they  may  be  touched  with  caustic  (nitrite  of  silver)  or  the 
doctor  should  be  sent  for. 

Q.    How  long  must  a  patient   be  watched  closely  after 
leeches  have  been  applied? 

Until  all  bleeding  has  ceased,  especially  at  night. 

Cupping. 

Q.    What  are  cups  applied  for? 

To  relieve  congestion,  to  abstract  blood  or  prevent 
active  absorption. 

Q.    How  many  kinds  of  cupping  are  there? 

Two  kinds:  dry  and  wet  cupping. 
Q.    What  kind  is  mostly  practiced  for  the  relief  of  pain? 

Dry  cupping. 
Q.    What  articles  are  needed  for  cupping? 

Cupping  glasses,  spirit  lamp,  a  saucer  with  alcohol,  a 
wire  with  a  bit  of  sponge  or  a  wad  of  lint  on  the  end,  warm 
and  cold  water,  carbolic  acid,  towels,  a  snapper  and  gauze. 
Q.    Where  should  the  burning  lamp  stand? 

Between  tne  patient  and  the  alcohol. 
Q.    Where  should  the  cups  be  placed? 

In  a  bowl  containing  warm  carbolized  water. 
Q.    How  are  they  applied? 

First  wash  the  surface  to  which  they  should  be  ap- 
plied, with  soap  and  water,  dry  it  by  rubbing  it  with  a  rough 


84  The  Nursing  Sister. 

towel.    Dip  the  sponge  in  the  alcohol,  light  it  at  the  lamp- 

and  let  it  burn  for  an  instant  in  the  glass,  then  withdraw  it, 

at  the  same  time  placing  the  cup  over  the  afflicted  part. 

Q.    For  what  reason  is  the  flame  held  in  the  glass? 

The  heat  will  rarefy  the  air  in  it,  and  as  it  condenses 

on  cooling  a  space  will  be  left,  to  fill,  in  which  the  skin  will 

be  forcibly  sucked  up  and  the  blood  drawn  toward  the  surface. 

Q.    How  long  are  the  cups  left  on  in  dry  cupping? 

From  five  to  thirty  minutes. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  advisable? 

That  instead  of,  as  usual,  allowing  a  cup  to  remain 

stationary,  it  be  slid  back  and  forth  along  the  surface. 

Q.    What  can  be  avoided  by  this? 

The  forming  of  circles  and  a  large  tract  can  be  treated 

with  one  or  two  cups. 

Q.    Where  should  a  cup  never  be  applied? 

Over  a  bony  or  irregular  surface. 

Q.    What  must  be  avoided  above  all  things? 

Burning  the  patient  by  using  the  alcohol  too  freely,  so 

that  it  drips,  or  by  getting  the  edges  of  the  glass  too  hot. 

Q.    How  can  the  cup  be  removed? 

By  making  pressure  with  the  finger  close  to  it,  so  that 

the  air  will  be  admitted. 

Q.    What  is  done  in  wet  cupping  after  the  cup  is  removed? 

The  snapper  is  applied,  making  a  series  of  slight  cuts. 

Q.    What  is  applied  then  again? 

The  cupping  cup,  in  the  same  place  and  in  the  same 

way  as  before. 

Q.    How  can  the  hemorrhage  be  stopped  after  sufficient 

blood  is  extracted? 

By  pads  of  lint. 

Q.    What  is  needed  on  the  wound? 

A  dry  dressing  or  some  simple  ointment  or  oil. 

Q.    Where  is  wet  cupping  frequently  applied? 

In  the  lumbar  region,  to  relieve  inflammation  of  the 
kidneys. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  85 

Poultices. 

Q.    What  are  poultices? 

A  gelatinous  mass  spread  on  a  cloth. 
Q.    For  what  purpose  are  they  commonly  used? 

For  a  convenient  means  of  applying  warmth  and 
moisture. 

Q.    What  will  they  often  check  if  applied  early? 

The  progress  of  inflammation  and  prevent  the  forma- 
tion of  pus,  and  when  suppuration  has  set  in,  they  facilitate 
the  passage  of  matter  to  the  surface  and  limit  the  spread  of 
inflammation. 

Q.    For  what  other  purpose  are  they  applied? 

For  the  relief  of  deep-seated  pain. 
Q.    How  large  should  a  poultice  be? 

If  applied  for  the  relief  of  internal  organs  or  to  hasten 
maturation,  it  ought  to  be  large  enough  to  extend  over  a  con- 
siderable surrounding  surface,  but  over  a  discharging  wound 
it  should  be  but  little  larger  than  the  opening. 

Q.    On  what  should  a  poultice  be  spread  and  how  large 
should  it  be? 

It  should  be  spread  on  a  stout  piece  of  cotton,  one-half 
to  one  inch  thick,  and  not  to  be  patted  down  into  a  hard  pud- 
ding. 

Q.    What  must  be  observed  about  the  edges? 

They  must  be  as  thick  as  the  middle,  or  else  they  will 
dry  rapidly  and  are  painful. 

Q.    With  what  should  the  surface  be  covered? 

With  thin  gauze  or  muslin,  so  that  it  will  not  stick  to 
the  surface,  and  all  can  be  removed  at  the  same  time. 

Q.    What  must  be  avoided  when  it  is  applied  to  the  chest? 

Covering  the  nipples 
Q.    How  large  should  the  cloth  be  on  which  it  is  spread 
out? 

Large  enough  to  double  up  all  around  the  four  sides 
■over  the  edges  to  prevent  the  mass  from  coming  out. 


86  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  should  the  poultice  be  applied? 

Have  everything  read}',  the  patient's  clothes  unfas- 
tened  before  you  bring  the  poultice  to  the  bed.      Apply  it  im- 
mediately as  warm  as  it  can  be  borne. 
Q.    With  what  should  it  be  covered? 

With  oil-silk,  oil-muslin  or  rubber  sheeting,  and  then 
flannel. 

Q.    How  should  it  be  kept? 

Fastened  to  the  place  which  it  is  intended  to  cover, 
and  renewed  before  it  is  cold. 

Q.    How  often  should  a  poultice  be  changed? 

This  depends  upon  the  thickness.      An  ordinary  sized 
poultice  will  keep  warm  from  two  to  three  hours. 
Q.    When  is  its  purpose  defeated? 

When  it  becomes  a  stiff,  cold  paste,  or  if  it  is  allowed 
to  slip  about  in  an  unsteady  way. 

Q.    What  is  used  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  spread  oil 
over  the  surface? 
Vaseline. 
Q.    What  should  never  be  used  in  making  a  poultice? 
Milk,   because  it  becomes  sour  quickly  and  is  of  no 
value  in  itself. 

Q.    Of  what  are  poultices  made? 

They  are  made  of  various  materials. 
Q.    What  makes  a  good  simple  poultice? 

Several  thicknesses  of  lint  or  soft  cloth,  wrung  out  in 
hot  water  and  covered  with  a  large  piece  of  thin  rubber  sheet- 
ing. 

Q.    What  is  a  convenient  but  expensive  substitute  for 
this? 

Spogio-piline:  this  holds  the  heat  very  long. 
Q.    What  is  generally  used  for  making  a  poultice? 

Linseed  meal. 
Q.    How  can  you  make  a  linseed  poultice? 

Bring  a  sauce  pan  of  water  to  the  boiling  point,  and 
without  removing  it  from  the  fire,   stir  into  it  the  linseed 


The  Nursing  Sister.  87 

little  by  little,  until  it  has  the  proper  consistency,  just  thick 
enough  to  cut  with  a  knife.  It  must  be  smooth  and  free  from 
lumps. 

Q.    How  large  can  the  cloth  be? 

Twice  the  size  of  the  intended  poultice;  it  is  then 
spread  on  one  half  and  the  remainder  folded  back  as  a  cover. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  omitted  entirely? 

A  cover,  and  the  poultice  is  applied  directly  over  the 
skin,  but  portions  of  it  are  likely  to  adhere,  so  it  becomes  diffi- 
cult to  remove  it  neatly. 

Q.    What  will  help  to  keep  the  poultice  soft? 

A  little  oil  will  keep  it  soft  and  make  it  less  likely  to 
stick. 

Q.    What  will  help  to  retain  the  heat? 

A  layer  of  cotton  or  wool. 
Q.    In  what  case  will  this  be  found  a  valuable  addition? 
When  the  weight  of  a  poultice  is  painful  and  in  con- 
sequence thereof  must  be  made  thin. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  used  for  the  poultice? 
A  flannel  bag,  long  and  free  to  fold  over. 
Q.    Which  is  the  best  way  to  apply  a  large  poultice  for  the 
relief  of  internal  organs? 

One  or'two  turns  of  a  flannel  bandage  about  the  part, 
and  then  apply  the  poultice  in  such  a  bag  and  then  confine  it 
to  the  place  with  the  rest  of  the  bandage.  Arranged  in  this 
way  it  will  keep  hot  a  long  time. 

Q.    What  should  always  be  used  to  carry  the  poultice  to 
the  patient? 

A  small  buard  or  tray. 
Q.    What  else  should  be  kept  ready? 

A  basin  to  carry  the  old  one  away. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  if  a  new  poultice  is  to  be  applied 
overs&  wound? 

The  old  poultice  being  removed,  the  wound  must  be 
washed  and  protected  by  a  piece  of  thin  muslin  or  gauze  wet 


88  The  Nursing  Sister. 

in  some  disinfecting  solution  before  the  fresh  one  is  made  and 
applied. 

Q.    What  other  kind  of    poultices    are  sometimes    pre- 
scribed? 

A  jacket  poultice  to  envelope  the  entire  chest. 
Q.    How  is  this  made? 

Of  two  pieces  of  muslin  or  other  goods  front  and  back, 
with  strings  to  tie  over  the  shoulders  and  under  the  arms. 
Q.    How  must  the  edges  be? 

Sewed  firmly,  to  keep  the  poultice  from  escaping. 
Q.    In  what  respect  do  bread  poultices  differ  from  linseed 
poultices? 

They  are  lighter  and  more  bland,  but  cool  quickly  and 
hold  less  moisture. 

Q.    How  are  they  likely  to  become? 

ISTot  having  the  tenacious  quality  of  linseed,   they 
crumble  easily  and  become  hard  and  dry. 
Q,    How  can  a  bread  poultice  be  made? 

Put  a  half  a  pint  of  boiling  water  over  a  sufficient 

quantity  of  bread  crumbs,  stir  until  a  soft  mass  is  obtained, 

spread  about  half  an  inch  thick  over  a  large  cloth  and  apply. 

Q.    What  may  be  added  if  the  pain  to  be  relieved  is  great? 

Half  an  ounce  of  laudanum  (tincture  of  opium). 
Q.    How  can  a  slippery-elm  poultice  be  made? 

The  same  as  a  linseed  poultice,  using  ground  slip- 
pery-elm. 

Q.    How  can  a  charcoal  poultice  be  made? 

Soak  twc  ounces  of  bread  crumbs  in  a  half  pint  of 
boiling  water;  add  slowly  a  wine  glass  of  linseed,  and  when 
well  mixed,  stir  in  two  tablespoons  of  powdered  charcoal,  mix 
it  thoroughly  and  spread  on  a  cloth.  Over  the  surface  of  the 
poultice  lastly  sprinkle  more  charcoal. 

Q.    Why  is  bread  used  for  a  charcoal  poultice? 

Because  it  is  more  porous  and  forms  a  better  basis. 
Q.    What  does  this  poultice  require? 
Frequent  renewal. 


The  Nursing  Sister.       ■  89 

Q.    What  is  this  poultice  used  for? 

For  putrid  sores;  it  absorbs  the  bad  odor  and  promotes 
a  healthy  condition,  but  is  always  a  dirty  application. 
Q.    How  can  a  bread  and  suet  poultice  be  made? 

By  mixing  equal  parts  of  bread  crumbs  and  mutton 
suet  in  hot  water  over  the  fire  until  they  are  thoroughly 
mixed. 

Q.    For  what  case  is  this  poultice  used? 

It  is  an  excellent  healing  poultice  when  the  surface  of 
the  skin  is  broken. 

Q.    What  makes  a  gentle  stimulating  poultice? 

A  yeast  poultice. 
Q.    For  what  purpose  is  it  mainly  used? 

To  hasten  the  separation  of  gangrenous  slough. 
Q.    How  can  a  yeast  poultice  be  made? 

Mix  a  pound  of  ground  linseed  or  oatmeal  in  a  half  a 
pint  of  yeast;  stir  gently  over  the  fire,  when  warmed,  spread 
on  a  cloth. 

Q.    In  what  other  way  can  a  yeast  poultice  be  made? 

Mix  six  ounces  of  yeast  with  the  same  quantity  of  wa- 
ter at  blood  heat;  stir  in  fourteen  ounces  of  wheat  flour  and 
let  it  stand  near  the  fire  until  it  rises;  apply  while  fermenting. 
Q.    What  else  will  answer  for  the  same  purpose? 

Dough  just  as  mixed  for  bread.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
wait  for  its  rises,  as  the  heat  of  the  body  will  cause  it  to  do  so. 
Put  a  sufficient  quantity  in  a  muslin  bag,  allowing  plenty  of 
room  for  it  to  rise. 

Q.    What  makes  a  very  mild  poultice? 

A  starch  poultice:  it  retains  the  heat  well. 
Q.    What  purpose  is  it  used  for? 

It  is  used  for  cancers  and  to  allay  the  irritation  of  the 
skin  diseases. 

Q.    How  can  a  starch  poultice  be  made? 

By  using  starch  prepared  as  for  laundry  use. 
Q.    What  poultices  are  thought  to  have  a  special  pleasing 
effect? 


90  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Scraped  carrots,  boiled  or  raw. 
Q.    What  poultices  are  sometimes  used  for  their  stimulat- 
ing purposes'? 

Onions  or  horseradish. 
Q.    How  can  a  hop  poultice  be  made? 

Fill  a  thin  bag  with  hops,  steep  a  while  in  hot  water, 
wring  out  and  apply. 

Q.    How  can  you  make  a  bran  poultice? 

The  same  way  as  a  hop  poultice. 
Q.    How  can  a  bran-jacket  be  made? 

Cut  a  loose  fitting  jacket  of  cotton  cloth  without 
seams  and  a  second  one  of  the  same  shape  for  a  lining,  sew 
them  together  at  the  edges,  leaving  a  small  opening  through 
which  the  bran  can  be  poured  in,  quilt  the  bran  here  and 
there  with  large  stitches  to  keep  it  in  place,  soak  in  boiling 
water,  press  it  on  a  tray  to  squeeze  out  the  excess  of  water. 
Q.    How  can  it  be  kept  in  place  after  putting  it  on? 

With  a  wide  roller  bandage  it  is  held  close  to  the 
body. 

Q.    What  advantage  has  this  poultice? 

It  can  be  wet  repeatedly. 
Q.    In  what  cases  is  it  sometimes  used? 

In  cases  of  pleurisy. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  added  to  a  simple  poultice? 

Laudanum  is  sprinkled  over  the  surface  for  the  relief 
of  pain. 

Q.    How  can  a  spice  poultice  be  made? 

By  mixing  ginger,  cinnamon,  cloves,  cayenne  pepper,  a 
teaspoonful  of  each,  with  half  an  ounce  or  more  of  cornmeal 
or  flour  and  brandy  enough  to  make  a  paste. 
Q.    What  other  form  is  used? 

Sew  the  spices  in  a  bag,  stitch  it  several  times  to  keep 
the  spices  in  place,  heat  the  poultice  by  means  of  dry  heat  and 
sprinkle  a  little  whisky  or  brandy  upon  it  and  apply. 
Q.    How  can  you  make  a  mustard  poultice? 

By  adding  to  a  simple  linseed  poultice  a  prescribed 


The  Nursing  Sister.  91 

proportion  of  mustard,  usually  from  one-eighth  to  one-fourth 
(measure). 

Q.    What  is  a  good  substitute  for  a  mustard  poultice*? 

Dipping  a  clean,  flat  sponge  into  a  mustard  paste, 
folded  in  a  compress  and  applied.  The  poultice  may  be  re- 
newed by  simply  moistening  the  sponge  with  warm  water,  its 
strength  being  perfectly  preserved. 

Q.    How  can  a  priessnitz  poultice  be  made? 

Take  a  rough  towel  or  compress,  folded  three  or  four 
times,  wring  it  out  in  cold  water  and  apply,  covering  it  with 
oiled  silk,  oiled  muslin  or  rubber  tissue. 

Counter  Irritants. 

Q.    What  is  the  general  rule  in  applying  counter-irritants? 
In   applying  counter-irritants  do  not  cover  a  larger 
surface  than  is  just  necessary,  and  do  not  make  them  thick 
like  a  poultice. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  are  counter-irritants  applied? 

For  relieving  inflammation  of  the  deeper  parts. 

Q.    How  many  kinds  of  counter-irritants  are  there? 

Three:  (1)  Such  as  produce  merely  local  warmth 
and  redness. 

(2)  Blistering  agents. 

(3)  Such  as  produce  a  pustular  eruption. 

Q.    Where  are  counter-irritants  generally  applied? 

Usually  over  or  near  the  seat  of  the  disorder. 
Q.    Where  are  they  sometimes  applied? 

At  a  remote  part,  for  instance,  a  mustard  poultice  on 
the  feet,  or  a  mustard  foot  bath  for  the  relief  of  the  head. 

Q.    What  is  one  of  the  most  commonly  used  counter- 
irritants? 

A  mustard  plaster  or  draft. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  made? 

Take  one  part  of  powdered  mustard  and  from  two  to 
four  times  the  quantity  of  flour,   according  to   the  desired 


92  The  Nursing  Sister. 

strength,  mix  into  a  paste  with  tepid  or  hot  water,  and  spread 
evenly  between  two  pieces  or  muslin. 

Q.    How  long  is  the  mustard  plaster  usually  applied"? 

From  twenty  minutes  to  one-half  an  hour. 
Q.    Should  a  mustard  plaster  be  left  on  long  enough  to 
blister? 

No. 
Q.    Why  not? 

Because  the  sore  that  is  produced  by  this  is  painful 
and  slow  to  heal. 

Q.    In  what  case  must  its  action  be  watched  carefully? 
If  the  patient  is  insensible  or  delirious,   for  if  ne- 
glected it  may  cause  deep  ulceration. 

Q.    What  is  advisable  to  use  for  mixing,  when  the  plaster 
is  made  for  a  child? 

One-third  of  glycerine  instead  of  pure  water. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

This  will  render  the  action  less  severe  and  it  can  stay 
on  longer. 

Q.    How  can  it  be  kept  in  place? 

With  a  bandage. 
Q.    How  can  the  burning  sensation  which  follows  a  mus- 
tard plaster  be  relieved? 

If  it  is  extreme,   it  can  be  relieved  by  dusting  the 
parts  with  flour  or  fine  starch,   or   dressing  it  with  vaseline 
and  covering  it  with  cotton  to  exclude  the  air. 
Q.    How  is  a  cayenne  pepper  plaster  made? 

By  mixing  a  desertspoonful  of  cayenne  pepper  in  a 
thin  paste  of  flour  and  water  and  spread  like  a  mustard  plas- 
ter. 

Q.    In  what  other  way  is  red  pepper  sometimes  applied? 
A  quantity  of  red  pepper  is  stitched  in  a  flat  bag  of 
flannel,  wrung  out  in  warm  water,   and  applied  over  seat  of 
pain. 

Q.    What  mustard  plasters  are  the  most  neat  and  quickly 
ready  for  use? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  93 

The  mustard  papers  which  are  bought  in  the  drug- 
store and  ready  for  use  by  simply  dipping  them  in  tepid 
water. 

Q.    What  is  generally  used  to  produce  blistering? 

Canthos  or  fly  plaster. 
Q.    Where  should  this  plaster  never  be  applied? 

Where  the  skin  is  broken,  scratched  or  tender. 
Q;    How  should  the  plaster  be  applied? 

The  part  should  be  first  washed,  rubbed  drp,  and,  if 
necessary,  shaved? 

Q.    How  is  the  plaster  kept  in  place? 

Either  with  adhesive  strips  or  a  bandage. 
Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  if  adhesive  strips  are  used? 
That  they  are  not  stretched  tight  over  the  canthos, 
or  they  will  become  painful  as  the  blister  raises. 

Q.    How  much  time  is  required  for  the  blister  to  raise? 
The  time  varies  with  different  persons;  for  this  rea- 
son examine  it  in  three  hours;  it  may  take  even  four  to  eight 
hours. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  in  case  the  blister  does  not  rise 
within  twelve  hours? 

Remove  the  plaster  and  apply  a  poultice. 
Q.    How  should  the  plaster  be  removed? 
Carefully,  so  as  not  to  tear  the  skin. 
Q.    What  is  to  be  done  after  the  plaster  is  removed? 

All  adherent  particles  are  cleaned  off  with  a  little  oil 
or  alcohol,  and  the  puffed  skin  is  snipped  in  at  several  places 
with  sharp-pointed  scissors,  and  the  fluid  will  run  out. 

Q.    What  should  be  used  for  the  absorption  of  the  fluid? 

Some  absorbent  cotton  or  gauze. 
Q.    With  what  is  the  raw  surface  dressed? 

With  vaseline,  oxide  of  zinc  or  the  ointment  which 
has  been  ordered  by  the  doctor. 
Q.    How  often  is  this  changed? 

Twice  a  day. 
Q.    What  is  convenient  for  blistering  an  uneven  surface? 


94  .  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Cantharial  collodion,  as  it  cannot  get  out  of  place.' 
Q.    How  is  it  applied'? 

One  or  two  coats  are  applied  with  a  earners  hair 
brush,  and  if  covered  with  oil-silk  or  rubber  tissue,  it  works 
more  quickly. 

Q.    What  besides  this  is  frequently  applied  with  a  camel's 
hair  brush? 

Tincture  of  Iodine. 
Q.    What  is  iodine  applied  for? 

Either  for  blistering  or  irritating  the  skin. 
Q.    What  is  often  applied  over  the  iodine  if  used  for  the 
purpose  of  irritating? 

Glycerine  and  cotton. 
Q.    What  is  used  to  draw  blisters  quickly? 

Strong  ammonia  or  chloroform. 
Q.    How  is  it  applied? 

A  piece  of  lint  or  cotton  saturated  with  irritant  is 
placed  upon  the  skin. 

Q.    How  can  evaporation  be  prevented? 

By  covering  it  tightly  with  a  watch-glass  or  the  cover 
of  a  pill  box. 

Q.   How  soon  will  the  blister  be  raised? 

In  rive  to  ten  minutes. 
Q.    What  will  this  method  always  cause  in  the  patient? 
Pain,  for  the  ammonia,  if  left  too  long,   will  eat  into 
the  flesh. 

Q.    How  long  should  the  canthos  plaster  be  left  on  for  a 
child? 

iSTot  more  than  two  or  four  hours. 
Q.     When  shall  it  be  removed? 

As  soon  as  the  skin  is  well  reddened;  then  a  bread 
poultice  is  applied  to  raise  the  blister. 
Q.    For  what  purpose? 

The  danger  with  so  tender  a  skin  is  that  the  true 
skin  underneath  be  destroyed  if  the  plaster  remains  long 
enough  to  puff  up  the  surface. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  95 

Q.    How  can  the  dressing  which  is  to  be  applied  after  the 
blistering  be  kept  in  place? 

With  a  bandage  or  strips  of  adhesive  plaster. 
Q.    In  what  cases  should  blisters  be  seldom  used? 

In  cases  of  aged  persons  or  those  whose  circulation  is 
poor,  as  they  may  cause  extensive  sores,  which  are  slow  in 
healing. 

Q.     How  is  croton  oil  applied? 

Kub  the  surface  to  which  the  oil  is  to  be  applied  with 
a  piece  of  flannel;  take  two  or  three  or  more  drops  of  the  oil 
on  a  cloth  and  rub  it  into  the  surface,  or  apply  with  a  feather. 
Q.    How  often  is  this  repeated? 

At  intervals  of  from  four  to  six  hours  until  small 
pimples  appear  on  the  spot. 

Q.    What  must  not  be  used  after  this? 

No  oils,  nor  should  the  burning  be  soothed,  for  irrita- 
tion is  wanted;  a  soft  cloth  can  be  tied  over  it  to  prevent  the 
clothes  from  rubbing  the  surface. 

Lotions. 
Q.    If  a  lotion  is  applied  for  the  relieving  of  pain  how  can 
it  be  used? 

Take  a  piece  of  a  sheet  or  several  folds  of  old  linen, 
such  as  old  towels  or  table  cloths,  dip  in  the  lotion  and  lay  it 
over  the  affected  part,  covering  it  with  oil  silk  or  rubber  cloth 
and  holding  it  in  place  with  a  bandage. 
Q.     How  can  the  lint  be  re-wetted? 

By  squeezing  a  little  of  the  lotion  over  it  without 
removing  it. 

Q.    What  are  evaporating  lotions? 
Vinegar,  camphor,  alcohol,  etc. 
Q.    What  are  they  generally  mixed  with  and  how  are  they 
applied? 

They  are  mixed  with  twice  the  quantity  of  ice  water 
and  applied  on  a  single  thickness  of  linen. 
Q.    By  what  do  they  cool? 


96  The  Nursing  Sister. 

By  evaporation,  and  therefore  must  be  re-wetted  as 
the  cloth  dries. 

Q.    How  should  they  be  held  in  place? 

By  a  single  bandage,  and  must  not  be  covered  with 
oil  silk  or  anything  else. 

Liniments. 
Q.    In  what  do  liniments  differ  from  lotions? 

In  their  mode  of  application,  being  rubbed  in  until 
the  part  is  dry. 

Q.    What  has  to  be  done  before  the  liniment  is  applied? 
The  part  to  which  the  liniment  is  to  be  applied  should 
be  rubbed  briskly  for  a  few  moments  before. 
Q.    How  are  they  applied? 

A  few  drops  are  poured  into  the  palm  of  the  hand, 
then  rubbed  on  the  part  with  Arm  and  even  pressure  until  all 
moisture  is  absorbed. 

Q.   What  must  always  be  done  after  a  sister  has  rubbed 
any  part  with  liniments? 

As  all  liniments  usually  contain  some  poisonous  in- 
gredients, the  hands  must  be  washed  thoroughly  before  touch- 
iug  any  sensitive  spot. 

Ointments. 
Q.    How  are  ointments  applied? 

Ointments  are  spread  on  a  compress,  or  they  are 
rubbed  in,  like  liniments. 

Q.    What  is  the  rubbing  in  of  ointments  called? 
Inunction. 

Application  to  the  Eye. 

Q.    Where  and  with  what  should  a  lotion  be  applied  into 
the  eye? 

It  should  be  introduced  at  the  outer  angle  of  the  eye 
with  a  glass  dropper  or  a  camel's  hair  brush. 

Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  97 

Draw  down  the  lower  lid,  and  tell  the  patient  to  look 
up  at  the  instant  they  are  dropped  in. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  when  moist  clothes  are  ordered? 
They  should  be  laid  over  the  eyes,   but  they  must 
never  be  tied  too  fast  or  covered  with  oil  silk,  otherwise  they 
will  assume  the  nature  of  a  poultice,   which   is  always  harm- 
ful to  a  delicate  organ  like  the  eye. 

Q.    How  is  the  interior  part  of  the  throat  treated? 

By  gargles  or  insufflation  or  inhalations. 
Q.      What  are  gargles? 

Fluids  brought  in  contact  with  the  tonsils  and  forcibly 
agitated  by  the  air  from  the  larynx. 

Q.    How  much  should  be  used  at  a  time? 

A  tablespoonful,  four  or  five  times  successively. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  after  an  acid  gargle  has   been 


used 


The  mouth  must  be  well  rinsed. 
Q.    What  is  used  for  insufflation? 

Powder,  which  is  blown  into  the  throat  and  insufflated 
•by  the  patient.  , 

Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

Either  with  a  powder  blower,  or  the  powder  is  placed 
in  a  glass  tube,  which  is  placed  far  back  in  the  throat  and 
blown  in  by  the  doctor  or  sister. 

Cold  Applications. 

Q.    How  must  cold  be  applied? 

Steadily,  uniformly  and  over  a  definite  space. 

Q.    What  will  render  the  ice  bag  useless  or  even  harmful? 

In  case  the  ice  bag  or  cold  cloths  slip  about  as  the 

feverish  patient  turns  and  twists. 

Q.    How  often  must  it  be  renewed? 

Before  it  becomes  warm.    If  this  is  neglected,  it  had 

better  not  been  applied. 

Q.    How  can  a  cold  applicaton  be  made? 
— T 


98  The  Nursing  Sister. 

With  an  ice  bag,  by  putting  pounded  ice  with  a  little 
water  in  a  thin  bladder  or  rubber  bag. 

Q.    How  long  will  the  water  remain  cold? 

Until  the  last  piece  of  ice  is  melted;  before  this  takes 
place  it  must  be  renewed. 

Q.    What  can  be  secured  by  this? 

A  continuous  cold,  and  no  danger  from  frost  bite 
need  be  apprehended. 

Q.    Should  an  ice  bag  be  filled? 

No;  it  should  only  be  filled  about  one-half,  the  air  ex- 
cluded.   In  this  way  it  adapts  itself  better  to  the  heated  part. 
Q.    How  should  it  be  kept  in  place? 

If  necessary  with  a  bandage. 
Q.    What  is  now  extensively  used  as  a  substitute  for  ice 
bags? 

A  coil  made  of  rubber  tubing,  through  which  ice  water 
is  syphoned  from  a  tub  or  bucket  placed  at  an  elevation  above 
the  bed. 

Q.    To  what  part  of  the  body  is  this  mostly  applied? 

To  the  abdomen. 
Q.    How  is  it  applied? 

The  abdomen  is  covered  with  a  towel,  the  coil  laid 
upon  this,  one  end  of  the  rubber  tubing  placed  in  the  elevated 
bucket,  the  other  in  a  bucket  standing  ou  the  floor,  for  the 
water  that  has  passed  through  the  coil. 
Q.    How  must  the  coil  be  started? 

It  must  be  sucked  until  the  water  commences  to  flow. 
Q.    What  must  be  looked  for? 

That  the  elevated  bucket  is  never  empty,  that  nothing 
checks  the  flow  of  the  water  in  the  coil,  that  the  bucket  on 
the  floor  does  not  overflow  and  that  the  coil  is  kept  in  place. 
Q.    How  can  cold  cloths  be  applied? 

Apply  single  fold  of  linen  or  cotton,  dipped  in  cold 
water  or  laid  upon  ice,  and  replace  it  by  fresh,  cool  ones  be- 
fore it  becomes  warm . 

Q.    What  does  this  call  for? 


The  Nursing  Stster.  99 

Constant  attention  of  the  nurse. 
Q.    What  special  precaution  is  required? 

That  the  bed  is  protected. 
Q.    What  care  must  always  be  taken  in  all  applications  of 
water? 

That  neither  the  patient  nor  the  bed  clothes  get  wet. 
Q.    How  can  a  cold  drip  be  applied? 

The  easiest  way  for  applying1  either  a  cold  or  warm 
drip  or  continuous  drop  is  a  can,  which  has  a  narrow  pipe  with 
a  faucet  attached  to  it  and  a  sprinkler  at  the  end  of  this  pipe. 
Q.    Where  is  this  placed? 

On  one  side  of  the  bed  on  a  table  or  box,  and  is  ar- 
ranged so  that  the  sprinkler  comes  just  above  the  part  afflict- 
ed. The  afflicted  part  is  then  laid  in  a  Kelley-cushion  or  on  a 
rubber  sheet  and  is  covered  with  one  or  two  layers  of  gauze 
and  the  drip  turned  on  and  regulated  by  the  faucet.  The  end 
of  the  Kelley-cushion  or  rubber  sheet  is  placed  in  a  bucket 
aside  of  the  bed  on  the  floor  for  the  drainage  of  the  waste 
water. 

Q.    How  can  the  drip  be  arranged  if  the  above  apparatus 
is  not  at  hand? 

Put  a  pitcher  of  water  on  the  table  higher  than  the 
patient's  bed.    Put  one  end  of  a  long  strip  of  lint  or  lamp- 
wick  in  the  pitcher,  lay  the  other  across  the  dressings  which 
are  applied  to  the  inflamed  part. 
Q.    What  care  must  be  taken? 

That  the  waste  water  is  conveyed  into  a  basin  or 
bueket,  and  not  allowed  to  soak  in  the  bed. 

Hot  Applications  j»nd  Fomentations. 
Q.    What  are  fomentations? 

They  are  poultices  in  modified  forms,  applications  of 
hot  water,  pure  or  medicated,  by  means  of  pieces  of  flannel  or 
flat  sponges. 

Q.    What  advantage  have  they? 

They  are  clean,  light  and  quickly  prepared. 


100  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  do  they  require? 

Constant  attention,  needing  to  be  changed  every  ten 
to  fifteen  minutes. 

Q.    What  are  stupes? 

Pieces  of  flannel  doubled  to  the  desired  size:  these  are 
to  be  saturated  with  boiling  water  and  wrung  out  as  dry  as 
possible. 

Q.    What  is  needed  for  this  purpose? 

A  stupe  wringer. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  made? 

Take  a  piece  of  toweling  with  a  wide  hem  at  each  end 
and  a  stick  run  through  the  hem  at  each  end. 
Q.    How  can  this  wringer  be  used? 

Put  the  stupe  in  the  middle,  saturate  with  boiling 
water,  and  twist  the  sticks  in  opposite  directions  until  no 
more  water  can  be  squeezed  out. 

Q.    When  is  a  stupe  of  little  use? 

If  it  is  cool  enough  to  be  wrung  out  with  the  hands. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  in  place  of  a  stupe  wringer? 

A  towel,  but  there  is  danger  of  scalding  the  fingers. 
Q.    How  dry  should  the  stupe  be? 

Dry  enough  not  to  wet  the  bed  or  the  clothing. 
Q.    How  many  layers  of  flannel  should  be  used? 

Two  or  more. 
Q.    How  is  it  applied? 

Have  everything  ready,  shake  the  flannel  slightly 
after  taking  it  out  of  the  towel. 

Q.    For  what  reason  should  the  flannel  be  shaken? 

To  let  the  air  in  between  the  layers,  and  they  will 
keep  hot  longer. 

Q,    With  what  should  the  stupe  be  covered? 

With  oil  silk  or  oiled  muslin,  an  inch  larger  in  each 
direction,  and  over  that  lay  a  piece  of  dry  flannel  or  a  layer  of 
cotton. 

Q.   How  should  the  stupe  be  kept? 

Always  warm  and  never  allowed  to  get  cold. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  101 

Q.    What  must  be  done  after  the  fomentations  are  dis- 
continued? 

The  part  to  which  they  have  teen  applied  must  be 
carefully  dried  and  covered  for  a  time  with  a  warm  dry  flan- 
nel. 

Q.    To  what  are  fomentations  never  applied? 

To  a  discharging  wound. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  the  stupes  would  be  soiled  at  once. 
Q.    What  are  they  chiefly  used  for? 

For  the  relief  of  spasm  of  the  internal  organs. 
Q.    What  is  turpentine  liable  to  do  when  sprinkled  on  a 
stupe? 

It  will  easily  blister. 
Q.    What  precautions  must  be  taken? 

The  sore  spots  must  be  covered  with  some  dressing. 
Q.    What  is  employed  to  avoid  the  relaxation  of  tissues? 

Dry  Fomentations. 

Q.    How  can  they  be  made? 

By  heating  thin  bags  of  sand,  ashes,  salt,  bran,  hops, 
hot  bricks,  plates,  tins,  water  bottles,  etc. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  before  these  fomentations  are 
applied? 

They  must  be  wrapped  up  or  covered. 
Q.    For  what  purpose? 

Because  there  is  danger  that  the  patient  might  be 
burned. 

Q.     When  is  this  especially  necessary? 

With  a  child  or  an  unconscious  patient. 
Q,    What  has  often  happened  where  this  precaution  was 
neglected? 

That  patients  after  operations  before  recovering  from 
the  anaesthetic  suffered  severe  burns. 

Q.    Who  is  to  be  blamed  for  such  an  occurrence? 


102  The  Nursing-  Sister. 

A  carelessness  on  the  part  of  the  nurse,  which  is  sim- 
ply unpardonable. 

Q.    What  applications  are  generally  best:' 

Hot  applications  are  generally  better  than  cold  ones. 
Q.    What  are  cold  applications  chiefly  used  for'? 

To  subdue  inflammation. 
Q.     When  are  cold  applications  never  used? 

When  pus  is  forming  or  during  sloughing. 

Baths. 

Q.    What  is  very  important  for  preserving  health  and 
promoting  recovery  from  disease'? 
Daily  bathing. 
Q.     Why? 

Because  all  vital  organs  are  affected  through  the  skin. 
Q.     What  benefit  is  derived  by  keeping  the  skin  in  clean, 
healthy  condition'? 

The  circulation  of  the  blood,  the  action  of  the  kidneys 
and  bowels,  and  all  the  digestive  processes  are  promoted, 
many  diseases  warded,  and  the  assimilation  of  food  aided. 

Q.    Whom  shall  the  sister  ask  for  directions  in  regard  to 
the  bathing  of  a  patient'? 

The  doctor:  not  only  what  kind  of  a  bath  to  give,  but 
also  at  what  degree  of  temperature. 

Q.    What  is  often  the  consequence  of  ignorance  in  this 
matter? 

Great  harm  to  the  patient. 
Q.    At  what  temperature  are  baths  given? 
Cold  at  50  to  60  Fahr. 
Temperate  at  75  to  85  Fahr. 
Tepid  at  85  to  96  Fahr. 
Warm  at  96  to  98  Fahr. 
Hot  at  98  to  110  Fahr. 
Q.    How  can  you  prepare  a  bran  bath'? 

Boil  a  pound  of  bran  in  a  bag  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour, 
drain  off  the  fluid,  and  add  water  to  the  fluid. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  103 

Q.     Is  there  any  other  way? 

Put  enough  bran  in  cold  or  warm  water  to  make  the 
water  milky. 

Q.     Is  it  advisable  to  give  this  latter  bath  in  a  stationary 
bath  tub'? 

Never;  for  in  letting  off  the  water,  the  bran  will  be 
sucked  clown  and  will  give  choke  to  the  pipes. 

Q.     For  what  purpose  is  this  bath  chiefly  given? 

For  softening  the  skin  when  it  is  dry  and  flaky. 
Q.    How  can  a  salt  bath  be  given? 

Take  one  pound  of  rock  salt  to  four  gallons  of  water. 
Q.    Must  the  salt  be  increased? 

Yes;  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of  water. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  after  the  bath? 

The  body  must  be  rubbed  briskly. 
Q.    In  what  case  is  this  especially  useful? 

To  invigorate  feeble  constitutions. 
Q.    When  given  daily  cold,  as  a  sponge  bath,  what  are  the 
-effects? 

It  lessens  the  susceptibility  to  cold,  rheumatism,  etc. 
Q.    How  is  a  sulphur  bath  prepared? 

By  adding  to  each  gallon  of  water  twenty  grains  of 
sulphurate  of  potasssium. 

Q.    In  what  must  this  be  prepared  and  given? 

In  a  wooden  or  porcelain  lined  vessel. 
Q.    For  what  reason  in  a  porcelain  lined  vessel? 

Because  the  sulphates  discolor  most  metals. 
Q.    What  is  it  used  for? 

For  skin  diseases  or  rheumatism. 
Q.    What  kind  of  water  should  be  used  for  all  baths  of 
skin  diseases? 

Rain  water  or  softened  water. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  after  the  bath? 

The  skin  should  not  be  rubbed,  but  clapped  dry  with 
soft  towels. 

Q.    How  can  you  prepare  a  soda  bath? 


104  The  Nursing  Sister. 

By  adding  one  pound  of  common  baking  soda  to  the 
bath. 

Q.    For  what  is  it  used? 

For  the  same  purpose  as  the  sulphur  bath. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  iirst  with  the  soda? 

It  should  be  dissolved  in  warm  water,  after  which 
water  of  any  temperature  may  be  added  in  a  sufficient  quan- 
tity for  a  plunge  bath. 

Q.    How  can  you  prepare  a  starch  bath? 

By  mixing  half  a  pound  of  starch  with  two  quarts  of 
water,  to  be  added  to  the  bath. 

Cold  Douche. 
Q.    In  what  cases  is  a  cold  douche  sometimes  ordered? 
In  cases  of  inflammation  of  the  brain,  and  to  subdue 
delirium  in  fever. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  if  the  hair  is  very  thick? 

It  should  be  shaved  or  cut  off  very  close. 
Q.    How  is  a  patient  to  be  prepared  for  this  douche? 

Eaise  the  patient  in  the  bed  and  bend  his  head  for- 
ward over  an  empty  basin. 

Q.    How  can  you  protect  his  shoulders? 

By  laying  a  piece  of  oil-silk  or  a  rubber  sheet  between 
several  folds  of  soft  towels  around  his  shoulders. 
Q.    Where  is  the  water  then  poured? 

The  cold  water  is  poured  over  the  crown  of  the  head 
into  an  empty  basin. 

Q.    How  is  the  water  poured? 

The  pitcher  being  slowly  and  gradually  raised  higher 
and  higher,  so  that  the  water  may  fall  with  more  force. 
Q.    How  is  the  head  then  dried? 

The  head  is  dried  without  rubbing. 

Hot  Plunge  Bath. 
Q.    In  what  cases  are  hot  plunge  baths  frequently  given?- 

In  cases  of  eruptive  fevers. 
Q.    How  is  the  patient  lifted  into  the  bath? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  105 


Wrap  him  up  in  a  sheet  or  bathing  apron,   and  put 
him,  sheet  and  all,  into  the  water  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes. 
Q.    Against  what  is  the  patient  to  be  protected? 

Against  all  exposure. 
Q.    What  must  be  warmed  afterwards? 
Towels,  night  clothes  and  bedding. 
Q.    What  will  a  very  hot  bath  do? 

It  excites  and  stimulates  the  nervous  system. 
Q.    What  may  be  the  consequence,  if  the  water  it  too  hot 
or  the  bath  is  continued  too  long? 

Languor,  giddiness  or  faintness. 
Q.    With  what  should  the  temperature  of  the  water  be 
tested? 

With  a  thermometer,   and  the  same  degree  of  heat 
kept  up  throughout. 

Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken? 

That  no  part  of  the  body  comes  directly  under  the  hot 
water  tap. 

Q.    How  should  the  head  of  the  patient  be  kept? 

Cool. 
Q.    For  what  purpose  is  a  hot  foot  bath  generally  given?' 

To  relieve  the  head  and  to  promote  perspiration. 
Q.    How  hot  should  it  be  given? 

Hot  enough  to  make  the  skin  decidedly  red,  and  more 
hot  water  should  be  added  from  time  to  time. 
Q.    How  far  up  should  the  water  reach? 

Up  to  the  knees. 
Q.    What  must  be  covered?  v 

The  patient  and  the  tub  should  be  covered  with  a. 
blanket. 

Q.    What  can  be  added  to  the  water  if  greater  relief  of 
the  head  is  required? 

Mustard:  about  half  a  teaspoonful  to  a  pail  of  water. 
Q.    How  long  should  the  bath  last? 
From  fifteen  to  thirty  minutes. 


106  The  Cursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  be  used  in  bed  after  the  bath"? 

Warm  stockings  or  a  small  blanket  to  protect  the 
limbs. 

Sponge  Bath. 
Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken  when  a  sponge  bath 
is  to  be  given  in  bed? 

The  chief  things  are  that:  1.  The  bed  be  protected 
with  a  rubber  sheet  and  a  draw  sheet.  2.  That  the  patient's 
arms  are  slipped  out  of  the  sleeves.  3.  That  a  dry  night 
shirt  is  always  put  on  after  the  bath. 

Q.    How  much  water  should  be  taken  up? 

As  little  as  possible,  but  return  the  cloth  to  the  water 
frequently. 

Q.    How  often  should  the  water  be  changed? 

Two  or  three  times  during  the  bath. 
Q.    What  should  stand  at  the  side  of  the  bed? 

A  slop  jar  or  pail  for  the  dirty  water. 
Q.    What  must  be  on  hand  before  the  bath  is  begun. 

Everything  that  is  needed. 
Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  washed  and  dried? 

Only  one  part  at  a  time. 
Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  dried? 

With  soft  towels  in  quick,  gentle  strokes. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  part  as  soon  as  it 
is  washed? 

It  should  be  enveloped  in  a  towel. 
Q.    What  will  this  avoid? 
Exposure. 

Vapor  Bath. 

Q.    How  can  you  give  a  vapor  bath  in  a  simple  way? 

Undress  the  patient,  put  a  thin  flannel  or  woolen 
cloth  about  him,  seat  him  on  an  arm-chair,  place  by  his  side  a 
pail  of  boiling  water,  into  which,  as  it  cools,  you  put  bricks 


The  Nursing  Sister.  107 

made  very  hot,  and  cover  the  patient,  chair  and  pail  with  a 
large  blanket,  fastened  securely  at  the  neck. 
Q.    What  will  the  steam  soon  produce? 

The  required  perspiration. 
Q.    What  care  will  be  necessary? 

That  the  bed,  bedclothes,  towels  and  night-shirts  are 
made  hot  before  the  patient  uses  any  of  them. 

Q.    What  other  bath  can  be  given  in  the  same  manner? 

A  hot  air  bath  with  a  spirit  lamp. 
Q.    What  precautions  must  be  taken  when  using  a  lamp? 

Against  fire. 
Q.    What  is  used  frequently  for  a  hot  air  bath? 

A  special  apparatus  which  is  heated  by  a  spirit  lamp 
or  a  gas  burner. 

Q.    What  is  required  if  the  vapor  or  hot  air  bath  is  to  be 
given  in  bed? 

A  cradle. 
Q.    How  can  the  hot  air  bath  or  vapor  bath  be  given  in 
bed? 

Remove  the  sheets  and  take  off  the  patient's  clothes; 
put  blankets  next  to  the  patient  and  over  the  cradle  so  as  to 
render  it  almost  air-tight. 

Q.    How  Cin  it  be  arranged  so  that  the  vapor  can  enter 
under  the  bedelothes. 

A  gas  stove  or  spirit  lamp  is  placed  on  a  chair  close  to 
the  bed:  a  croup-kettle  which  has  a  large  nozzle  is  useful  for 
this  purpose;  this  is  placed  on  the  lamp  and  the  nose  of  the 
kettle  is  introduced  under  the  bedclothing. 

Q.    What  may  be  done  when  the  perspiration  is  estab- 
lished freely? 

The  patient  may  be  rubbed  with  warmed  towels,  and 
warmed  cloths  put  on. 

Q.    What  must  be  put  on  the  bed? 

Dry  warm  sheets  and  blankets,  but  without  exposing 
or  disturbing  the  patient. 

Q.    How  is  a  hip  bath  given? 


108  The  Nursing  Sister. 

The  patient  is  immersed,  the  knees  to  the  waist,  and 
covered  with  a  blanket. 

Q.    How  should  the  temperature  of  the  water  be  kept'? 
It  should  be  kept  as  ordered  by  the  doctor,  either 
warm  or  cold. 

Q.    How  long  should  this  bath  be  prolonged? 

About  twenty  minutes. 
Q.    What  is  generally  the  purpose  of  this  bath? 

To  excite  the  menstrual  flow. 
Q.    At  what  time  should  the  bath  be  given? 

As  nearly  as  can  be  calculated  at  the  time  when  that 
would  appear. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  employed  for  the  same  purpose? 
A  hot  foot  bath. 

Cold  Plunge  or  Pack. 

Q.    What  are  cold  baths  employed  for? 

Either  to  produce  reaction,  refrigeration  or  a  nerv- 
ous shock. 

Q.    What  does  cold  water  do? 

It  abstracts  the  heat  from  the  body  and  affects  the 
internal  organs  through  the  nervous  system. 

Q.    What  is  first  experienced  upon  entering  a  cold  bath? 

A  sense  of  chilliness  and  depression. 
Q.    How  does  it  affect  the  pulse  and  temperature? 

The  pulse  is  quickened,  but  the  temperature  of  the 
surface  is  lowered  and  the  blood  accumulates  in  the  internal 
organs. 

Q.    What  will  soon  follow  this  condition? 

A  reaction,  with  invigorated  circulation,  and  a  feeling 
of  warmth. 

Q.    What  will  return  if  the  bath  is  continued  too  long? 
The  coldness  returns,  with   weakness  of  pulse  and 
general  depression. 

Q.    When  should  a  cold  bath  not  be  given? 

When  a  patient  feels  chilly,  although  his  bodily  tern- 


The  Nursing  Sister.  109 

perature  is  high,  or  when  there  is  free  perspiration,  when  the 
patient  feels  faint  or  during  menstruation. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  if  shivering  comes  on  during  the 
"bath? 

The  patient  should  at  once  be  taken  out  of  the  bath 
and  put  to  bed,  heat  applied  and  stimulants  given  if  it  per- 
sists. 

Q.    For  what  are  cold  baths  sometimes  given? 

They  are  sometimes  used  as  a  tonic  in  cases  of  debility. 
Q.    At  what  time  is  it  best  given? 

In  the  morning,  and  followed  by  vigorous  rubbing  and 
gentle  exercise. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  is  it  mostly  given? 

To  bring  down  speedily  a  high  temperature. 
Q.    How  can  it  be  given? 

The  patient  is  undressed,  rolled  in  a  sheet,  and  put  in 
an  empty  tub  or  fever  cot  and  buckets  of  cold  water  poured 
over  the  body  for  two  or  three  minutes  until  he  is  evidently 
cool. 

Q.    What  is  done  after  the  water  is  poured  over  the  body 
the  prescribed  length  of  time? 

The  patient  is  then  rolled  in  a  dry  sheet  and  put  back 
to  bed,  without  any  exertion  on  his  part,  and  covered  with 
blankets. 

Q.    Who  should  be  present  at  the  first  bath,  if  possible? 

The  doctor. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  he  has  gone  and  unforeseen 
symptoms  appear? 

The  bath  should  be  postponed  until  further  in- 
struction. 

Q.    What  can  be  done  if  the  patient  is  not  able  to  stand 
the  shock  of  cold  water  poured  over  him? 

Then  the  patient  is  laid  in  a  tub  half  filled  with 
water  at  95  to  98  degrees  and  gradually  cooled  down  to  80  or 
60  degrees,  as  ordered,  with  ice  or  cold  water. 


110  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  the  sister  do  during  the  bath? 

She  should  rub  the  patient  in  the  water. 
Q.    What  is  a  fever  cot? 

It  is  a  wooden  frame,   covered  with  sacking,  below 
which  a  rubber  sheet  is  hung,  one  end  lower  than  the  other. 
Q.    How  must  the  bed  be  prepared  if  a  cold  pack  is  to  be 
applied? 

A  large  rubber  sheet  must  be  first  spread  upon  the 
bed,  then  two  or  three  blankets. 

Q.    What  is  spread  over  the  blankets? 

A  sheet  wrung  out  in  cold  water. 
Q.    Where  is  the  patient  placed? 

The  patient,  who  has  been  stripped  of  his  clothes,  is 
then  laid  upon  this  wet  sheet  and  it  is  folded  over  him,  tucked 
in  well  at  both  sides. 

Q.    What  should  not  be  included  in  the  sheet? 

The  ankles  and  feet. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  blankets? 

They  should  be  folded  one  by  one  over  the  patient. 
Q.    How  long  should  the  patient  be  left  in  this  pack? 

From  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes  or  longer  if  ordered. 
Q.    What  should  be  given  to  the  patient  while  in  the 


pack? 

Plenty  to  drink. 
Q.    How  must  t'ie  feet  be  kept? 

WTarm. 
Q.    What  effect  will  this  generally  have  upon  the  patient? 
It  will  render  the  skin  moist,  subdue  restlessness  and 
delirium  and  reduce  fever. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  when  the  pack  is  removed? 

Dry  off  the  patient  quickly  and  wrap  him  in  a  dry, 
warm  blanket  for  some  hours. 

Q.    How  can  a  cold  pack  be  given  if  its  object  is  only  to 
reduce  fever? 

By  spreading  a  rubber  cloth  over  the  bed,  then  wrap- 


The  Nursing  Sister.  Ill 

ping  the  patient  in  sheets  which  have  been  wrung  out  in  cold 
water  without  using  the  blankets. 
Q.    What  is  generally  used  then'? 

Friction,  by  rubbing  the  different  parts  of  the  body 
while  the  patient  is  wrapped,  and  water  sprinkled  over  him. 
Q.    How  can  the  same  effect  be  produced  easier? 

By  applying  towels  wrung  out  in  ice  water,  dry 
enough  not  to  drip,  one  alter  another,  from  the  neck  down- 
ward. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  when  the  feet  are  reached? 

Begin  again  at  the  head  and  renew  each  in  succession. 
Q.    How  long  should  this  be  continued? 

As  long  as  necessary  to  reduce  the  temperature  or  as 
prescribed  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    What  besides  this  is  given  to  relieve  a  feverish  con- 
dition? 

A  cold  or  tepid  sponge  bath. 
Q.    How  can  it  be  given? 

If  possible,  strip  the  patient,  lay  him  between  blank- 
ets and  sponge  freely  under  the  covers. 

Q.    What  should  be  applied  while  giving  a  cold  sponge 
bath? 

A  cold  compress  or  icebag  to  the  head  and  a  hot-water 
bottle  to  the  feet. 

Q.    How  should  the  sponging  always  be  done? 

Downward. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  after  the  bath? 

The  patient  should  be  left  undisturbed  in  the  blanket 
for  at  least  ten  to  fifteen  minutes. 

Q.    What  is  often  added  to  the  water? 

Alcohol. 
Q.    For  what  purpose? 

This  makes  it  more  cooling  by  its  rapid  evaporation. 


112  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Massage. 
Q.    What  is  massage? 

It  is  a  peculiar  rubbing  and  kneading  of  the  under- 
lying muscles. 

Q.    What  will  answer  when  friction  is  needed  to  excite 
circulation  of  the  blood? 

Brisk  rubbing  up  and  down  with  the  bare  hand  or  a 
hair  glove  all  over  the  surface  of  the  body. 
Q.    Which  is  the  best  time  for  this? 

In  the  morning  before  dressing,  after  the  patient's 
bath. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  is  stiffness  and  inaction 
of  the  muscles? 

The  entire  body  should  be  treated  by  pinching  and 
rubbing  the  muscles  and  tendons. 

Q.    With  what  should  this  be  done? 

With  the  whole  hand  and  not  with  the  fingers  alone. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  each  joint? 

It  should  be  worked  up  and  down  and  backward  and 
forward. 

Q.    How  is  this  done? 

Evenly  and  without  jerking,  commencing  at  the  toes 
and  going  upwards. 

Q.    What  is  frequently  used  for  rubbing? 

Cocoa  oil  or  vaseline. 
Q.    How  should  the  rubbing  be  done  when  restless,  nerv- 
ousness or  fatigue  is  to  be  overcome? 

It  should  be  done  in  one  direction,  in  long,  slow,  firm 
strokes. 

Q.    Where  should  you  begin? 

With  the  shoulders  and  arms,  then  the  back,  abdo- 
men, thighs,  legs  and  feet. 

Q.    What  effect  will  this  have? 

It  soothes  and  induces  sleep. 
Q.    How  long  is  a  patient  generally  rubbed? 
From  one-half  to  one  hour. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  113 

Q.    What  should  be  avoided  as  much  as  possible? 
Exposure. 

Some  Special  Medical  Cases. 
Q.    What  may  be  called  the  general  causes  of  many  dis- 


eases 


Proximity  to  stagnant  water,  exhalation  from  defec- 
tive drain,  sewers  and  cess-pools,  clamp  cellars,  impurities  in 
drinking  water,  sudden  changes  from  heated  rooms  to  damp 
night  air,  mental  or  bodily  over  fatigue,  insufficient  clothing 
and  food,  etc. 

Q.    What,  therefore,  should  be  done  in  cases  of  serious 
illness  or  long  continued  ill-feeling? 

The  cause  should  be  looked  for  and  a  remedy  or  pre- 
ventative applied. 

Q.    What  persons  will  be  liable  to  take  the  same  diseases? 

Persons  living  under  the  same  condition. 
Q.    What  is  therefore  of  great  importance? 

The  early  stages  of  any  disease. 
Q.    What  should  excite  attention? 

A  loss  of  appetite,  a  feeling  of  general  lassitude,  flush- 
ing of  the  face  and  wandering  pain  in  the  back  and  limbs,  sore 
throat,  sleeplessness,  in  short,  anything  unusual  in  the  ap- 
pearance or  feeling. 

Q.    What  may  the  neglect  of  these  seeming  trifles  make? 
The  difference  between  an  unimportant  indisposition 
and  a  serious  illness. 

Q.    What  is,  therefore,  to  be  done  upon  the  first  appear- 
ance of  such  symptoms? 

It  is  well  to  enforce  rest,  a  long  morning  sleep,  fol- 
lowed by  a  tepid  sponge  bath  and  some  light  nourishment  be- 
fore dressing  for  the  day. 

Q.    What  food  should  be  taken? 

The  simplest  food  and  not  much  of  it. 
Q.    What  should  be  avoided  and  what  should  be  secured? 
Xo  exercise  should  be  taken,  but  as  much  fresh  air  as 


114  The  Nursing  Sister. 

possible  by  day  and  by  night  should  be  secured,  and  in  all  cases 
the  patient  should  occupy  a  bed  alone. 

Q.    What  can  generally  be  given  safe? 
Two  grains  of  quinine  in  twelve  hours. 

Q.    With  what  should  the  bowels  be  regulated  if  consti- 


pated'? 


With  a  plain  enema  of  warm  soapsuds. 


Typhoid  Fever. 

Q.    Which  is  the  principal  characteristic  of  typhoid  fever? 

Ulceration  of  the  bowels. 

Q.    How  long  may  premonitory  symptoms  precede  the 

disease? 

For  days  and  even  weeks. 

Q.    Which  are  such  symptoms? 

Restless  sleep2  mental  disquietude,  dizziness,  pain  in 
the  different  parts  of  the  body,  hot  dry  skin,  and  slight  nose- 
bleed, sometimes  nausea,  slight  diarrhoea,  and  a  general  ill- 
feeling. 

Q.    How  does  the  fever  generally  announce  itself? 

With  a  chill  or  a  long  continued  chilly  sensation,  and 
the  bodily  temperature  rises. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  on  the  part  of  the  nurse? 

She  must  follow  with  utmost  exactness  the  orders  of 
the  doctor. 

Q.    How  long  is  the  general  duration  of  the  disease? 

Three  to  four  weeks,  dating  from  the  first  rise  of  tem- 
perature. 

Q.    What  symptoms  usually  appear  the  first  week? 

A  general  increase  of  temperature,  though  it  may  have 
a  remittent  type,  falling  in  the  morning  but  rising  every 
night  a  little  higher,  till  it  gets  up  to  103  to  104  degrees. 

Q.    What  other  symptoms  will  generally  appear  by  this 

time? 

Violent  headache,  intolerance  of  light,  and  perhaps, 

slight  delirium,  parched  lips  and  tongue,  abdominal  tender- 
ness and  tympanites. 


The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    What  are  the  symptoms  usually  in  the  second  week? 
During  the  second  week  the  temperature  remains  con- 
tinuously high  and  an  eruption  of  rose-colored  spots  may  ap- 
pear on  the  abdomen  and  chest. 
Q.    How  are  these  spots? 

They  are  slightly  elevated  and  disappear  upon  pres- 
sure, to  return  again  immediately. 

Q.    How  long  does  each  spot  remain  visible? 

Three  days. 
Q.    How  are  head  and  bowels  generally  by  this  time? 

The  headache  is  less,  the  bowels  are  likely  to  be  re- 
laxed, the  movements  of  a  light  ochre  or  pea-soup  color. 
Q.    What  does  the  patient  assume  in  severe  cases? 

A  characteristic  typhoid  appearance,  the  face  dusky 
and  indifferent,  the  muscular  prostration  evidently  extreme, 
the  mental  condition  one  of  a  stupor,  varied  by  active  dilirium. 
Q.    How  is  the  tongue? 

Brown  and  dry  and  heavily  coaled;  sordes  collect  on 
the  teeth. 

Q.    How  is  the  fever  during  the  third  week? 

The  fever  again  becomes  remittent,  falling  towards 
morning,  though  rising  at  night. 

Q.    How  is  the  general  typhoid  condition  at  this  period? 
It  deepens,  the  pulse  becomes  frequent  and  feeble,  and 
rapid  loss  of  strength. 

Q.    What  period  is  the  third  week  generally  in  typhoid? 

The  period  of  greatest  danger. 
Q.    What  should  appear  at  the  beginning  of  the  fourth 
week? 

Evident  improvement,  the  fever  becoming  intermit, 
tent,  and  the  evening  temperature  decreasing,  the  tongue 
clearing  off,  the  tympanites  disappearing. 

Q.    What  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in  typhoid  fever? 

Good  nursing. 
Q.    What  must  a  sister  therefore  do? 

She  must  keep  a  constant  watchfulness  and  care  from 
the  beginning  until  complete  recovery. 


116  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    In  what  position  must  the  patient  be  kept? 

In  a  recumbent — that  is  a  lying-down  posture. 
Q.    How  long  must  this  posture  be  maintained'? 

Until  the  intestinal  ulcers  are  completely  healed. 
Q.    What  must  a  sister  observe  in  typhoid  fever? 

The  symptoms,  viz:  Whether  the  patient  talks  in  his 
sleep:  is  clear-headed  when  spoken  to,  but  listless;  has  great 
thirst;  a  bitter  taste  in  the  mouth;  a  sore  tongue;  whether 
there  is  any  rash  on  the  abdomen,  or  whether  the  abdomen  is 
puffed  up. 

Q.    What  must  be  very  exactly  observed? 

The  character  of  the  secretions,  quantity,  color, 
quality. 

Q.    How  often  should  the  temperature  be  taken? 

As  often  as  ordered  by  the  doctor,  which  is  usually 
every  four  hours,  should  be  recorded  immediately,  the  rapidity 
and  evenness  of  the.pulse  and  respirations  at  the  correspond- 
ing time. 

Q.    What  does  labored  breathing,  especially  in  sleep,  often 
indicate? 

An  inflammation  of  the  air-passages. 
Q.    What  does  frequently  occur  during  convalescence? 
A  relapse;  usually  in  a  milder  form  than  the  original 
attack  and  of  shorter  duration. 

Q.    What  is  the  greatest  danger  in  typhoid  fever? 

*  A  perforation  of  the  bowels  by  the  intestinal  ulcers 
and  consequently  acute  peritonitis. 

Q.    What  are  the  symptons  of  perforation? 

Severe  pain,  increased  by  pressure,  rapid  distention  of 
the  abdomen,  rapid,  feeble  pulse  and  other  signs  of  collapse. 
Q.    In  how  many  hours  is  it  usually  fatal? 

In  twenty-four  hours. 
Q.    From  what  may  intestinal  hemorrhage  occur? 

It  may  occur  without  perforation  from  the  rupture  of 
an  artery  in  some  ulcer. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  117 


Q.    By  what  is  a  rupture  generally  preceded? 

By  a  sudden  fall  of  temperature. 
Q.    In  what  does  the  treatment  consist  after  a  hemor- 
rhage"? 

In  absolute  rest  and  the  application  of  an  ice-bag  or 
ice-coil  over  the  abdomen. 

Q.    At  what  temperature  should  the  room  be  kept? 

At  65  degrees  in  winter. 
Q.    How  should  the  room  be  ventilated? 

With  an  open  window  and  an  open  fire-place,  if  pos- 
sible. Let  no  draught  blow  upon  the  patient,  but  keep  the 
air  constantly  changing. 

Q.    For  what  reason  is  this  so  absolutely  necessary? 

Because  the  atmosphere  is  filled  with  poisonous  influ 
ences  and  germs  from  the  disease. 
Q.    Where  do  these  come  from? 

From  the  skin,  the  breath,  and  the  secretions  of  the 
patient. 

Q.    How  can  this  poison  be  removed? 

By  free  currents  of  fresh  air  through  the  room,  but 
never  over  the  patient. 

Q.    With  what  should  the  bed  be  protected? 

It  should  be  protected  with  a  rubber  sheet  and  a  draw 
sheet. 

Q.    With  what  should  the  patient  be  covered? 

With  the  top  sheet  and  a  blanket  if  necessary,  but  no 
quilts. 

Q.    Should  warm  covers  be  used  to  keep  up  a  free  per- 
spiration? 
No. 
Q.    What  is  desirable? 

A  moist  skin. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  promoted? 

It  is  more  likely  to  be  promoted  by  cool  bathing  than 
fcy  warm  bedclothes. 


118  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    On  what  should  a  fever  patient  never  be  laid? 

On  a  feather  bed. 
Q.    What  pillow  should  be  used? 

If  it  can  be  secured,  a  small,  rather  hard  pillow  is  the 
best. 

Q,    For  what  reason? 

Because,  with  a  large,  easily  compressed  feather  pillow 
the  head  is  kept  too  warm,  and  sinking  into  it  the  air  is  kept 
out  from  the  lungs. 

Q.    How  should  the  pillows  be  arranged? 

In  such  a  way  that  the  chest  is  expanded,  the  shoul- 
ders being  supported. 

Q.    How  often  should  the  entire  bo:ly  be  sponged? 

As  often  as  ordered  by  the  doctor,  which  is  generally 
every  two  hours  when  having  high  temperature,  with  cold  or 
warm'water,  as  ordered,  and,  if  ordered,  adding  about  one 
ounce  of  alcohol  to  a  basin  half  full  of  water. 
Q.    What  must  be  washed  carefully? 

All  the  creases  in  the  skin,  particularly  those  parts 
which  are  soiled  by  the  excretions. 

Q.    What  will  be  the  consequence  if  this  is  neglected  for 
awhile? 

It  cannot  be  made  good  by  after-care;  bed  sores  are 
apt  to  form,  where  there  is  no  absolute  cleanliness. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  on  account  of  the  frequent  invol- 
untary passages  from  the  bowels? 

A  careful  watch  must  be  kept  both  of  the  person  and 
clothing,  that  everything  may  be  kept  clean  and  dry. 

Q.    What  precautions  must  be  taken  after  the  body,  bed 
and  clothing  are  cleaned? 

Precautions  to  keep  them  so. 
Q.    What  should  be  used  for  this  reason? 

A  draw  sheet  across  the  bed.  They  are  easily  removed 
and  changed  without  exhausting  the  patient's  strength. 
Q.    What  can  be  done  besides  the  general  sponging? 

The  face  and  hands  should  be  sponged  repeatedly  dur- 


The  Nursing  Sister.  119 

ing  the  day.     A  small  piece  of  ice  can  be  put  in  a  sponge  and 
passed  across  the  forehead  now  and  then. 
Q.    What  can  be  laid  across  the  temples? 

A  soft,  thin  cloth  folded  once  and  dipped  in  some  evap- 
orating lotion,  like  alcohol  and  water,  which  must  be  changed 
before  it  becomes  warm. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  does  this  serve? 

For  a  double  purpose;  it  is  cleanly  and  has  a  tendency 
to  lower  the  fever  which  consumes  the  patient's  strength. 

Q.    What  will  form  across  the  lips  and  teeth  in  neglected 
casesof  fever? 

A  black  crust. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  prevented? 

By  washing  the  mouth,  teeth  and  tongue  with  cool 
water  or  a  mouth-wash  and  a  soft  rag. 

Q.    What  can  be  used  if  the  skin  is  broken? 

Add  to  a  tumbler  of  water  a  teaspoonful  of  chlorate 
of  potash  or  borax. 

Q.    What  will  answer  the    purpose  if   the  skin  is  not 
broken? 

Salt  water  or  a  slice  of  lemon  rubbed  across  the  teeth 
and  about  the  mouth. 

Care  of  the  Room. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  besides  the  attention  given 
to  the  patient  and  bed? 

That  the  room  and  the  furniture  are  scrupulously 
clean;  no  soiled  towels,  napkins  or  other  articles  must  be 
allowed  hanging  about. 

Q.    What  should  be  kept  in  the  bed-pans  or  vessels? 

Two  or  three  ounces  of  carbolized  water  or  some  other 
disinfectant. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  as  soon  as  they  are  removed  from 
the  bed? 

A  clean  cloth  must  be  thrown  over  them,  covering  the 
handle  and  all. 


120  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  will  this  prevent? 

This  prevents  the  air  of  the  room  from  being  contami- 
nated and  the  nurse  from  breathing  poisonous  exhalations. 
Q.    By  what  is  typhoid  fever  more  readily  conveyed? 

By  these  exhalations,  more  so  than  in  any  other  way. 
Q.    How  often  should  the  night-clothes  be  changed? 

Night  and  morning;  the  sheets  twice  or  more. 
Q.    What  may  be  done  for  the  patient's  comfort? 

If  his  strength  permits  and  a  second  bed  can  be  had, 
he  may  be  lifted  into  a  fresh  bed  for  the  night,  while  the  warm 
and  damp  mattress  in  use  all  day  should  be  carried  out  and 
aired. 

Q.    May  a  typhoid  patient  get  up  out  of  bed? 

Never  allow  tne  patient  to  get  up,  not  even  the  first 
week. 

Q.    What  should  be  used  to  avoid  exertion? 

Bedpan  and  urinal. 
Q.    To  what  is  a  fever  patient  disposed? 

To  slide  down  from  the  pillows  and  to  lie  in  the  same 
position  all  the  time. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  do  to  prevent  this? 

She  must  keep  a  close  watch  against  this,  keep  him 
well  on  the  pillows,  turn  him  from  one  side 'to  another,  put- 
ting a  pillow  snug  to  his  back  to  support  him. 

Q.    For  what  reason  are  these  changes  so  necessary? 

Because  long  lying  in  one  position  will  make  the  spot 
on  which  pressure  comes  tender,  and  bed  sores  may  form. 
Q.    What  must  be  examined  every  day? 

The  back,  hips  and  heels,  and  if  any  redness  occurs, 
bathe  the  place  four  times  a  day  with  diluted  alcohol  or  some 
other  solution,  dust  with  powder  and  use  air-cushions. 

Q.    Whose  directions  must  be  followed  in  giving  medicine? 

The  doctor's. 
Q.    What  must  be  reported? 

Any  change  of  symptoms  observed  following  the  dose 
and  the  same  with  stimulants. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  121 

Q.    What  will  sometimes  be  needed  in  feeding  the  patient'? 
All  the  ingenuity  of  the  nurse  to  make  the  patient 
take  the  milk,  beef  tea,  etc. 

Q.    How  is  beef  tea  generally  more  readily  taken? 

Cold,  and  when  there  is  a  tendency  for  diarrhoea  it 
should  never  be  given  warm. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  given  in  extreme  cases? 

Beef  tea  of  the  strongest  kind  and  milk  punch  alter- 
nately at  intervals  of  an  hour,  half-hour  or  less,  as  the  doctor 
directs. 

Q.    What  should  a  sister  never  do  when  brandy  or  wine 
are  ordered? 

She  should  never  follow  her  own  judgment  as  to  the 
quantity,  but  should  request  the  doctor  to  say  how  much  of 
either  he  wishes  to  be  given  in  twenty-four  hours. 
Q.    How  can  it  be  given? 

It  can  either  be  given  as  a  cool  drink  with  ice  water, 
or  in  milk,  in  broken  doses  during  the  specified  time. 

Q.    In  what  case  is  a  sister  justified  to  give  the  patient  on 

her  own  responsibility  a  tablespoon  of  brandy  in  hot  water? 

In  case  of  faintness,  or  exhaustion  after  purging,  or  a 

chilly  sensation  that  cannot  be  relieved  by  extra  blankets  or 

hot  bottles. 

Q.    How  much  cold  water  may  be  given  with  safety? 

If  «the  physician  has  no  objection,  as  much  cold  water 
can  be  given  as  the  patient  wants,  but  it  must  have  been  pre- 
viously boiled  and  cooled. 

Q.    What  is  this  needed  for? 

It  is  needed  to  supply  the  waste  through  perspiration. 
Q.    By  what  may  cold  water  be  substituted  if  there  is 
trouble  with  the  bowels? 

By  arrow  root,  or  barley,  or  toast  water  iced. 
Q.    What  must  be  given  to  patients  who  are  too  ill  to  ask 
for  a  drink? 

Cooling  drinks  must  be  given  them  frequently  in  a 
feeding-cup. 


122  The  Nurstng  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  a  sister  never  miss  regarding  this? 

Never  let  the  patient  go  without  them. 
Q.    What  is  refreshing  to  the  patient? 

Small  bits  of  ice,  but  they  do  not  take  the  place  of 
water. 

Q.    What  is  the  sister  to  do  if  the  patient  is  delirious? 
Never  leave  the  patient  alone;  never  contradict  what 
he  may  say;  accompany  him  to  the  moon  if  he  wishes  it. 
Q.    How  should  she  never  speak  to  him? 

Never  loud;  he  is  not  deaf  because  he  is  delirious. 
Q.    How  can  he  be  kept  in  bed? 

If  there  is  no  other  way,  lay  a  long,  folded  draw  sheet 
across  the  blanket  and  tack  it  well  under  the  mattress  on 
either  side. 

Q.    Is  a  delirium  always  alarming? 

A  light  delirium  need  not  to  excite  alarm,  unless  it  is 
of  the  low  muttering  kind,  accompanied  with  pulling- at  the 
bed  clothes  or  reaching  up  into  the  air  after  some  imaginary 
object. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  dreaded? 

Confusion  of  thoughts,  loss  of  recollection  of  recent 
events,  anxious  look  or  a  wandering  and  vacant  eye. 
Q.    What  are  some  of  the  dangers  of  the  fever? 

Internal  hemorrhage,  diarrhoea,  perforation  of  the 
bowels  and  pneumonia.  « 

Q.    What  may  sometimes  occur  during  the  second  week 
or  later? 

Death  may  occur  simply  from  incaution  on  the  part 
of  the  nurse  in  permitting  the  patient  to  sit  up  or  make  some 
seeming  harmless  exertion,  or  to  eat  harmless  food  in  too 
large  quantities. 

Q.    What  may  not  be  indulged  in  convalescence? 

The  patient's  appetite. 
Q.    What  kind  of  food  may  be  given? 

Nourishing  food  in  small  quantities,  frequently,  once 
in  two  hours,  if  necessary. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  123 

Q.    When  may  solid  food  be  given'? 

Not  until  distinctly  permitted  by  the  doctor. 
Q.    What  is  one  of  the  accompaniments  of  typhoid  fever? 
Dyspepsia,  hence  more  food  than  can  be  assimilated 
at  one  time  is  very  dangerous. 

Q.    What  must  at  once  be  reported  to  the  doctor? 

A  moderate  indigestion,  a  trifling  diarrhoea,  a  slight 
nausea. 

Q.    For  what  reason  are  they  so  dangerous? 

Because  any  violent  straining  may  induce  perforation 
of  the  bowels  at  points  of  ulceration. 

Q.    What  must  be  advanced  before  going  outdoors  is  per- 
mitted? 

The  strength  must  be  considerably  advanced,  but 
fresh  air  should  be  procured  as  much  as  possible. 

Q.    What  are  the  life  saving  agents  in  typhoid  fever? 

Careful  nursing  and  diet  regulation. 
Q.    What   does    undiluted    milk    do  upon  entering  the 
stomach? 

It  becomes  almost  solid. 
Q.    Why  should  stools  be  carefully  examined? 

To  see  whether  there  are  any  curds  of  milk  in  it. 
Q.    How  much  milk  is  given  for  exclusive  milk  diet? 

One  to  three  quarts  in  twenty-four  hours. 
Q.    How  are  natural  milk  stools? 

They  are  not  too  hard,  without  coagular  of  casein  or 
flakes  of  fat. 

Q.    What  indicates  that  milk  is  well  digested? 

A  clean  tongue  and  a  soft  abdomen. 
Q.    What  does  the  reverse  of  these  symptoms  suggest? 
That  the  milk  is  supplied  in  too  large  a  quantity  or 
that  it  is  not  being  digested. 

Q.    What  must  therefore  be  done? 

Three  things:  1.  The  quantity  must  be  reduced.  2. 
The  mode  of  administration  must  be  changed.  3.  The  milk 
must  be  prepared  or  pre-digested. 


124  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  much  milk  is  believed  to  be  sufficient? 

Four  ounces  given  every  two  to  three  hours. 

The  following  list  may  serve  as  a  guide  when  the 
patient  is  first  permitted  to  take  solid  food: 

First  Day — Chicken  broth,  thickened  with  thoroughly 
boiled  rice;  milk  toast  or  cream  once  a  day. 

Second  Day — Junket,  mutton. broth  and  bread  crumbs, 
with  toast,  a  tender  piece  of  beefsteak  may  be  chewed  but  not 
swallowed. 

Third  Day— A  small  scraped  beef  sandwich,  tender 
sweetbread,  bread  and  milk,  a  soft  cooked  egg  or  baked  apple 
for  supper. 

Fourth  Day — The  soft  part  of  two  or  three  oysters, 
meat  broth,  thickened  with  a  beaten  egg,  cream  toast,  rice 
pudding  or  blancmange  and  whipped  cream. 

Fifth  Day— Scraped  beef  sandwich,  tender  sweetbread, 
bread  and  milk,  a  poached  egg,  gelatine. 

Sixth  Day — Mush  and  milk,  scrambled  egg,  chicken 
jelly,  bread  and  butter. 

Seventh  Day — Small  piece  of  tenderloin  steak  or  a  lit- 
tle breast  of  boiled  chicken,  bread  and  butter,  boiled  rice, 
wine  jelly,  sponge  cake  and  whipped  cream. 

Eighth  Day — A  slice  of  rare  tender  roast  beef,  a  thor- 
oughly baked  mealy  potato,  served  with  butter  or  mashed  with 
cream. 

Ninth  Day — A  little  broiled  fresh  fish  for  breakfast, 
beefsteak  at  dinner,  rice,  macaroni,  eggs,  sago,  rice  or  milk 
pudding,  a  baked  apple. 

Tenth  Day — Mush  and  milk,  a  squab  or  breast  of  a 
partridge  or  roast  chicken,  other  food  as  before. 

For  the  next  four  or  five  days  the  patient  may  select 
articles  from  the  previous  days,  so  that  three  good  meals  are 
taken  a  day,  besides  three  or  four  glasses  of  milk  taken  be- 
tween meals. 

The  following  diet  list  will  serve  as  a  general  guide 


The  Nursing  Sister.  125 

for  feeding  convalescents  from  fevers  of  ordinary  severity  in 
which  special  lessons  of  the  alimentary  canal  are  not  present: 

First  Day. 
Breakfast— Poached  egg  on  toast,  cocoa. 
Lunch — Milk  punch. 

Dinner — Raw  oysters,  cream  crackers,  and  if  desired, 
light  wine. 

Lunch— Cup  of  hot  broth. 

Supper — Milk  toast,  wine  jelly  and  tea. 

Second  Day. 

Breakfast — Soft  cooked  egg,  milk  punch,  coffee  with 
sugar  and  cream. 

Lunch— Cup  of  soft  custard. 

Dinner— Strained  soup,  sippets  of  toast,  a  little  barley 
pudding  with  cream,  sherry  wine  if  desired. 

Lunch — Milk  punch. 

Supper— Water  toast,  buttered,  wine  jelly,  tea. 

Third  Day. 

Breakfast — Scrambled  egg,  cream  toast,  cocoa. 

Lunch — Cup  of  hot  chicken  broth. 

Dinner— Chicken  or  broiled  steak,  bread,  light  wine 

and  a  little  tapioca  pudding. 

Lunch — An  eggnogg. 

Supper— Buttered  dry  toast,  baked  apple  and  cream, 
tea. 

Fourth  Day. 

Breakfast — An  orange,  oatmeal  with  cream  and  sugar, 
poached  egg  on  toast,  baked  potato,  cocoa. 

Lunch— Cup  of  soft  custard. 

Dinner — Soup,  a  small  piece  of  beefsteak,  creamed  po- 
tatoes, baked  custard,  coffee. 

Lunch — One  cup  of  chicken  broth  with  rice. 

Supper — Raw  oysters,  crackers,  graham  bread  toasted, 
wine  jelly,  tea. 


126  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Fifth  Day. 
Breakfast — An  orange,  coffee,  oatmeal  with  cream  and 
sugar,  broiled  mutton-chop,  toasf. 

Lunch — One  cup  of  mulled  wine. 
Dinner— Chicken  soup,  bread,  creamed  sweetbreads, 
baked  potato,  snow  pudding,  cocoa. 
Lunch — An  eggnogg. 

Supper— Buttered  dry  toast,  orange  jelly,  sponge  cake 
and  cream  tea. 

Typhus. 
Q.    What  is  typhus  fever? 

It  only  resembles  typhoid  by  name;  it  is  a  highly  con- 
tagious disease,  associated  with  overcrowding  and  bad  venti- 
lation. 

Q.    How  does  the  attack  usually  begin? 

With  a  chill,  followed  by  a  temperature  of  105  degrees 
or  more,  with  violent  headache  and  extreme  prostration. 
Q.    When  does  the  rash  appear? 

Toward  the  end  of  the  first  week,  showing  on  the  sides 
of  the  abdomen,  dirty  pink  or  purplish  spots. 
Q.    How  is  the  rash  called  when  abundant? 

Mulberry  rash. 
Q.    How  long  does  each  spot  persist? 

Until  the  disease  terminates  in  convalescence  or  death. 
Q.    What  is  especially  affected? 

The  head;  violent  delirium  will  occur. 
Q.    How  does  the  disease  run? 

Usually  fourteen  days,  after  which  the  amendment 
will  be  abrupt,  as  the  onset  was. 

Q.    What  must  be  saved  in  every  possible  way? 

The  patient's  strength,  the  aim  being  to  sustain  the 
vital  powers  until  the  fever  abates. 

Q.    What  other  precautions  should  be  kept  up? 

Constant  watch  during  the  delirium;  keep  ice-bag  on 
the  head,  sleeplessness  must  be  relieved,  and  nourishment 
must  be  given,  if  by  force. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  127 

Q.    What  is  especially  important? 

Ventilation,  because  much  poison  is  thrown  off  from 
lungs  and  skin. 

Scarlet  Fever  or  Scarletina. 

Q.    How  does  scarlet  fever  usually  begin? 

With  headache,  nausea,  sore  throat,  pains  in  limbs, 
rapid  pulse  and  a  rise  of  temperature  of  100  to  104  or  105 
degrees. 

Q.    At  what  time  does  the  rash  appear? 

Generally  the  second  day,  beginning  at  the  neck  and 
chest  and  extending  over  the  whole  body. 
Q.    Where  is  it  the  deepest?. 

On  the  neck,  the  back,  the  outer  side  of  the  limbs,  the 
joints,  hands*  and  feet. 

Q.    Of  what  color  are  the  cheeks? 

A  bright  deep  red. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  as  soon  as  the  case  has  been  de- 
clared for  scarlet  fever? 

The  patient  must  be  insolated,  all  precautions  given 
for  infectious  diseases  should  be  observed,  and  every  order  of 
the  physician  carried  out  faithfully. 

Q.    At  what  temperature  should  the  room  be  kept? 

An  even  temperature  of  65  degrees;  if  possible,  a  light 
fire,  and  leave  the  window  down  an  inch  at  the  top. 

Q.    How  and  how  often  should  the  room  be  ventilated 
thoroughly? 

Twice  a  day;  the  windows  should  be  thrown  open  wide 
and  the  air  entirely  changed. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  patient  during  this 
time? 

The  patient  must  be  covered  head  and  all  until  the 
room  is  again  warm. 

Q.    How  often  should  the  patient  be  sponged  or  bathed? 
Two    or    three    times    a    day    with    warm  water  as 
directed. 


128  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken? 

That  he  be  covered  with  a  blanket  during  the  bathing. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  after  the  tath? 

The  patient  should  be  dried  quickly  with  warm,  soft 
towels,  without  rubbing,  and  as  the  patient  lies  in  bed  rub 
the  entire  surface  of  the  body  with  vaseline  or  whatever  oil 
the  physician  orders. 

Q.    How  should  the  bed-clothing  be? 

It  should  be  warm  but  never  heavy.  Keep  the  feet 
and  legs  warm. 

Q.    What  food  is  generally  given? 
Gruel,  simple  broth,  milk,  etc. 
Q.    What  will  the  doctor  order  when  there  is  exhaustion 
from  the  fever? 

-  Strong  and  stimulating  nourishment. 
Q.    May  the  patient  have  cold  water? 

Cold  water  and  weak  lemonade  may  be  given  freely, 
unless  the  doctor  orders  differently. 

Q.    Where  must  the  patient  be  kept? 

Strictly  in  bed;  he  has  to  use  the  bed-pan  and  urinal. 
Q.    What  must  be  guarded  against  especially? 

Against  any  check  of  perspiration. 
Q.    What  should  be  put  on  the  patient  if  he  is  propped  up 
in  bed? 

A  small  jacket  or  shawl  over  the  night-dress,  but  use 
nothing  that  cannot  be  washed. 

Q.    What  should  be  noticed  at  night  or  when  the  patient 
is  sleeping? 

The  breathing,  whether  it  is  even  and  deep  or  short 
and  labored,  as  if  there  was  trouble  with  the  air-passages. 
Q.    What  must  be  particularly  watched? 

The  condition  of  the  excretions,  especially  the  urine. 
Should  it  become  scanty  or  smoky  colored,  report  it  at  once 
to  the  doctor. 

Q.    What  besides  this  should  be  observed? 

Whether  there  is  a  free,  though  seemingly  harmless, 


The  Nursing  Sister.  129 

discharge  from  the  nose.    This    may    indicate  diphtheritic 

trouble.    Or  whether  there  is  any  swelling  about  the  limbs. 

Q.    What  must  be  reported  to  the  doctor? 

Every  change  of  temperature,  pulse,  secretions  and 

other  symptoms. 

Q.    What  is  the  peeling  off  process  called? 

Desquamation. 

Q.    At  what  time  does  this  generally  take  place? 

About  the  fifth  day  after  the  rash  appears. 

Q.    May  the  patient  get  up  during  this  process? 

Not  until  this  process  is  completed. 

Q.    Should  the  warm  baths  be  kept  up? 

They  should  be  kept  up,  but  the  least  chilliness  must 

be  guarded  against  and  the  temperature  of  the  roam  now 

allowed  to  be  70  degrees. 

Q.    How  long  should  the  patient  be  kept  in  the  room? 

Two  weeks  after  the  peeling  is  over.    He  should  be 

separated  not  less  than  one  month  from  the  commencement 

of  the  disease. 

Q.   What  care  must  be  taken  when  the  patient  goes  out 

the  first  time? 

That  he  is  well  wrapped,  with   feet  and  hands  pro- 
tected. 

Q.    What  maladies  are  likely   to  accompany  or    follow 
scarlet  fever? 

Dropsy,  malignant  sore  throat,  kidney  diseases,  weak- 
ness of  the  lungs,  pleuresy  and  many  others. 

Smallpox. 
Q.    What  is  used  as  a  protection  against  smallpox? 

Vaccination. 
Q.    How  do  smallpox  generally  begin? 

With  a  chill,  followed  by  a  quick  pulse  and  high  tem- 
perature of  104  to  106  degrees. 

Q.    Which  are  the  distinctive  symptoms? 

Severe  pain  in  the  back  and  pit  of  the  stomacn.  which 
increases  on  pressure. 
—9 


130  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  do  these  troubles  sometimes  do? 

They  abate  for  awhile,  but  they  gradually  increase, 
and  are  at  their  height  on  the  third  day,  or  twelve  days  after 
exposure  to  the  contagion. 

Q.    How  does  the  eruption  begin  about  this  time? 

It  begins  as  small  pimples,  spreading  from  the  face  to 
the  neck,  breast  and  back,  and  then  to  the  limbs  and  extrem- 
ities. 

Q.    When  does  the  pain  pass  off'? 

When  the  eruption  is  developed  and  the  patient  feels 
pretty  well. 

Q.    When  does  the  feeling  of  discomfort  increase  again? 
As  soon  as  suppuration  begins,   and  the  secondary 
fever,  sometimes  announced  by  a  chill,  comes  on. 
Q.    How  high  does  the  temperature  rise? 

To  105  or  to  106  degrees. 
Q.    What  goes  hand  in  hand  in  smallpox. 

The  fever  and  eruption. 
Q.    AVhen  does  the  patient  sometimes  feel  relieved? 

After  the  pimples  appear,  but  the  patient  is  to  be 
treated  as  a  very  sick  person  through  the  whole  course  of  the 
disease. 

Q.    How  should  the  room  be  kept? 

It  should  be  kept  dark  on  account  of  the  eyes,  which 
suffer  a  great  deal.- 

Q.    How  should  the  room  be  ventilated? 

It  should  be  fully  ventilated  with  an  open  window. 
Q.    How  high  should  the  temperature  of  the  room  be? 

Sixty  to  sixty-five  degrees. 
Q.    How  should  the  bed  covering  be? 
Sufficiently  warm,  but  not  heavy. 
Q.    What  should  be  given  for  food  and  what  for  drink? 
Give  broths,  gruel,  milk,  etc.,  as  food,  and  cold  water 
or  lemonade  for  drinks. 


The  Nursing  Sisteij.  131 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  cold  compresses  are  ordered'? 
They  must  be  rewetted  by  pouring  fresh  water  over 
the  cloths  frequently. 

Q.    What  is  prescribed  to  prevent  scars? 

Keeping  the  face  oiled,  or.  better  than  this,  have 
strips  of  linen  spread  with  simple  cerate  and  fitted  carefully 
over  the  face. 

Q.    How  should  the  ordered  application  be  used? 

It  must  be  used  faithfully  and  the  patient  is  to  be 
prevented  from  scratching  the  surface,  even  in  his  sleep. 
Q.    What  is  generally  necessary  to  accomplish  this? 

To  tie  the  hands  up  in  soft  cloths,  so  that  at  least  the 
nails  may  be  kept  from  the  face. 

Q.    What  can  be  done  if  the  patient  is  delirious  or  the 
irritation  becomes  unbearable? 

The  only  thing  to  do  is  to  use  a  shirt  with  very  long 
sleeves,  which  you  tie  together  at  the  wrist. 

Dangers  in  the  Disease. 
Q.    What  must  be  carefully  watched  and  promptly  re- 
ported? 

All  symptoms,  any  lightheadedness,  sudden  exhaus- 
tion, difficulty  in  swallowing,  the  manner  of  breathing,  sound 
of  the  voice,  etc. 

Q.    What  complication  may  occur? 

Pleurisy  and  laryngitis. 
Q.    When  may  a  sister  give  wine— why— or  brandy  with- 
out waiting  for  orders  in  a  smallpox  case? 

If  during  the  decline  of  the  eruption,  or  while  the  sec- 
ondary fever  is  in  progress,  a  clammy  sweat  appears  or  a  sud- 
den sinking  of  tremor. 

Q.     In  what  case  should  hot  brandy  or  hot  spiced  drinks 
be  given? 

If  the  pustules  sink  or  change  to  a  purple  color. 


132  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Disinfecting  and  Insolating. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  the  room  has  a  carpet? 

It  should  be  taken  up  the  first  day  that  the  disease  is 
recognized. 

Q.    Should  the  mattresses  be  changed? 

No,  for  they  have  already  become  infected. 
Q.    What  directions  should  be  followed  about  insolating 
the  room? 

The  door  must  be  locked,  and  no  communications  had 

with  the  room,  except  through  an  adjoining  one  where  the 

window  is  down  from  the  top  and  a  fire,  if  possible,  lighted. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  done  when  food,  medicine,  clothing, 

etc.,  are  required? 

The  request  for  them  should  be  written  on  a  slate, 
which  should  be  hung  or  placed  where  it  can  be  read  without 
taking  it  down. 

Q.    Where  should  the  ordered  things  be  brought? 

To  some  place  agreed  upon,  and  left  for  the  nurse  to 
carry  them  into  the  room, 

Q.    What  kind  of  bed-clothing  should  be  used? 

The  oldest  kind,  so  that  they  may  be  destroyed  after 
the  patient  got  well  or  died. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  clothing  that  is  changed? 
They  must  be  thrown  into  a  disinfectant,  which  should 
be  standing  in  a  vessel  in  the  adjoining  room. 
Q.    Wherein  can  it  best  be  kept? 

In  a  wooden  tub,  which  can  be  burned  afterwards. 
Q.    How  long  should  the  clothing  soak? 

Twelve  hours. 
Q.    What  can  be  done  after  this? 

They  can  be  dipped  out  with  a  stick  and  put  into 
hot  soap  suds,  made  with  carbolic  soap,  and  after  standing 
two  hours  may  be  wrung  out  with  safety  and  made  into  bun- 
dles, tossed  out  of  a  window  in  the  yard  and  dried  in  the  sun. 
Q.    Who  can  iron  the  clothes  then? 

Anybody  can  iron  them  with  safety. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  133 


Q.    Who  should  do  the  first  soaking  and  rinsing? 

The  sister,  both  her  own  and  the  patient's  clothing 

and  bedding. 

Q.    Who    should    handle    the    articles    used    about    the 

patient? 

Only  those  who  are  engaged  with  the  case. 
Q.    How  should    a    sister    protect    herself    against  this 

disease? 

By  vaccination,  cleanliness  of  clothing,  by  good  food, 
sufficient  rest,  being  relieved  by  an  assistant,  if  possible. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  when  it  is  necessary  for  her  to 
leave  the  house? 

A  suit  of  fresh  clothing. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  matresses  after  the 
disease? 

They  should  be  rolled  up  and  sent  to  the  pest  house  or 
burnt. 

Q.    Is  this  disease  very  contagious? 

Yes;  there  is  no  disease  more  contagious  than  small- 
pox. It  has  been  conveyed  by  infected  articles  carelessly  put 
aside,  opened  years  afterwards. 

Chickentox. 

Q.    Is  chickenpox  a  dangerous  disease? 

No;  it  is  a  harmless  but  very  annoying  trouble. 
(Q.    By  what  is  it  generally  accompanied? 

By  a  little  fever  and  general  discomfort. 
Q.    Where  should  the  patient  be  kept? 

In  the  house  and  away  from  other  children? 
Q.    How  should  the  air  be  in  the  room? 

Fresh,  and  the  temperature  of  the  room  should  be 
kept  even  at  65  to  70  degrees. 

Q.    What  kind  of  food  should  be  given  the  first  few  days? 

Such  as  broth,  gruels  and  milk. 
Q.    At  what  time  does  the  eruption  appear? 

On  the  first  to  the  third  day. 


134  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Where  is  it  the  thickest? 

On  the  back  and  chest. 
Q.    How  should  the  clothing  be? 

Loose,  so  there  be  no  irritation  from  rubbing. 
Q.    How  long  does  the  trouble  generally  last? 

It  will  be  over  in  two  weeks  or  less. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  room  afterwards? 

It  must  be  well  cleaned  and  the  mattresses  sunned. 

Measles. 

Q.    How  does  this  disease  begin? 

It  begins  like  a  severe  catarrh,   with  a  redness  and. 
tenderness  of  the  eyes,  the  light  being  painful  to  them. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  sometimes  accompanied? 

By  a  croupy  cough. 
Q.   To  what  degree  does  the  temperature  rise? 

To  101  or  to  102  degrees,  and  the  rash  appears. 
Q.    When  and  where  does  the  rash  appear? 

On  the  third  or  fourth  day,   commencing  about  the 
mouth  and  eyes,  quickly  spreading  over  the  whole  body. 
Q.    When  does  the  disease  generally  pass  off? 

If  the  necessary  precautions    are  observed,   in  two 
weeks. 

Q.    How  should  the  room  be  kept? 

Well  ventilated  and  at  an  even  temperature. 
Q.    With  what  should  the  temperature  of  the  room  be 
tested? 

With  a  thermometer  and  not  with  the  feeling. 
Q.    How  often  is  the  child  bathed? 

A  warm  bath  is  given  daily  and  great  care  must  be 
taken  against  getting  chilled. 
Q.    What  food  is  given? 

Simple  foods,  without  solids  for  a  while;  cool  water 
to  drink. 

Q.    How  must  the  room  be  kept  on  account  of  the  eyes?- 
It  should  be  shaded  from  any  bright  light. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  135 

Q.    Where  should  the  patient  be  kept? 

In  bed  as  long  as  there  are  any  indications  of  fever. 
Q.    What  may  exposure  to  draught  bring  on? 

Pneumonia. 
Q.    How  long  should  the  patient  be  kept  in  the  room*? 
As  long  as  there  is  any  trace  left  of  the  measles  ca- 
tarrh. 

Q.    What  does  this  disease  often  bring  on  or  leave  be- 
hind it? 

Pneumonia,  weakness  of  the  lungs,  and  bronchial  ca- 
tarrh. 

Q.    What  should  be  brought  to  the  doctor's  attention  even 
months  after  the  seeming  recovery? 

The  slightest  disposition  to  cough  or  cold. 

Spasmodic  Croup. 

Q.    What  is  this  disease? 

It  is  an  affection  of  the  muscles  of  the  windpipe,  with 
inflammation. 

Q.    Who  is  most  commonly  troubled  with  it? 

Small  children.      Sometimes  it  may  trouble    them 
when  they  are  in  the  twelfth  year  of  their  age. 
Q.    Do  relapses  occur? 

Very  frequently. 
Q.    How  is  the  patient  in  the  intervals? 

He  shows  little  or  no  sign  of  illness. 
Q.    When  do  the  spasmodic  attacks  mostly  occur? 

At  night. 
Q.    How  do  they  occur? 

The  child,  being  put  to  bed  apparently  well,  wakes 
suddenly,  with  a  croupy  cough  and  violent  choking  spell,  sits 
up  in  bed  with  an  anxious  face. 
Q.    How  is  the  breathing? 

Greatly  oppressed. 
Q.    How  long  does  it  take  before  these  symptoms  pass  off? 

About  two  hours  after  treatment  has  commenced. 


136  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  does  treatment  affect  the  patient? 

The  patient  falls  into  a  sleep,  perspiring  freely,  and 
wakes  up  with  but  little  sign  of  the  attack. 
Q.    When  will  this  trouble  probably  recur? 

At  night. 
Q.    How  long  will  it  be  before  it  disappears  entirely? 

From  three  to  eight  days. 
Q.    Why  must  precautions  be  taken  against  simple  spas- 
modic croup? 

Because  it  is  sometimes  followed  by  cappilary  bron- 
chitis, which  in  children  is  an  extremely  dangerous  disease. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  upon  the  first  appearance  of  the 
attack? 

The  doctor  must  be  sent  for. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  until  he  comes? 

Syrup  of  ipecac,  half  a  teaspoonful  to  a  child  under 
one  year,  and  a  teaspoonful  to  an  older  child,  one  and  one-half 
to  a  child  over  two  years. 

Q.    How  often  can  it  be  repeated? 

In  all  cases  it  can  be  repeated  in  twenty  minutes,  if 
no  vomiting  occurs. 

Q.    What  is  the  object  of  giving  the  ipecac? 

To  produce  vomiting,  but  no  violent  retching. 
Q.    Where  must  a  child  be  kept  after  the  attack? 

In  a  room  where  the  thermometer  stands  at  an  even 
temperature  of  TO  degrees,  not  lower  than  65  degrees  at  night. 
Q.    What  must  be  avoided? 

Exposure  to  change  of  temperature  in  passing  through 
entries  or  other  rooms. 

Q.    How  must  the  clothing  be? 

Warm. 
Q.    What  can  be  given  for  food? 

Milk,  gruel  and  broth. 
Q.    How  long  before  the  patient  may  go  outdoors? 

ISTot  before  all  croupy  sounds  in  breathing  are  over; 
that  is  from  three  to  eight  days. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  137 

Q.    What  weather  must  be  avoided  for  croupy  children*? 
Damp  and  windy  weather. 

Membraneous  Croup. 

Q.    Is  this  a  dangerous  disease? 

It  is  a  very  dangerous  and  usually  fatal  disease  of  the 
throat. 

Q.    By  what  is  it  characterized? 

By  an  inflammation  of  the  mucous  membrane  lining 
the  larynx  and  trachea. 

Q.    What  is  found  in  this  mucous  membrane? 

An  effusion  of  fibrin. 
Q.    What  does  this  fibrin  do? 

It  coagulates  on  the  mucous  surface  and  forms  a  false 
membrane? 

Q.    What  mistake  is  sometimes  made  in  the  commence- 
ment of  this  disease? 

It  is  taken  for  the  form  of  simple  croup. 
Q.    How  does  the  child  sometimes  awake? 

It  may  suddenly  wake  with  a  croupy  cough  and 
strangling  fit. 

Q.    What  other  symptoms  do  sometimes  appear? 

All  symptoms  of  a  cold  in  the  head  for  a  day  or  two, 
and  the  trouble  may  pass  for  that  until  the  doctor  is  called 
too  late. 

Q.    By  what  is  the  membraneous  croup  accompanied? 

It  is  accompanied  from  the  first  with  increasing  fever. 
Q.    What  symptoms  follow  the  increased  temperature  in 
membraneous  croup? 

Loss  of   appetite,   thirst,   quick  pulse,   husky  voice, 
gradually  diminishing  to  a  whisper. 
Q.    How  is  the  breathing? 

It  comes  as  a  sort  of  a  whistle,  with  increasing  effort 
and  constant  restlessness. 

Q.    In  what  does  the  nursing  consist? 

It  consists  in  keeping  up  assidiously  whatever  reme- 


138  The  Nursing  Sister. 

dies  are  ordered,  and  sustaining  the  strength  as  long  as  pos- 
sible. 

Q.    How  is  the  atmosphere  of  the  room  to  be? 

Either  moist  or  dry,  as  ordered  by  the  doctor. 
Q.    How  can  you  secure  a  moist  atmosphere  in  a  room? 
It  may  be  secured  by  keeping  a  teakettle  of  water 
boiling  in  the  room  over  a  spirit  lamp  if  there  is  no  other  way. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  is  a  fire  in  the  room  or 
heat  from  a  furnace? 

Sheets  should  be  wrung  out  in  water  and  dried  in  the 
room. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  ordered  to  be  kept  in  the  room? 
Unpainted  tubs  of  water,  and  from  time  to  time  drop 
into  them  lumps  of  quick-lime. 

Q.    From  what  can  a  child  easily  inhale  steam? 

From  a  steam  atomizer  or  kettle. 
Q.    How  can  it  be  introduced? 

It  can  be  placed  so  that  a  funnel  is  put  over  the  child's 
face  without  touching  it. 

Q.    Can  a  sleeping  child  take  the  vapor  this  way? 

Yes:  even  better  than  when  awake. 
Q.    How  should  the  pillows  be  arranged? 

They  must  be  arranged  so  as  to  lift  the  shoulders  and 
expand  the  chest. 

Q.    What  must  never  press  upon  the  child's  chest? 

The  chin. 
Q.    What  kind  of  food  must  be  given? 
Food  of  the  most  nourishing  kind. 
Q.    What  can  be  given  for  nourishment? 

Beef  extract,  milk  punch,  milk  with  the  white  of  an 
egg,  one  egg  to  every  half  a  pint  of  milk  shaken  well. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  as  a  drink? 

Cool  wine- why  or  cold  water  without  ice. 
Q.    May  the  child  be  lifted  up? 

Yes;  it  may  be  lifted  up  to  ease  its  position. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  139 

Q.    May  it  be  taken  out  of  bed'? 

Yes:  it  may  be  lifted  upright  in  the  arms  or  carried 
about  in  the  room. 

Q.    What  must  a  nurse  be  careful  about? 

She  must  be  careful  not  to  inhale  the  breath  or  to  get 
particles  of  membrane  which  may  be  coughed  up  suddenly 
into  the  mouth,  nose  or  eyes. 

Q.    What  is  the  last  resource  taken  in  cases  of  this  kind? 
Tracheotomy,  an  operation  on  the  windpipe,  opening 
a  passage  to  the  lungs  below  the  point  at  which  the  mem- 
brane is  formed. 

Q.    What  is  more  commonly  resorted  to  now? 

Intubation  of  the  lungs. 
Q.    What  is  often  the  result  of  all  these  operations? 

An  unfavorable  result;  a  large  proportion  of  children 
die  in  spite  of  them. 

Q.    What  must  a  sister  get  ready  if  the  operation  is  to  be 
performed? 

A  firm  table,  a  flat  pillow  or  a  sheet  folded  up  small 
to  put  under  the  head,  a  narrow  piece  of  tape,  scissors,  needle, 
strong  thread  or  silk,  towels,  soft  sponges,  tepid  water,  basins- 
and  a  fan. 

Q.    What  must  be  loosened  on  the  patient? 

Everything  about  the  neck. 
Q.    What  will  the  patient  do  if  the  operation  is  success- 
fully performed  and  the  tube  introduced? 

The  patient,  who  for  a  moment  before  was  choking  to 
death,  sits  up,  breathes  freely,  and  all  the  terrible  symptoms 
pass  off  for  awhile. 

Q.    Is  the  danger  then  over? 

By  no  means. 
Q.    What  must  therefore  be  kept  up? 

The  ordered  treatment,  moist  air,  medicine  and  food 
given  regularly. 


140  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  must  above  all  be  taken  care  for? 

To  keep  the  tube  perfectly  clean  and  free  from  the 
membrane,  which  will  be  deposited  in  it. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

The  inner  tube  should  be  removed  from  the  outer  one 
every  hour,  or  at  least  every  two  hours,  and  thrown  into  a 
basin  of  warm  water? 

Q.    What  must  be  done  to  free  the  tube  from  every  parti- 
cle of  the  membrane? 

A  strip  of  soft  linen  must  be  pushed  through  it  with 
a  stick. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  all  the  membrane  found  in 
the  basin? 

It  must  be  saved  for  the  doctor's  inspection. 
Q.    What  must  be  watched  closely? 

The  edges  of  the  wound  and  the  slightest  tendency  to 
ormation  of  membrane  must  be  reported. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  creases  of  the  skin  under 
and  about  the  tape  which  holds  the  tube  in  place? 
They  must  be  oiled  to  prevent  chafing. 
Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken  in  regard  to  the 
mouth  of  the  tube? 

That  it  is  not  obstructed  by  the  clothing  or  bedding 
or  any  particle  of  dust  or  fluff,  and  that  no  drop  of  water  is 
spattered  on  it. 

Q.    How  many  days  will  determine  the  result? 

Four  or  five  days. 
Q.    Is  the  recovery  frequent? 

,     It  is  an  exception,  even  with  the  greatest  care. 
Q.    Why  is  recovery  so  seldom? 

Because  the  membrane  forms  below  the  wound  or  in 
the  lungs  and  suffocation  follows. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  after  recovery  or  death? 

All  precautions  must  be  taken  for  disinfecting  and 
cleaning. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  141 

DlPHTHERITIS. 

Q.    As  what  is  diphtheria  considered? 

As  a  form  of  blood  poison. 
Q.    From  what  does  it  often  result? 

From  imperfect  sewerage. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  accompanied? 

By  formation  of  membrane  on  the  mucous  surface. 
Q.    How  does  the  disease  begin? 

It  begins  like  so  many  others,  with  a  feeling  of  gen- 
eral depression  and  feverishness,  symptoms  of  cold  in  the 
head,  hoarseness,  difficulty  in  swallowing,  stiffness  of  neck 
and  swelling  of  tonsils  and  the  glands  about  the  throat. 

Q.    What  will    follow    these   symptoms  if  diphtheria  is 
present? 

White  patches  of  false  membrane  on  the  tonsils  and 
in  the  back  of  the  throat. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  upon  the  first  suspicion  of  this 
disease? 

The  patient  must  be  insolated,  kept  in  bed  and  no  one 
allowed  in  the  room  except  the  attendant. 

Q.    How  should  the  temperature  and  air  be  kept  in  the 
room? 

The  thermometer  at  65-70  degrees  and  the  room  well 
ventilated. 

Q.    What  may  be  used  as  a  gargle? 

A  saturated  solution  of  chlorate  of  potash. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  to  the  patient  to  drink? 

Strong  beef  tea,  and  until  this  is  ready,  give  the  pa- 
tient as  much  milk  with  the  white  of  an  egg  as  he  can  drink, 
one  egg  to  one-half  a  pint. 

Q.    What  will  these  precautions  probably  save? 

They  will  save  the  patient  from  more  severe  sore 
throat,  and  in  case  of  real  diphtheria  everything  is  done  that 
could  have  been  done  without  further  instruction. 


142  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  must  be  carried  out  strictly? 

All  orders  of  the  doctor  until  the  last  moment,  as  if 
life  depended  upon  the  sister  alone. 

Q.    What  special  precautions  must  be  taken? 

All  precautions  against  the  spread  of  this  contagion. 
Q     What  will  likely  accompany  this  disease  often? 

An  abundant,   clear  discharge  from  the  mouth  and 
nostrils. 

Q.    With  what  should  it  be'  wiped  away? 

With  soft  cloths,  which  are  immediately   burnt,  as 
the  discharges  are  highly  infectious. 

Q.    With  what  should  the  lips  and  chin  be  washed? 

Now   and  then  with  chlorate  of  potash,   and  keep 
them  covered  with  vaseline  or  a  little  oil. 

Q.    For  what  reason  must  the  lips  and  chin  be  treated  in 
this  manner? 

Because  they  are  touched  by  the  discharge. 
Q.    What  should  be  examined  every  day? 

The  skin  must  be  examined  everywhere  and  if  chafed 
it  must  be  treated  the  same  as  the  chin  and  lips. 
Q.    What  kind  of  food  should  be  given? 

Liquid,  concentrated  food,  as  beef  tea,  beef  juice,  egg 
nogg,  etc. 

Q.    What  are  often  ordered  in  this  disease? 

Nourishing  enemas. 
Q.    How  often  should  food  be  given? 

Every  hour,  or  oftener  if  the  strength  is  failing.    Fol- 
low the  doctor's  directions  to  the  letter. 

Q.    What   can    be   given    frequently    if    stimulants  are 
allowed? 

Wine  whey,  given  cold  is  very  refreshing. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  ordered  for  the  throat? 

An  atomizer  or  frequent  swabbing  of  the  throat. 
Q.    What  are  the  greatest  dangers  in  diphtheria? 

The  patient  may  be  choked  by  obstruction  of    the 
throat,  or  paralysis  of  the  heart  may  pre ve  a  fatal  termination. 


The  Nuksing  Sister.  143 

Q.    In  what  position  should  the  patient  be  kept? 

In  a  horizontal  position,  which  must  be  maintained 
for  a  long  time. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  in  convalescence? 

The  patient  must  not  leave  the  bed  or  room  for  any 
purpose,  or  even  sit  up,  until  the  doctor  has  given  permission. 
Q.    What  may  result  from  carelessness  in  this  matter? 

Paralysis  of  the  heart. 
Q.    What  is  not  uncommon  in  convalescence  from  diph- 
theria. 

Sudden  death. 
Q.    What  is  affected  for  a  long  time  afterwards? 

The  throat  and  power  to  swallow,  in  some  cases  by 
partial  paralysis. 

Q.    How  must  a  sister  protect  herself  in  cases  of  diph- 
theria? 

She  must  be  careful  not  to  inhale  the  breath,  and  be 
careful  about  particles  of  mucous  or  membrane  which  may  be 
expelled  by  coughing.  She  must  have  nourishing  food  and 
sufficient  rest. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  sick  room  after  the  re- 
covery or  death? 

The  room  and  everything  that  has  come  in  contact 
with  the  disease  must  be  cleaned  and  disinfected. 

Whooping  Cough. 
Q.    How  does  this  disease  begin? 

With  symptoms  of  an  ordinary  cold. 
Q.    How  soon  is  the  peculiar  whoop  heard? 

Xot  until  after  the  tenth  day. 
Q.    When  are  the  paroxyisms  most  severe? 

At  night. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  child  during  the  spasm? 

It  should  be  lifted  up  and  as  much  fresh  air  given  as 
possible. 


144  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Is  this  disease  dangerous? 

No:  it  is  generally  harmless. 
Q.    What  complications  may  arise  from  it? 

Bronchitis  or  inflammation  of  the  lungs. 
Q.    In  what  does  the  nursing  consist? 

In  regulating  the  diet,  giving  unstimulating  food  and 
avoiding  constipation. 

Q.    Should  the  child  be  allowed  to  go  out  doors? 

,  When  the  weather  is  favorable  as  much  time  as  possi- 
ble should  be  spent  out  doors. 

Q.    How  should  the  temperature  of  the  room  be  kept? 

As  even  as  possible. 
Q.    How  should  the  clothing  be? 

Warm  in  cold  weather,  protecting  arms  and  chest. 
Q.    How  long  does  the  course  of  this  disease  run? 

From  six  to  twelve  weeks. 

Pneumonia. 

Q.    What  is  pneumonia? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  lung  substance. 
Q.    Is  it  a  serious  disease? 

It  is  one  of  the  most  serious  pulmonary  affections. 
Q.    In  what  different  ways  may  it  occur? 

It  may  occur  independently  or  as  a  complication  in 
the  course  of  some  other  disease. 
Q.    What  does  it  affect? 

It  may  affect  one  or  both  lungs,  more  often  the  right 
lung  alone. 

Q.    How  does  the  disease  generally  announce  itself? 

With  a  chill  or  chilly  sensation,  which  may  last  from 
one-half  an  hour  to  one  hour,  with  deep-seated  pain  or  short- 
ness of  breath. 

Q.    What  follows  the  chill? 

A  high  temperature  of  103  to  105  degrees,  with  flushed 
face,  often  on  one  side  only,  headache  and  restlessness. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  145 

Q.    Which  is  the  first  decided  symptom  of  pneumonia? 

Shortness  of  breath. 
Q.    What  must  be  especially  noticed? 

The  expectoration;  a  sputa  cup  should  always  be  used 
and  the  sputa  be  saved  for  the  doctor's  inspection. 

Q.    How  is  the  expectoration  generally  in  the  beginning? 

Scanty  and  clear. 
Q.    When  may  it  be  expected  to  increase  in  quantity? 

After  twelve  to  eighteen  hours. 
Q.    What  character  does  it  assume  by  this  time? 

It  becomes  tough  and  tenacious. 
Q.    What  color  does  it  sometimes  show? 

A  rusty  color  or  streaks  of  blood. 
Q.    How  is  the  cough? 

Short  and  hacking. 
Q.    What  must  be  observed  besides  this? 

The  breathing  during  the  sleep,  whether  the  patient 
feels  pain  when  lying  in  one  position  more  than  in  another. 
Q.    How  is  the  breathing  generally? 

Shallow  and  rapid. 
Q.    What  more  should  be  noticed? 

The  character  and  quantity  of  urine. 
Q.    How  is  the  urine  generally? 

Scanty  and  high-colored. 
Q.    When  does  the  disease  reach  its  height? 

At  the  end  of  the  first  week. 
Q.    What  will  occur  at  the  end  of  the  first  week  in  ordi- 
nary cases? 

The  critical  day,  or  crisis. 
Q.    Are  patients  with  pneumonia  often  delirious? 

Yes,  especially  at  night. 
Q.    What  is  always  the  great  danger  in  this  disease? 

Heart  failure. 
Q.    How  must  the  patient  be  kept  for  this  reason? 

Absolutely  quiet  and  in  bed. 

10— 


146  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient's  strength  be  kept  up? 

By  not  allowing  unnecessary  talkiDg  or  exertion,  and 
by  giving  nourishment  and  stimulants  frequently. 
Q.    What  kind  of  food  is  generally  given? 

Liquid  but  nourishing  food. 
Q.    How  often  should  the  patient  be  fed? 

At  least  every  two  hours,  and  a  little  at  the  time. 
Q.    What  applications  are  sometimes  ordered  in  pneu- 
monia? 

A  counter-irritant,  cotton  jacket,  priessnits  poultice, 
linseed  poultice  or  jacket,  leeches  or  canthos  plaster. 

Q.    How  should  the  temperature  of  the  room  be  kept? 
The  same  durfng  day  and  night— 65  or  70  degrees— and 
as  even  as  possible. 

Q.    What  kind  of  water  is  used  for  bathing? 

Tepid,  unless  ordered  different  by  the  doctor. 
Q.    What  special  precautions  must  be  taken? 

1.  To  guard  the  patient  in  every  way  against  draught. 

2.  Keep  feet  and  legs  warm. 

3.  Never  expose  the  patient  by  throwing  back  the 
covers,  not  even  for  a  moment. 

Q.    How  should    the   patient    be  supported  to  ease  his 
breathing? 

By  pillows  under  his  shoulders. 
Q.    What  must  be  put  around  the  patient  during  this  up- 
right position? 

A  wrap  around  the  shoulders. 

Phthisis  ok  Pulmonary  Consumption. 
Q.    Is  this  disease  fatal? 

It  is  almost  always  fatal  sooner  or  later. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  characterized? 

By  a  morbid  deposit  of  tubercles  in  the  lungs. 
Q.    Will  these  tubercles  nodules  only  attack  the  lungs? 
No;  they  may  also  attack  other  parts  of  the  body  and 
have  a  great  tendency  to  spread. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  147 

Q.    Is  this  disease  infectious? 

Without  doubt. 
Q.    What  will  favor  its  development? 

Exposure,  overwork  and  intemperance. 
Q.    How  do  the  attacks  come  on? 

Either  acute,  terminating1  in  a  few  weeks,  or  chronic, 
lasting  for  several  years. 

Q.    At  what  age  does  it  most  commonly  attack  persons? 

Persons  under  thirty  years  of  age. 
Q.    Which  are  its  most  characteristic  symptoms? 

Cough,  fever,  night  sweats,  spitting  of  blood,  gastric 
derangements,  loss  of  appetite,  gradually  losing  flesh  and  in- 
creasing weakness. 

Q.    What  does  sometimes  occur  during  the  disease? 

Periods  of  apparent  improvement,  but  they  are  rarely 
permanent. 

Q.    From  what  does  the  patient  finally  die? 

From  hemorrhage  or  exhaustion. 
Q.    What  may  sometimes  relieve  the  distressing  symp- 
toms. 

Good  treatment. 
Q.    Is  there  no  remedy  or  treatment  to  arrest  for  sure  the 
progress  of  the  disease? 

It  has  not  been  discovered  yet. 
Q.    What  will  sometimes  exert  a  beneficial  influence  on 
the  patient? 

Change  of  climate. 
Q.   Where  should  the  patient  spend  a  great  deal  of  his 
time  in  case  the  weather  is  pleasant? 
In  the  open  air. 
Q.    What  kind  of  atmosphere  is  the  most  desirable  for 

him? 

A  dry  atmosphere,  with  plenty  of  sun  and  free  from 
wind. 

Q.    What  must  be  avoided  above  all  things? 
Over-crowding  and  defective  ventilation. 


148  The  .Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  diet  should  be  given? 
Liberal  and  nourishing  diet. 
Q.    What  should  be  used  for  the  sputa? 

Always  a  cup,  in  which  a  solution  of  bichloride  should 
be  kept  constantly  and  besides  this  the  cups  should  be  fre- 
quently boiled. 

Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  the  germs  of  the  disease  are  largely  contained 
in  the  expectoration,  and  if  allowed  to  dry  and  evaporate  will 
be  inhaled  by  others. 

Q.    What  precautions  should  be  taken? 

That  dishes,  etc.,  that  are  used  by  consumptives 
should  be  kept  separate  for  them  alone. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  about  clothes? 

That  everything  is  thoroughly  cleaned  and  disinfected 
before  it  is  used  by  anyone  else. 

Pleurisy. 
Q.    What  is  pleurisy? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  serous  membrane  cover- 
ing the  lungs. 

Q.    How  do  the  surfaces  of  the  membrane  become? 

Dry  and  no  longer  slide  easily  over  each  other. 
Q.    What  is  felt  upon  inspiration? 

Acute  pain. 
Q.    How  is  the  cough? 

Short  and  repressed. 
Q.    What  other  symptoms  occur? 

Inability  to  draw  a  long  breath  and  some  elevation  of 
temperature. 

Q.    By  what  are  these  symptoms  sometimes  preceded? 

By  a  sense  of  chilliness? 
Q.    By  what  may  the  pain  be  relieved? 

By  external  applications  of  counter-irritants. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  applied  for  support? 

Strips  of  adhesive  plaster  over  one  side  or  both  sides 
of  the  chest,  and  back. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  149 

Q.    What  may  take  place  if  the  inflammation  continues? 

An  effusion  of  fluid  in  the  pleural  cavity. 
Q.    If  this  fluid  becomes  abundant  upon  what  does  it  act 
embarrassing? 

Upon  the  action  of  the  heart  and  lungs. 
Q.    What  is  generally  necessary  to  relieve  this  condition? 

Aspiration  of  the  fluid. 
Q.    What  do  you  understand  by  aspirating? 

An  operation  which  consists  in  drawing  off  the  fluid 
through  a  hollow  needle  made  for  that  purpose  and  attached 
to  an  aspirator. 

Q.    What  must  always  be  done  with  this  fluid? 

It  must  be  saved  for  examination. 
Q.    What  will  be  found  in  some  cases  in  the  place  of  fluid? 

An  accumulation  of  pus. 
Q.    What  is  this  form  of  pleurisy  called? 

Epyema. 
Q.    What  will  be  necessary  in  this  case? 

A  free  opening  and  a  thorough  draining  of  the  pleural 
cavity. 

Q.    What  may  be  necessary  in  some  cases? 

That  the  cavity  and  tube  be  washed  with  an  anti- 
septic solution  and  the  dressings  changed  as  needed. 

Cholera  Morbus. 
Q.   By  what  is  this  disease  caused? 

By  the  use  of  indigestible  food,  stale  meats  or  fish,  im- 
pure drinking  water,  etc. 

Q.    What  symptoms  occur? 

Vomiting  and  purging  of  liquid  matter  and  bile  in 
quantities. 

Q.    Where  has  the  patient  violent  pain? 

In  the  stomach,  cramps  in  the  legs  and  muscles  of  the 
abdomen,  coldness  and  faintness. 

Q.    To  what  has  the  patient  a  tendency? 
To  collapse. 


150  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  does  the  attack  come  on? 

Suddenly. 
Q.    What  should  not  be  done  at  flrst? 

The  vomiting  and  purging  should  not  be  checked. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  this  would  prevent  nature  from  getting  rid  of 
an  irritant. 

Q.    What  should  be  given  if  the  skin  becomes  cold  and  the 
pulse  feeble? 

A  tablespoon  of  brandy  in  a  wine  glass  of  hot  water. 
Q.    What  may  be  applied  to  relieve  pain  in  the  stomach? 
Mustard  plaster,  which  should  be  mixed  with   hot 
water. 

<c>.    What  other  applications  may  be  used? 

Wring  out  a  flannel  in  hot  water,  sprinkle  turpentine 
over  it  and  apply. 

Q.    What  is  this  application  called? 

A  turpentine  stupe. 
<»>.    What  may  be  the  consequence  if  these  applications 
are  left  on  too  long? 

They  may  blister  and  must  therefore  be  watched. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  are  cramps  in  the  legs? 

They  must  be  rubbed  vigorously. 
Q.    Where  must  the  patient  be  kept? 

In  bed  with  hot  bottles  to  the  feet  if  they  are  cold. 
Q.    Is  cholera  morbus  fatal? 

It  is  seldom  fatal,  but  it  is  prostrating. 
Q.    What  kind  of  food  should  the  patient  take  after  the 
attack? 

Light,  but  nourishing  food. 
Q.    Of  what  may  this  consist? 

Milk  and  rice  gruel,  strong  broth,  beef  tea  and  eggs,  if 
allowed  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    How  should  the  return  to  solid  food  be? 
Gradually. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  151 

<±.    What  will  probably  be  ordered  if  the  bowels  do  not 
move  readily? 

An  enema  of  warm  water  and  oil  of  glycerine. 

Asiatic  Cholera. 
Q.    By  what  is  this  disease  generally  communicable? 

By  the  excretions. 
Q.    By  what  is  this  disease  characterized? 

By  violent  vomiting  and  purging  of  rice,  watery  evac- 
uations, cramps,  extreme  prostrations  and  collapse. 
Q.    How  does  it  usually  commence? 

With  slight  diarrhoea  and  nausea. 
Q.    What  symptoms  appear   soon  if  it  is  really  Asiatic 
cholera? 

Intense  thirst,  restlessness  and  muscular  spasms. 
Q.    How  does  the  pulse  become? 

Rapid  and  weak. 
Q.    How  is  the  temperature? 

It  falls  below  normal. 
Q.    The  skin? 

It  becomes  livid. 
Q.    The  eye-balls? 

Sunken. 
Q.    What  generally  precedes  death? 

A  ghastly  appearance. 
Q.    How  long  is  the  mind  clear? 

Usually  to  the  end. 
Q.    What  is  generally  given  first  to  control  the  purging? 

Opium. 
Q.    Where  must  the  patient  be  kept? 

Insolated,  in  bed  and  warm. 
Q.    In  what  position  should  the  patient  be  kept  in  cholera? 

In  a  recumbent  position,  that  is  flat  on  the  back. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  for  the  intense  thirst? 

Ice  at  liberty,  but  little  water. 


152  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  food? 

Strictly  what  has  been  ordered  by  the  doctor. 
Q.    What  may  become  necessary  to  keep  up  the  strength? 

Nourishing  enemas. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  stools,  vomited  matter  and 
urine? 

They  must  be  disinfected  thoroughly  and  disposed  of 
promptly. 

Q.    What  precautions  must  be  taken? 

All  possible  precautions  against  spreading  the  disease. 

DlARRHCEA. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  signify? 

To  flow  through. 
Q.    By  what  is  this  disease  characterized? 
By  profuse  discharge  from  the  bowels. 
Q.    How  may  the  trouble  be  brought  on?  ■ 

In  various  ways. 
Q.    Which  are  the  commonest  ways? 

Imprudence  in  eating  and  drinking. 
Q.    What  may  produce  the  disease? 

Unripe  fruit,  badly  cooked  vegetables,  impurities  in 
drinking  water,  over-fatigue,  and  sometimes  grief  or  fright. 
Q.    What  will  generally  effect  a  cure? 

Rest  in  bed  and  fasting  entirely  for  one  day. 
Q.    What  will  this  rest  and  fasting  give  to  the  stomach 
and  intestines? 

It  will  give  the  stomach  time  to  get  rid  of  the  irri- 
tating substances  and  the  intestines  a  rest,  by  having  no 
work  to  do. 

Q.    What  may  be  given  if    the    patient  begins  to  feel 
hungry? 

Boiled  rice  and  milk,  corn-starch  gruel  or  arrow  root, 
and  return  slowly  to  solid  food. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  the  trouble  continues  in  spite 
of  this  treatment? 

The  physician  should  be  consulted. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  153 

Dysentery. 

Q.    What  is  this  disease? 

An  inflammation  of  the  mucous  membrame  of  the 

larger  intestines. 

Q.    What  are  the  symptoms'? 

Griping  pain  in  the  abdomen,  bloody  discharges  from 

the    bowels,    constant    desire    to    use    the    night-chair    and 

straining. 

Q.    How  should  the  vessels  be  kept? 

Disinfected. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  evacuations? 

They  must  at  once  be  carried  out  of  the  room. 

Q.    How  should  the  air  be  kept? 

Fresh,  by  free  ventilation. 

Q.    What  should  be  kept  in  the  room? 

Some  disinfectant,  as  chloride  of  lime  mixed  with 
water. 

Q.    How  much  fluid  shall  be  given  if  enemas  are  ordered? 

Not  more  than  four  or  five  ounces  at  a  time. 
Q.    What  should  be  put  around  the  abdomen? 

A  wide  flannel  bandage. 
Q.    How  shall  the  patient  be  kept? 

Flat  on  his  back  and  perfectly  quiet,  until  all  traces 
of  the  disease  are  gone. 

Q.    What  food  is  given? 

Boiled  beef  and  cooled,  never  too  hot. 

Intestinal  Colic. 

Q.    By  what  is  this  most  commonly  caused? 

By  constipation  and  flatulence. 
Q.    Of  what  character  is  the  pain? 

It  is  severe  and  griping. 
Q.    In  what  way  is  this  pain  distinguished  from  that  of 
peritonitis? 

That  it  is  relieved  by  pressure,  while  the  latter  is  in- 
creased by  pressure. 


ir>4  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  will  generally  afford  entire  relief? 

A  clearing  out  of  the  bowels. 
<£.    How  is  this  most  safely  accomplished? 

By  enema. 
<J.    What  may  be  helpful  in  relieving  the  pain? 

A  hot  drink,  hot  applications  externally  and  massage 
of  the  abdomen. 

Hepatic  Colic. 

Q.    To  what  is  this  trouble  generally  due? 

To  the  presence  of  a  gallstone  in  the  biliary  duct. 
<t>.    Where  does  an  agonizing  pain  come  to? 

To  the  upper  part  of  the  right  abdomen. 
Q.    What  does  this  pain  produce? 

Faintness,  nausea  and  profuse  perspiration. 
Q.    In  what  case  will  the  attack  subside? 

Only  in  that  case,  that  the  obstructing  stone  passes 
on  into  the  intestine. 

<v>.    What  may  be  used  to  relieve  the  pain? 

Hypodermic  injections  of  morphia  and  hot  fomenta- 
tions sprinkled  with  laudanum. 

Q.    From  what  does  this  attack  result? 

From  a  diseased  condition  of  the  liver. 
Q.    By  what  are  the  attacks  often  followed? 

By  jaundice. 
Q.    By  what  is  jaundice  marked? 

By  a  yellow  tinge  of  the  skin  and  the  whites  of  the 
eyes. 

Q.    What  often  accompanies  jaundice? 

Great  depression  of  spirit,  loss  of  appetite,  nausea  and 
extreme  itching  of  the  skin. 

Gastritis. 

Q.    What  is  gastritis? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  mucuous  membrane  of 
the  stomach. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  155 

Q.    Where  does  this  cause  burning  pain? 

In  the  pit  of  the  stomach. 
Q.    What  other  symptoms  accompany  them? 

Vomiting  on  eating  or  drinking,  and  sometimes  hic- 
cough. 

Q.    How  does  it  affect  the  patient? 

The  patient  is  pale  and  faint,  with  cold  extremities 
and  damp  skin. 

Q.    How  does  the  patient's  skin  become? 

Weak  and  feeble. 
Q.    What  does  especially  cause  him  pain? 

The  movements  of  the  diaphragm,  and  consequently 
the  breathing  is  short. 

Q.    From  what  will  the  patient  suffer  at  times? 

From  tormenting  thirst,  although  the  water  drank  is 
vomited  at  once. 

Q;    By  what  may  the  disease  be  brought  on? 

By  taking  any  substance  into  the  stomach  which  in 
itself  is  poisonous,  or  becomes  so. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  kept? 

At  rest,  absolutely  in  bed. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  as  a  drink? 

Cold  water,  if  it  can  be  retained. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  if  enemas  are  ordered? 

They  must  be  given  gently  and  disturb  the  patient's 
position  as  little  as  possible. 

Q.    What  are  the  general  rules  for  administering  food? 

To  give  the  food  in  small  quantities  frequently. 
Q.    To  what  should  the  diet  be  confined? 

To  milk  diluted  with  lime  water,  two  tablespoonsful 
to  a  half  pint  of  milk. 

Q.    How  should  this  be  commenced? 

(rive  a  teaspoonful  once  in  half  an  hour. 
Q.    When  may  this  be  increased  to  a  dessertspoonful? 
If  the  milk  is  retained  for  two  or  three  hours. 


156  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  be  gradually  increased'? 

The  dose:  lengthen  the  intervals,   until  two  table- 
spoonsful  can  be  taken  every  two  hours. 

Q.    In  what  case  must  the  dose  be  omitted? 

On  the  slightest  feeling  of  nausea  or  belching  of  wind. 
Q.    What  is  always  more  advisable  in  regard  to  food? 

To  shorten  the  intervals  between  the  doses  than  to 
increase  the  dose  suddenly. 

Q.    To  what  food  may  you  gradually  go  from  milk? 

To  thin  gruel,  made  very  smooth,  of  rice  flour,  arrow 
root  or  corn  starch. 

Indigestion  or  Dyspepsia. 

Q.    What  is  indigestion  or  dyspepsia? 

It  may  be  merely  a  slight  functional  disorder  or  a 
symptom  of  a  serious  disease. 

Q.    By  what  symptoms  may  it  be  accompanied*? 

By  pain,  nausea, regurgitation,  flatulence,  palpitation, 
headache,  constipation  or  diarrhoea. 
Q.    What  are  dyspeptics  noted  for? 

For  constantly  studying  their  symptoms. 
Q.    What  is  a  common  cause  of  indigestion? 
Food  in  unsuitable  quality  or  quantity. 
Q.    What  does  often  produce  it? 

Over  fatigue  may  often  produce  it,   but  alcoholism  al- 
ways does  produce  it? 

Q.    Why  can  no  general  rules  be  laid  down  for  treatment 
in  this  disease? 

Because  what  suits  one  case  will  not  suit  another. 
Q.    What  is,  therefore,  first  necessary? 

To  discover  the  cause  of  the  trouble  and  treat  accord- 
ingly. 

Q.    What  is  always  important  for  dyspeptics? 
Exercise  in  the  fresh  air  and  simple  food. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  157 

Peritonitis. 
Q.    What  is  peritonitis? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  membrane  which  lines 
the  abdominal  cavity. 

Q.    By  what  is  it  generally  caused? 

By  wounds  or  diseases  of  the  abdomen, -or  organs  cov- 
ered by  the  peritoneum. 

Q:    What  are  the  symptoms? 

Acute  pain,  with  tenderness  over  the  abdomen,  fever, 
rapid  wiry  pulse,  great  depression,  vomiting  and  constipation 
with  tympanites. 

Q.    What  effects  has  the  disease  upon  the  urine? 

Retention  or  suppression  of  urine. 
Q.    What  is  not  uncommon? 

Delirium. 
Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  kept? 

As  quiet  as  possible  and  not  allowed  to  sit  up  for  any 
purpose. 

Q.    By  what  should  the  bed  clothes  be  supported? 

By  a  cradle. 
Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken  if  applications  or 
fomentations  are  ordered? 

To  make  them  as  light  as  possible. 

Q.    What  nourishment  may  be  given? 

Strictly  according  to  orders  of  the  doctor,  usually 
liquids. 

Q.    What  must  be  kept  warm? 

The  knees  and  feet. 
Q.    What  must  be  watched  in  case  opium  is  ordered? 

The  respirations. 
Q.    What  should  be  daily  looked  after? 

That  the  bowels  are  kept  open. 
Q.    What  should  be  worn  next  to  the  abdomen? 

A  flannel  bandage. 
Q.    What  will  be  a  sure  consequence  of  too  early  an  ex- 
ertion? 

A  relapse. 


158  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Appendicitis. 

Q.    What  is  appendicitis? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  vermiform  appendix. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  usual  y  accompanied? 

By  more  or  less  peritonitis. 
Q.    What  are  the  symptoms  and  what  is  the  treatment? 

Much  the  same  as  peritonitis. 
Q.    What  great  danger  is  always  to  be  feared  in  this  dis- 
ease? 

Perforation  of  the  bowels. 
Q.    How  is  appendicitis  often  treated? 

By  an  operation  of  the  laporatomy. 

Sore  Throat. 

Q.    What  does  a  slight  sore  throat  often  accompany? 

Indigestion,  constipation  and  colds. 
Q.    How  can  a  slight  sore  throat  be  treated? 

Regulate  the  bowels,  eat  light  food  for  a  day  or  so, 
gargle  the  throat  with  a  saturated  solution  of  chloride  of 
potash. 

Q.    Where  should  the  patient  be  kept  and  what  should  he 
avoid? 

He  should  be  kept  in  the  house,  but  avoid  hot,  unven- 
tilated  rooms. 

Q.    What  should  be  used  about  the  throat? 

Cold  water  should  be  used  freely  about  the  throat, 
wring  out  a  towel  in  strong  salt  water  and  rub  the  throat  and 
chest  well. 

B  KONCHITIS . 

Q.    What  is  bronchitis? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  bronchial  tubes. 
Q.    In  what  form  may  it  appear? 

Either  acute  or  chronic. 
Q.    How  does  the  acute  bronchitis  begin? 

It  begins  with  a  heavy  cold,  sometimes  with  a  slight 
chill. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  159 


Q.    What  other  symptoms  appear? 

There  is  a  fullness  in  the  head,  sore  throat  and  gen- 
eral sick  feeling,  with  pain  in  the  chest  and  cough. 
Q.    How  is  the  cough? 

At  first  it  is  dry,  then  it  is  accompanied  by  watery 
sputa,  later  on  it  becomes  tough  (viscid)  and  like  purulent, 

Q,    What  may  arise  in  case  the  dysponea  (difficulty  in 
breathing)  increases? 

High  fever,  rapid  pulse  and  profuse  perspiration. 
Q.    Where  must  the  patient  be  kept? 

In  one  room,  well  aired,  and  at  an  even  temperature 
not  higher  than  68  degrees. 
Q.    What  must  be  secured? 

A  free  action  of  the  skin  and  the  bowels  open. 
Q.    What  may  relieve  the  pain  in  the  chest? 

A  mustard  plaster. 
Q.    What  will  allay  the  cough? 

Steam  inhalation. 
Q.    What  nourishment  should  be  given? 

Plenty  of  light  but  nourishing  food. 
Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken  during  convalescence? 

To  avoid  sudden  changes  of  temperature. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  the  patient  is  very  susceptible  to  chills. 
Q.    What  may  be  looked  for  in  the  majority  of  cases? 

Recovery. 
Q.    How  does  it  prove  sometimes? 

Fatal  or  it  may  assume  a  chronic  form. 
Asthma. 
Q.    What  is  asthma? 

It  is  a  difficulty  in  breathing  (dysponina). 
Q.    By  what  is  it  caused? 

By  a  spasmodic  contraction  of  the  bronchial  tubes. 

Q.    What  is  necessary  for  a  sister  to  know  about  this 

disease? 

The  popular  remedies  in  case  of  emergency. 


f 

160  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Is  this  disease  dangerous? 

It  is  seldom  dangerous  but  always  distressing. 
Q.    What  are  the  symptoms  at  the  time  of  the  attack? 
The  patient  gasps  violently  for  air,  his  expression  is 
anxious,  pulse  feeble,  the  skin  cold  and  pale  or  blue. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  patient? 

His  arms  should  be  elevated  and  all  possible  fresh  air 
given  him. 

Q.    What  may  be  administered  to  the  patient? 

A  teaspoonfulof  Hoffman's  anodyne  and  repeated  after 
half  an  hour  if  the  condition  is  not  relieved. 
Q.    How  long  may  it  last? 

Several  hours. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  generally  concluded? 

By  a  paroxysm  of  coughing  and  a  free  expectoration 
of  mucous. 

Q,    What  else  besides  this  will  often  give  relief? 

Saltpeter  pestelles,  when  burned,  afford  fumes,  which 
may  give  relief  by  inhaling  the  fumes. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  used  for  smoking,  either  in  cigar- 
ettes or  pipe? 

Stamonium. 

Laryngitis. 

Q.    What  is  laryngitis? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  lining  membrane  of  the 
throat,  extending  into  the  larynx. 
Q.    What  may  cause  it? 

Cold  or  local  irritation. 
Q.    What  is  often  associated  with  it? 

Tuberculous  disease. 
Q.    Which  are  the  symptoms? 

Hoarseness  of  voice,  sore  throat,  usually  some  fever 
and  sometimes  difficulty  in  breathing. 
Q.    How  is  it  generally  treated? 

By  steam-inhalions. 


The  Nursing  SrsTER.  161 


Catarrh. 

Q.    What  is  catarrh'? 

It  is  a  cold  in  the  head. 
Q.    What  is  much  responsible  for  the  susceptibility  to 

colds? 

Illy-ventilated  rooms  and  over-heated  houses. 

Q.    Which  are  the  best  preventives? 

Pure  air,  warm  clothing  and  dry  feet. 
Q.    What  will  sometimes  cure  the  cold? 

A  full  dose  of  quinine,  if  taken  in  the  earliest  stage. 
Q.    What  will  often  cut  it  short? 

Ten  grains  of  dovers  powder,  taken  at  bed  time. 
Q.    How  long  does  it  usually  last? 

A  few  days. 
Q.    By  what  may  the  discharge  from  the  nose  be  relieved? 
By  inhaling  through  a  paper  cone  the  vapors  arising 
from  a  solution  of  pulverized  camphor  or  compound  tincture 
of  bezoin. 

Q.    What  is  very  difficult  to  overcome? 

Neglected  cold  after  it  has  gone  into  a  condition  of 
chronic  catarrh. 

Q.    What  may  it  Anally  lead  to? 

To  dangerous  pulmonary  diseases. 
Q.    What  is  a  peculiar  mark  of  chronic  catarrh? 
Strong  and  offensive  odor. 
Dropsy. 
Q.    What  are  some  of  the  symptoms  of  dropsy? 

An  accumulation  of  fluid  under  the  skin  and  in  the 
cavities  of  the  body  and  shortness  of  breath. 

Q.    Where  does  a  large  amount  of  this  fluid  sometimes 
accumulate? 

In  the  peritoneal  cavity. 
Q.    What  will  this  produce? 

Great  distention  of  the  abdomen. 
Q.    With  what  will  it  interfere? 

With  movements  of  the  diaphragm. 


162  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    By  what  must  the  fluid  be  removed? 

By  tapping. 
Q.    What  does  fluid  in  the  connective  tissues  produce? 

It  produces  a  swelling  (oedema). 
Q.    Where  will  this  be  most  marked? 

Where  the  skin  is  lose. 
Q.    What    will    pressure  of  the  finger  make  upon  this 
swelling? 

A  distinct  indention,  which  does  not  immediately  dis- 
appear when  pressure  is  removed. 

Q.    How  is  this  swelling  reduced  sometimes? 

By  tapping  the  skin  with  a  needle. 
Q.    What  is  necessary  after  this  tapping? 

That  the  discharging  fluid  be  absorbed  in  soft  cloths. 
Q.    What  position  can  such  patients  most  easily  acquire? 

Sitting  up  as  straight  as  possible. 
Q.    How  should  the  feet  be  kept  while  sitting  up? 

Elevated. 
Q.    What  food  is  generally  given? 

Mostly  liquids,  no  eggs;  milk  freely. 
Bright's  Disease. 
Q.    What  is  Bright's  disease? 

Several  varieties  of  kidney  trouble. 
Q.    What  is  present  in  the  urine? 

Albumen. 
Q.    From  what  does  the  condition  commonly  described  as 
acute  Bright's  disease  result? 

From  taking  cold,  or  as  a  sequel  of  scarlet  fever,  diph- 
theria or  rheumatism. 

Q.    How  is  the  urine  passed? 

It  is  passed  frequently,  but  diminishes  in  quantity. 
Q.    How  is  the  complexion? 

Waxy. 
Q.    About  what  part  of  the  body  can  a  dropsical  condition 
be  noticed  at  first? 

About  the  eyes  and  feet. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  163 


Q.    What  other  symptoms  may  be  looked  for? 

Headache,  gastric  disorders  and  general  debility. 
Q.    What  are  frequent  complications'? 

Bronchitis  and  heart  disease. 
Q.    What  may  follow? 

Suppression  of  urine,  leading  to  death  by  ura^mic  con- 
vulsions. 

Q.    How  may  the  disease  terminate? 

To  recovery  or  lapse  into  a  chronic  form. 
Q.    What  is  done  to  carry  off  the  waste  product  from  the 
kidneys? 

The  skin  action  is  excited,  the  bowels  are  kept  open 
and  drinks  given  freely. 

Q.    What  are  sometimes  prescribed? 

Hot  air  baths  and  also  skimmed  milk  diet. 
Q.    What  food  can  be  allowed? 

Only  digestible  food  and  given  with  the  utmost  regu- 
larity. 

Q.    What  must  be  especially  avoided? 

All  stimulants,  eggs:  meat,  very  little,  no  pork. 

Renal  Colic. 
Q.    Where  does  the  pain  take  its  origin  in  renal  colic? 

In  the  kidney. 
Q.    Of  what  is  it  generally  the  result? 

Of  a  stone  in  the  kidney  or  ureter. 
Q.    How  is  the  urine? 

It  may  be  retained  or  discharged  frequently,  a  few 
drops  at  a  time. 

Q.    What  does  the  urine  often  contain? 

Blood  or  crystalline  deposit. 
Q.    By  what  can  the  pain  be  relieved? 

Only  by  hypodermic  of  morphine. 
Q.    What  may  sometimes  be  ordered? 

Hot  baths  or  hot  applications. 


1G4  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Nettle  Rash  or  Urticaris. 
Q.    How  does  this  rash  appear? 

It  shows  patches  of  white  spots  on  a  red  ground  on 
various  parts  of  the  body,  with  severe  itching. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  produced? 

By  irritation,  indigestible  food,   by  certain  drugs  and 
even  occasionally  by  strong  emotions. 
Q.    With  what  may  it  be  treated? 

With  applications  of  tincture  of  benzoine  diluted. 

Eczema. 
Q.    What  is  eczema? 

It  is  a  form  of  eruption  very  difficult  to  cure. 
Q.    Is  there  only  one  form  of  eczema? 

No;  there  are  various  forms  of  it,  acute  or  chronic. 
Q.    Which  is  the  most  characteristic  manifestation? 

A  raw  surface,  with  moist  perspiration,   from  broker* 
blisters,  more  or  less  covered  with  dry  crusts. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  before  any  curative  treatment 
will  be  of  service? 

The  crusts  must  be  softened   with  oil  (vaseline)  and 
gently  removed. 

Q.    With  what  may  the  affected  parts  be  cleaned? 

With  soft  potash  soap,   and  then  healing  ointment 
applied. 

Q.    What  should  be  avoided? 

Washing  with  ordinary  soap  and  water,   as  well  as 
scratching  or  any  rubbing. 

Herpes. 

Q.    What  is  this  disease? 

It  is  an  eruption  of  small  blisters,  of  which  there  are 
several  forms. 

Q.    Which  is  the  form  most  generally  known? 

Herpes  zoster  or  shingles. 
Q.    Where  does  it  appear? 

On  the  chest. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  165 

Q.    To  where  doesjt  extend? 

Just  half  way  round  from  the  spinal  column  to  the 
sternum. 

Q.    To  where  is  it  almost  always  confined? 

To  one  side. 
Q.    By  what  is  the  eruption  preceded? 

By  pain  of  a  neuralgic  character. 
Q.    How  long  may  the  pain  continue'? 

Even  some  time  after  the  blisters  have  appeared. 
Q.    What  may  be  done  to  relieve  it? 

Soothing  application  applied. 
Q.    How  long  will  it  take  before  the  disease  will  termi- 
nate? 

It  is  self-limited  and  will  terminate  in  a  few  days 
without  treatment. 

Itch  or  Scabies. 
Q.    To  what  is  this  disease  due? 

To  a  small  animal,  which  burrows  under  the  skin. 
Q.    What  does  it  set  up? 

A  peculiar  irritating  inflammation. 
Q.    Where  does  it  usually  begin? 

Between  the  fingers  and  toes,  but  may  spread  to  other 
parts  of  the  body  and  become  quite  general. 
Q.    With  what  is  it  commonly  treated? 

With  sulphur  baths  and  sulphur  ointment. 
Q.    Is  it  contagious? 

It  is  highly  contagious  and  persons  affected  with  it 
should  be  insolated  until  cured. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  with  their  clothes  afterwards? 
They  should  be  disinfected  by  fumigating  with  sul- 
phur. 

Cerebral  Apoplexy. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  caused? 

By  rupture  of  blood  vessels,  or  an  effusion  of  blood 
anto  the  tissues  of  the  brain. 


166  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    In  what  age  is  it  more  common? 

It  is  more  common  before  forty  years  than  after. 
Q.    How  may  the  attack  come  on? 

Suddenly,  the  patient  falling  to  the  ground  without 
warning,  and  lying  without  sense  or  motion. 
Q.    How  is  the  face,  pulse  and  breathing? 

The  face  is  flushed,  the  pulse   free,  the   breathing 
noisy  as  in  a  deep  sleep. 
Q.    What  may  follow? 

Death  may  follow  at  once  or  the  patient  revives  from 
the  attack. 

Q.    What  may  sometimes  precede  the  attack? 

Warnings,  such  as  a  sudden  sharp  pain  in  the  head,, 
with  confusion  and  dizziness. 

Q.    How  may  the  second  form  of  the  attack  come  on? 

The  patient  slides  to  the  ground,  fainting  and  pale. 
Q.    What  does  the  patient  generally  do? 

He  revives  from  this  condition. 
Q.    But  what  will  generally  happen  after  a  few  minutes? 
The  patient  falls  into  a  stupor  from  which  he  never 
awakes. 

Q.    Which  of  the  two  attacks  is  the  most  serious? 

The  second. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  patient  if  an  attack  in 
the  first  form  occurs,  until  the  doctor  comes? 

He  should  be  put  in  a  half-sitting  position,  shoulders 
and  head  raised,  cold  cloths  applied  to  the  head,  and  every- 
thing tight  about  the  throat  and  body  loosened. 
Q.    How  should  the  room  be  kept? 

Cool  and  quiet. 
Q.    What  is  to  be  done  in  the  second  form? 

The  head  and  shoulders  of  the  patient  are  raised  as  in 
the  first,  but  the  patient's  skin  being  cold,  hot  bottles  should 
be  applied  to  the  legs  and  feet,  and  free  ventilation  given. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  167 


Q.    What  should  be  given  if  it  is  possible  to  make  the 
patient  swallow? 

Fifteen  to  twenty  drops  of  aromatic  spirits  of  am- 
monia in  a  half-glass  of  water,  given  slowly. 

Q.    What  food  is  given  to  the  patient  if  he  recovers  from 
the  attack? 

Unstimulating,  but  nourishing:  no  malt  or  spirits  are 
allowed. 

Q.    How  must  exercise  be  taken? 

Without  heating  the  body. 
Q.    Against  what  must  be  guarded? 

Against  all  exertion  which  flushes  the  face. 
Q.    Is  a  bath  allowed? 

No  hot  or  cold  plunge  bath  is  allowed. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  instead? 

A  tepid  sponging  daily  is  best,  but  the  head  should 
not  be  held  down  over  the  basin. 

Q.    What  must  be  especially  avoided? 
All  bodily  and  mental  excitement. 

Paralysis. 

Q.    By  what  may  it  be  caused? 

By  apoplexy. 
Q.    How  does  it  occur? 

In  several  forms;  either  one  side  of  the  body  is  attacked 
or  the  lower  half. 

Q.    How  does  it  come  on? 

Either  suddenly  or  by  a  gradual  loss  of  motion  or  sen- 
sation, or  of  both  in  one  or  more  parts  of  the  body. 
Q.    What  is  often  the  end  of  paralysis? 

Sudden  death. 
Q.    What  symptoms  do  sometimes  occur? 

Remarkable  rise  of  temperature. 
Q.    To  what  is  there  a  very  marked  tendency  in  this 
disease? 

To  the  formation  of  bed  sores. 


168  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  danger  often  remains  even  if  the  patient  sur- 
vives? 

That  the  attacks  recur  and  the  patient  rarely  revives 
from  more  than  two  or  three  attacks. 

Q.    What  is  often  the  main  cause  of  paralysis? 

Chronic  alcoholism,  poisoning  or  a  sequel  of  some  other 
disease. 

Q.    What  kind  of  diet  is  given  to  the  patient? 

Liberal  diet. 
Q.    What  is  usually  employed? 

Massage  and  electricity. 
Q.    How  must  the  paralyzed  parts  be  kept? 

Warm,  clean  and  free  from  pressure. 
Q.    What  is  often  of  the  utmost  importance  in  all  these 
cases? 

Good  nursing,  much  skill  and  great  patience. 

Neuralgia. 

Q.    What  is  neuralgia? 

It  is  an  acute,  painful  affection  of  the  nerves  without 
inflammation. 

Q.    What  causes  it? 

The  causes  are  various  and  the  treatment  therefore 
different. 

Q.    What  may  be  useful? 
Hot  applications. 

Epilepsy. 

Q.    Among  what  diseases  is  this  classed? 

Among  nervous  diseases. 
Q.    How  does  the  attack  come  on? 

The  patient  apparently  well  the  moment  before,  sud- 
denly falls  to  the  ground,  frothing  at  the  mouth,  and  some- 
times uttering  a  strange  cry. 
Q.    How  is  the  breathing? 

Difficult  and  the  body  convulsed. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  169 

Q.    How  is  the  face? 

Contorted  and  livid,  and  there  is  a  choking  sound  in 
the  throat? 

Q.    How  long  will  these  frightful  symptoms  last? 

They  will  pass  off  in  awhile  and  the  patient  lies  stupid. 
Q.    How  long  does  it  take  before  he  recovers? 

A  few  hours. 
Q.    How  does  the  attack  come  on  in  a  milder  form? 

The  patient  loses  consciousness  for  a  moment,  does 
not  fall,  has  fixed  look  of  the  eye. 

Q.    How  long  is  it  before  he  revives? 

•    Almost  immediately. 
Q.    How  may  it  affect  the  patient? 

The  patient  may  turn  pale  and  slide  down    quietly 
without  making  any  sound;  is  insensible. 

Q.    How  will  the  patient  be  after  he  revives? 

He  is  confused  and  languid  for  the  rest  of  the  day. 
Q.    Do  these  attacks  return  frequently? 

Sometimes  at  shorter  or  longer  intervals:   sometimes 
several  times  a  day. 

Q.    Where  should  the  patient  be  put  if  the  attack  comes? 

In  the  middle  of  the  bed. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  in  case  he  cannot  be  moved? 

He  should  be  left  lying  on  the  floor,  his  head  raised, 
his  clothing  unfastened. 

Q.    What  can  be  done  to  prevent  the  tongue  from  being 
bitten? 

Something  should  be  placed  between  the  teeth. 
Q.    What  may  be  applied  to  the  forehead? 

Cloths  dipped  in  cold  water.  t 

Q.    How  should  the  feet  be  kept? 

Warm. 
Q.    How  should  the  room  be  kept? 

Darkened  and  quiet. 
Q.    How  should  people  live  that  are  liable  to  this  disease? 

Their  manner  of  living  should  be  quiet  and  very  plain. 


170  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  they  avoid  chiefly? 

All  heating  exercise,  or  going  up  and   down   stairs,  or 
doing  anything  that  creates  dizziness. 

Q.    Where  should  they  spend  as  much  time  as  possible? 
In  the  open  air,   and  as  little  as  possible  over  books 
and  in  business. 

Q.    What  should  they  eat? 

Easily  digested  and  nourishing  food,  and  that  slowly. 

Hysteria. 

Q.    What  is  hysteria? 

It  is  the  name  given  to  a  disordered  state  of  the  ner- 
vous system. 

Q.    In  whom  is  it  most  common? 

In  girls  and  young  women,  though   not  entirely  con- 
fined to  them. 

Q.    What  do  these  patients  generally  do? 

They    exaggerate    more  or  less  intentionally    their 
symptoms. 

Q.    But  what  should  be  remembered? 

That  at  the  basis  of  these  imaginative  manifesta- 
tions is  a  real,  though  perhaps  obscure  malady. 
Q,    To  what  may  hysteria  lead? 

To  insanity. 
Q.    What  are  the  common  symptoms? 

A  sensation  as  a  ball  in  the  throat,  a  dry  cough,    very 
abundant  and  light  colored  urine,  flatulence. 
Q.    What  does  sometimes  occur? 

Neuralgia,  local  paralysis,  contraction  of  the  joints 
and,  loss  of  voice. 

Q,    In  what  way  does  a  hysterical  fit  differ  from  an  at- 
tack of  epilepsy? 

Hysterical  patients  scream  repeatedly  when  the  fit 
comes  on,  which  epileptics  do  not. 

Q.    What  will  they  never  allow  to  be  touched? 
Their  eye-lids. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  171 

Q.    To  what  are  they  very  sensitive? 

To  the  touch. 
Q.    Are  they  stupid  and  dull  after  the  fit? 

They  are  rather  drowsy. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  hysterical  patients? 

They  should  be  put  on  the  bed,  the  clothes  loosened. 
Q.    With  what  may  the  chest  and  face  be  slapped? 

With  the  ends  of  a  towel  which  has  been  dipped  in 
cold  water.  i 

Q.    What  will  the  patient  never  do  if  left  alone? 

Hurt  herself. 
Q.    How  are  such  patients  sometimes  successfully  treated? 
By  rest,  seclusion,  dieting,  massage,  electricity  and 
sponging. 

Q.    What  does  a  nurse  need  for  these  things? 

Special  training  and  experience. 
Q.    Can  any  sister  undertake  to  practice  massage? 

Not  without  having  received  a  thorough  training  and 
instruction  in  it. 

Q.    Can  any  sister  practice  electrical  treatments? 

Never  unless  she  is  well  informed  about  it  and  dis- 
tinctly directed  by  the  doctor. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  electricity  is  a  powerful  agent  that  can  do 
much  harm,  and  therefore  requires  the  greatest  care  and 
management. 

Chorea  or  St.  Vitus  Dance. 

Q.    What  is  St.  Vitus  dance? 

It  is  a  nervous  affection. 
Q.    In  whom  does  it  most  frequently  occur? 

In  young  girls. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  brought  on  sometimes? 

By  fright  or  exeitement. 
Q.    With  what  is  it  often  associated? 

With  rheumatism. 


172  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    By  what  is  it  characterized? 

By  lack  of  control  of  the  muscular  movements. 
Q.    Where  does  it  affect  the  body? 

On  one  or  both  sides. 
Q.    By  what  is  this  generally  accompanied? 

By  general  debility,  and  often  mental  weakness. 
Q.    By  what  are  the  jerking  and  twitching  motions  in- 
creased? 
»  By  any  excitement. 

Q.    When  do  these  motions  cease? 

During  sleep. 
Q.    What  are  common  complications  of  this  disease? 

Bed  sores. 
Q.    What  is  essential  in  treatment? 

Complete  bodily  and  mental  rest  and  nourishing  food. 

Cerebral  Meningitis. 

Q.    What  is  this  disease? 

It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  membrane  covering  the 
brain  and  is  always  extremely  serious. 
Q.    Which  are  the  leading  symptoms? 

High  fever,  violent  headache,  intolerance  of  light  and 
noise,  vomiting,  obstinate  constipation,  delirium,  sometimes 
loss  of  speech  and  convulsions. 

Q.    What  is  generally  first  ordered? 

Cold  applications  to  the  head. 
Q.    How  can  they  be  most  easily  applied? 

By  means  of  an  ice  bag. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  to  increase  the  effect  of  this  ap- 
plication? 

The  head  should  be  shaved. 
Q.    What  else  is  frequently  ordered? 

Leeches. 
Q.    What  is  generally  ordered  to  relieve  the  obstinate 
constipation? 

Purgatives  and  high-up  enemas. 


The  Nuksing  Sister.  178 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  kept'? 

Iq  a  darkened  room,  as  quiet,  cool  and  free  from  ex- 
citement as  possible. 

Q.    What  kind  of  food  should  be  given? 

Only  such  as  is  permitted  by  the  doctor,  which  is  gen- 
erally milk  or  thin  gruel. 

Q.    How  long  must  the  patient  and  room  be  kept  quiet? 

Until  all  possibility  of  a  relapse  is  over. 
Q.    What  does  relapse  in  this  case  mean? 

Death. 
Q.    In  what  cases  may  a  sister  on  her  own  account  give  an 
ounce  of  wine  in  hot  water  or  beef  tea? 

If  there  should  be  symptoms  of  sinking,  cold  sweat, 
fixed  and  glassy  eyes,  stupor,  palsy. 

Q.    What  other  symptoms  do  appear  in  spinal  meningitis? 
Excessive  pain  in  the  back,  extending  to  the  extrem- 
ities. 

Q.    How  does  the  body  become? 

It  becomes  rigid,  but  from  time  to  time  there  are  con- 
vulsive starts. 

Q.    How  are  the  lower  limbs  affected? 

By  paralysis,  which  gradually  extends. 
Q.    What  can  be  done  in  such  a  case? 

Nothing  but  to  follow  the  directions  of  the  doctor? 
Q.  What  treatment  is  sometimes  performed  by  the  doctor? 

A  lumbar  puncture. 
Q.    What  else  is  often  ordered? 

Leeches,  cups  and  bichloride  injections. 
Q.    How  is  a  bichloride  injection  given? 

Have  a  special  syringe  for  it,  mix  the  bichloride  with 
the  water  in  a  glass  or  porcelain  dish,  then  add  salt  as  much 
as  the  water  (in  which  the  bichloride  is  dissolved)  will  dis- 
solve. Then  have  everything  ready  and  put  the  bichloride 
into  the  syringe  at  the  side  of  the  bed  and  inject  at  once  deep 
under  the  muscles.    The  syringe  must  be  cleaned  at  once. 


174  The  Nursing  Sister.      ( 

Rheumatism. 

Q.    From  what  does  inflammatory  rheumatism  or  acute 
rheumatic  fever  result'? 

From  exposure  to  cold  and  damp. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  characterized? 

By  inflammation  of  the  white  fibrous  about  the  joints 
and  in  the  wall  of  the  large  arteries  and  valves  of  the  heart. 
Q.    By  what  may  it  possibly  be  developed? 

By  malarial  poisoning. 
Q.    Which  are  the  local  symptoms  in  the  acute  form? 

Fever-heat,  redness,  swelling  and  piin  about  one  or 
more  of  the  large  joints. 

Q.    To  what  has  this  a  tendency? 

To  shift  from  joint  to  joint. 
Q.    By  what  are  these  symptoms  accompanied? 

By  profuse  perspiration,  having  a  characteristic  odor. 
Q.    How  is  the  urine? 

It  is  likely  to  be  scanty  and  high-colored. 
Q.    What  may  accompany  severe  cases? 

Nervous  disorders  and  mild  delirium  at  night. 
Q.    In  what  does  the  greatest  danger  consist? 

That  the  heart  gets  involved. 
Q.    What  position  should  be  maintained? 

A  horizontal  position. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  the  slightest  emotion  causes  an  agonizing 

pain. 

Q.    What  must  be  avoided? 

All  excitement,  and  in  no  case  stimulants  are  given 
except  when  ordered  by  the  doctor. 

Q.    What  kind  of  food  may  be  given? 

Light,  digestible  food. 
Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  dressed? 

Warmly  in  flannel. 
Q.    When  the  case  his  become  chronic,  where  should  the 
patient  then  live  if  possible? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  175 

In  a  dry  climate. 
Q.    What  must  be  carefully  avoided? 

Sudden  change  of  temperature. 
Q.    On  what  days  must  the  patient  not  go  out? 

On  cold,  damp  days. 
Q.    What  kind  of  underwear  should  the  patient  wear? 

Flannel  from  throat  to  ankles,  summer  and  winter. 

Points  to  be  Noticed  in  Giving  Stimulants  in  Fevers. 
Q.    When  may  stimulants  he  recognized  as  helpful  to  the 
patient? 

If  after  taking  them,  the  tongue  and  skin  becomes 
moist,  the  pulse  steadier,  the  breathing  more  tranquil,  delir- 
ium quieted,  sleep  induced. 

Q.    When  are  they  doing  harm? 

If  the  reverse  effects  follow,  the  tongue   and   skin 
becoming  dry,  the  pulse  quicker,  the  breathing  hurried. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  in  this  case? 
They  must  be  stopped. 

Malarial  or  Intermittent  Fever. 
Q.    What  does  the  most  common  form  of  this  fever  ex- 
hibit? 

Three  stages. 

Q.    With  what  is  the  patient  first  seized? 

With  a  chill,  more  or  less  violent  and  prolonged. 
Q.    How  does  he  feel  during  this  time? 

Cold,  but  the  temperature  rises  rapidly. 
Q.    What  other  symptoms  appear? 

Severe  headache,  nausea  and  pain  in  the  limbs. 
Q.    By  what  is  the  feeling  of  chilliness  succeeded? 

By  a  hot  stage. 
Q.    What  symptoms  accompany  this  stage? 

High  temperature,  flushed  face,  dry  and  hot  skin. 
Q.    What  will  finally,  perhaps  after  a  few  hours,  follow? 

Profuse  sweating,  during  which  the  temperature  falls 
and  the  other  acute  symptoms  subside. 


176  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  do  the  attacks  cccur? 

Periodically,  with  intervals  of  fairly  good  feeling. 
Q.    What  is  required  for  this  disease'? 

Constitutional  treatment  and  sometimes  change  of 
climate'? 

Q.    What  can  a  nurse  do  during  the  chill'? 

She  can  relieve  the  discomfort  by  the  use  of  warm 
blankets,  hot  bottles,  etc. 

Q.    How  can  she  relieve  the  fever? 

By  tepid  sponging  and  cooling  drinks. 

Temperature,  Pulse,  Respirations  and  Urine. 

Q.    What  vital  signs  are  more  or  less  intimately  con- 
nected in  sickness'? 

Temperature,  pulse  and  respirations. 
Q.    What  is  the  cause  of  this  connection'? 

That  what  affects  one  will  also  affect  the  other. 
Q.    Which  of  the  three  are  the  more  readily  disturbed"? 

The  pulse  and  respirations. 
Q.    Which  of  these  symptoms  expresses  more  correctly 
the  condition  of  the  patient? 

The  variations  of  the  temperature. 
Q.    What  causes  often  alterations  in  the  pulse  and  respi- 
rations with  children? 

Seep,  anger,  suckling  and  slight  indigestion. 
Q.    Are  these  respirations  of  great  importance? 

Not  unless  accompanied  with  changes  in  the  temper- 
ature. 

Q.    In  whom  are  the  variations  more  important? 

In  adults. 
Q.    Which  is  the  normal  temperature  of  adults? 

Ninety-eight  and  four  to  six-tenths  degrees. 
Q.    What  should,  therefore,   be  carefully  noted  in  adults? 

The  first  variation  from  the  normal  temperature. 
Q.    Is  this  deviation  in  all  cases  of  special  importance? 

No:  if  it  is  only  for  a  day. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  177 

Q.    What  is  a  sure  sign  that  there  is  probably  something 

wrong? 

If  the  temperature  on  the  morning  of  the  second  day 

is  higher  than  the  first,  and  by  noon  still  higher. 

Q.    For  what  does  an  increase  of  temperature  call? 

For  cooling  remedies,  external  and  internal. 
Q.    What  does  a  decrease  of  temperature  require? 

Warming  and  sustaining  treatment. 
Q.    What  must  be  carefully  noticed? 

The  hour  at  which  the  rise  or  fall  of  temperature 
takes  place. 

Q.    What  is  a  bad  sign  in  the  increase  of  temperature? 

If  the  increase  begins  a  little  earlier  each  day. 
Q.    What  is  a  more  favorable  sign? 

If  it  begins  a  little  later  every  day. 
Q.    What  is  a  good  sign  in  the  decrease  in  temperature? 

If  the  decrease  begins  a  little  later  every  day. 
Q.    What  is  a  bad  indication? 
If  it  begins  later  each  day. 
Q..  What  else  is  important  to  consider  in  regard   to  tern 
perature? 

The  duration. 
Q.    What  is  a  bad  sign  in  the  duration? 

A  long  continued  high  temperature  without  a  fall. 
Q.    What  is  an  encouraging  sign? 

A  long  continued  low  temperature. 
Q.    What  is  dangerous  in  itself  regarding  temperature? 

A  very  high  temperature,  say  105  degrees. 
Q.    In  what  case  is  it  more  dangerous? 

If  it  has  come  on  gradually  as  the  last  of  a  progres- 
sive series,  the  temperature  having  grown  daily  higher  by 
half  a  degree  or  more,  and  having  become  daily  higher  by  an 
hour  or  so  earlier. 

Q.    What  should  a  fall  from  a  high  temperature  below 
the  normal  point,  say  two  degrees,  make  probable? 

It  would  make  death  probable. 
12— 


178  The  Ncrsino  Sister. 

Q.    In  what  case  would  there  be  prospects  of  restoration? 
If  the  fall  be  not  more  than  four-tenths  of  a  degree 
below  normal? 

Q.    What  is,  generally  speaking,  more  dangerous,  the  fall 
or  rise  from  the  normal  point? 

One  degree  below  normal  is  more  indication  of  a  bad 
condition  than  two  and  a  half  degrees  above  the  normal. 
Q.    In  what  does  the  danger  consist  in  the  first  case? 

In  the  degree  of  depression,  then  in  continuence,  then 
in  descending  progression. 

Q.    What  does  the  slowly  increasing  low  temperature  gen- 
erally do? 

It  will  prepare  the  way  to  serious  sickness  or  death. 
Q.    What  else  is  striking,  besides  the  variations  of  the 
temperature  from  the  normal  point? 

The  daily  and  hourly  fluctuations. 
Q.    How  much  of  a  rise  in  temperature  will  a  well-fed 
child  show  after  a  good  meal? 

A  few  tenths  of  a  degree. 
Q.    How  much  will  the  temperature  of  a  hungry  child  run 
up  after  taking  nourishing  food? 
A  full  degree. 
Q.    If  there  is  no  rise  of  temperature  during  convalescence 
after  eating,  what  does  this  prove? 

That  there  is  no  nourishment  secured  from  the  food. 
Q.    What  does  it  prove  if  there  be  a  sudden  or  high  rise 
above  one  degree? 

That  the  food  was  too  stimulating  or  heavy. 
Q.    What  should  always  be  effected  of  food  during  con- 
valescence, to  be  beneficial? 

It  should  increase  the  temperature   a  quarter  to  a 
half  degree. 

Q.    When  should  this  increase  subside? 
When  digestion  is  over. 


The  Nursing  SrsTER.  179 


Pulse. 
Q.    Does  the  increase  or  decrease  in  the  number  of  pulsa- 
tions in  a  minute  always  prove  a  variation   from  the  healthy 
pulse? 

No. 
Q.    Which  are  qualities  to  notice  in  the  pulse? 

Frequency,  regularity  and  fullness. 
Q.    How  does  a  healthy  pulse  beat? 

Steadily,  evenly,  from  seventy  to  seventy-five  times  a 

minute. 

Q.    In  what  way  are  the  number  of  pulsations  affected  by 
the  position  of  the  body? 

They    are   more    rapid  in  standing  than   in  sitting 
down,  and  more  in  sitting  than  lying  down. 
Q.    How  may  its  regularity  be  interfered? 

In  two  ways:  the  pulsations  may  be  unequal  in  num- 
ber and  force,   as  few  beats  being  from  time  to  time  more 
rapid  and  feeble  than  the  rest,  or  intermitted  altogether. 
Q.    By  what  is  the  fullness  of  the  pulse  determined? 

By  the  sensation,  the  blood  when  passing  through  the 
artery,  gives  to  the  ringer. 

Q.    When  is  the  pulse  said  to  be  full? 

If  it  strikes  a  large  part  of  the  ringer  pressing  it. 
Q.    When  small? 

If  it  strikes  a  small  part  of  the  finger. 
Q.    When  hard? 

If  in  spite  of  firm  pressure  it  forces  its  way  under  the 
finger. 

Q.    When  soft? 

When  the  pulsations  scarcely  cause  a  sensation  to  the 
finger. 

Q.    When  is  it  said  to  be  wiry? 

When  the  pulsations  are  hard  and  small,  the  flow  feel- 
ing like  a  wire. 

Q.    When  jerking? 

When  the  blood  comes  with  hard,  short  knocks. 


180  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    When  must  all  these  different  conditions  be  carefully 
considered? 

When  the  pulse  is  examined  as  an  indication  of  dis- 
ease or  health. 

Q.    What  is  extremely  difficult  to  ascertain  with  young 
children? 

The  number  of  pulsations  in  a  minute. 
Q.    What  are,  therefore,  the  things  important  to  be  no- 
ticed in' examining  the  pulse  of  young  children? 
The  regularity  and  fullness. 

Respirations. 
Q.    How  often  does  a  healthy  adult  breath?' 

Sixteen  to  eighteen  times  in  a  minute,  without  being 
conscious  of  the  act  of  breathing. 

Q.    What  must  be  noticed  in  sickness  besides  the  varia- 
tions from  the  healthy  standard  in  number? 

Whether  the  breathing  is  even  and  regular,  or  panting 
and  short:  whether  it  is  from  the  upper  or  lower  part  of  the 
chest. 

Q.    What  must  be  noticed  regarding  pain? 

Whether  a  deep,  full  inspiration  can  be  taken  without 
pain  and  if  there  is  pain  at  what  spot  the  pain  is  felt. 
Q.    What  must  be  noticed  about  the  position? 

Whether  the  breathing  is  better  in  one  position  than 
in  another,  and  in  which  it  is  the  most  distressing. 
Q.    What  should  be  noticed  about  the  sounds? 

Whether  the  air  makes  any  sounds  as  it  passes  through 
the  lungs  and  air-passes  and  what  kind  of  a  sound. 
Q.    What  about  the  difference  in  breathing? 

Whether  there  be  any  difference  between  the  breath- 
ing when  sleeping  and  when  awake  and  what  it  is. 

Urine. 
Q.    What  is  drained  away  through  the  kidneys  with  the 
urine? 

Many  of  the  impurities  of  the  blood  and  any  excess  of 
its  watery  ingredients. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  181 

Q.    What  is  constantly  shiftly? 

The  chemical  composition  of  the  urine. 
Q.    In  what  respect  are  there  continual  changes  going  on 
in  the  urine  even  with  healthy  persons'? 

In  color  and  quantity  daily  passed. 
Q.    Which  is  the  normal  color  of  urine? 

Like  light  amber  or  wheat  straw. 
Q.    What  is  the  daily  normal  quantity? 

From  thirty  to  fifty  ounces? 
Q.    What  is  always  the  reaction  in  health? 

Somewhat  acid. 
Q.    What  is  the  effect  upon  blue  litmus  paper? 

It  will  turn  red. 
Q.    When  is  it  most  acid? 

Just  before  eating,  especially  before  breakfast. 
Q.    When  is  it  less  acid? 

During  the  process  of  digestion. 
Q.    How  does  it  vary  with  age? 

In  children  the  quantity  in  proportion  to  the  weight 
of  the  body  is  nearly  twice  as  great  as  with  adults. 
Q.    How  does  urine  vary  with  sex? 

The  quantity  being  somewhat  more  abundant  with 
females  than  males? 

Q.    How  with  season? 

Less  being  passed  in  warm,  dry  weather,  than  at 
other  times. 

Q.    What  is  the  reason  for  this? 

Because  the  perspiration  is  generally  more  profuse 
and  urea  passes  off  by  the  skin. 

Q.    How  does  it  vary  with  the  time  of  the  day? 

It  is  more  deeply  colored  in  the  morning,  paler  dur- 
ing the  forenoon,  and  deeper  again  in  the  afternoon  and 
evening. 

Q.    Does  food  and  drink  cause  any  difference? 

Many  vegetables,  acid  fruits,  liquids,  etc.,  increase  the 
quantity  and  produce  other  changes. 


182  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  else  causes  certain  chemical  changes  in  the  urine? 

Violent  exercise. 
Q.    What  effect  has  mental  exertion,  over-study  or  hys- 
teria upon  it? 

It  increases  the  quantity  of  urine  passed. 
Q.    Is  the  variation  for  one  or  two  days  from  the  normal 
condition  of  importance*/ 
No. 
Q.    When  should  attention  be  given  to  the  matter? 

If  the  variations  be  frequent  and  long  continued  and 
especially  if  accompanied  by  other  symptoms. 

Q.    What  should  be  carefully  noticed  and  reported  in  the 
different  illnesses? 

Every  variation  from  the  healthy  condition. 
<v>.    What  do  they  indicate? 

The  presence  and  progress  of  the  disease. 
Q.    From    what  should    a  specimen  for  examination  be 
taken? 

Either  from  the  total  accumulation  of  twenty-four 
hours  or  from  that  passed  before  breakfast. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  in  getting  a  specimen  of 
urine  for  examination? 

To  have  it  free  from  all  impurities. 
Q.    How  much  will  generally  be  wanted? 

From  three,  six  or  eight  ounces. 
Q.    In  what  kind  of  bottles  should  the  urine  for  examina- 
tion be  preserved? 

In  clean,  clear  bottles. 
(4.    How  should  these  bottles  be  cleaned? 

First  with  warm  water,  then   with  cold  water,  and 
from  time  to  time  be  boiled. 
Q.    How  should  the  corks  be? 

Either  new  or  washed  and  scraped. 
Q.    What  must  be  attached  to  the  bottle? 

A  label  with  the  name  of  the  patient,  number  of  the 
room,  the  date  and  hour  at  which  the  urine  was  passed. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  183 

Q.    What  more  must  the  nurse  be  able  to  tell? 

What  was  eaten  and  what  was  the  mental  condition 
of  the  patient,  whether  any  pain  was  felt  or  difficulty  in  pass- 
ing urine. 

Q.    When  must  the  urine  be  examined? 

The  same  day  it  was  passed. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

If  it  stands  longer  it  will  decompose. 

Disinfecting  and  Care  in  Communicable  Diseases. 

Q.    What  is  in  communicable  diseases  one  of  the  greatest 
responsibilities  of  a  nurse? 

Q.    The  prevention  of  contagion. 

What  is  considered  the  most  common  conductor  of 
contagion? 

The  atmosphere,  which  is  everywhere  more  or  less 
laden  with  microbes,  especially  in  the  sick  room. 
Q.    What  are  they? 

They  are  the  lowest  form  or  animal  life  soaring  in  the 
air,  which  we  inhale. 
Q.    Are  they  visible? 

Only  under  the  microscope. 
Q.    What  are  they  capable  of? 

Of  a  very  rapid  multiplication. 
Q.    What  do  they  convey? 

The  specific  poison. 
Q.    How  do  they  lay  for  awhile? 

Dormant. 
Q.    What  do  they  do  under  suitable  conditions? 

They  develop  and  multiply. 
Q.    What  do  they  then  produce? 

The  original  disease. 
Q.    Where  are  the  conditions  of  development  found  in 
some  cases? 

Within  the  body. 


184  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  can  the  disease  be  transmitted  in  such  cases'? 

Directly  from  one  person  to  another. 
Q.    What  does  the  germ  do  in  other  cases'? 

It  only  originates  in  the  body. 
Q.    What  does  it  require  before  it  becomes  infectious? 

That  it  be  developed  outside. 
Q.    Which  are  the  latter  class? 

Typhoid,  yellow  fever,  cholera,  dysentery. 
Q.   Of  what  are  the  other  diseases  commonly  recognized? 
as  infectious? 

By  direct  transmission. 
Q.    WThat  is  required  after  the  exposure  to  contagion'? 

Some  time  for  development. 
Q.    How  do  we  call  the  time  during  which  the  poison  re- 
mains concealed'? 

The  period  of  incubation. 
Q.    When  does  smallpox  commence  to  be  contagious? 

Even  during  the  period  of  incubation. 
Q.    When  is  the  risk  of  infection  the  greatest  in  measles 
and  whooping  cough? 

Early  in  the  disease,  even  before  the  rash  and  whoop 
appear. 

Q.    When  is  infection  most  dangerous  in  scarlet  fever? 
During  the  third  and  fourth  week  when  the  skin  is 
peeling. 

Q.    How  far  does  the  poison  of  typhus  appear  to  exert  its 
influence? 

Only  within  a  limited  range. 
Q.    How  must  the  contact  with  the  patient  be  in  order  to 
cause  infection? 

Moderately  close. 
Q.    But  how  may  the  germs  of  smallpox  and  scarletina  be 
carried  about? 

Indefinitely. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  185 

Q.    What  name  have  we  for  diseases  which  attack  many 
people  at  the  same  time? 
Epidemic. 
Q.    What  are  disinfectants'? 

Substances  that  destroy  or  render  inert  the  germs  of 
communicable  diseases. 

Q.    What  is  the  best  disinfectant? 

The  most  important  is  abundant  fresh  air. 
Q.    What  will  destroy  the  activity  of  all  known  disease 
germs? 

Boiling  for  one  half-hour. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  when  the  disease  is  declared? 
The  patient  should  at  once  be  insolated  as  entirely  as 
possible. 

Q.    How  many  persons  should  be  attendants? 

Not  more  than  two. 
Q.    What  must  they  avoid? 
All  contact  with  others. 
Q.    What  must  be  carried  out  of  the  room? 

All  unnecessary  articles  and  things  that  cannot  be 
washed. 

Q.    Where  should  spoons,  cups,  etc.,  be  kept  that  are  used 
for  the  patient? 

Near  the  room  and  should  be  washed  there. 
Q.    What    must    be    especially   disinfected    in    cases    of 
typhoid  fever  and  dysentery? 

The  excrements  and  vessels. 
Q.    What  should  be  poured  down  the  closet  from  time  to 


time? 

Some  disinfectant. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  where  there  is  nothing  but  an 
outside  closet  or  privy? 

Some  liquid  disinfectant  must  be  used  and  shovels- 
ful  of  chloride  of  lime  thrown  down  now  and  then. 


186  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.  What  must  be  done  after  the  disease  is  ended  in  order 
to  render  the  room  fit  for  occupancy  and  to  prevent  the  spread 
of  infection? 

The  room  must  be  thoroughly  disinfected. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

Spread  out  all  the  bed  clothes  and  also  all  other 
clothes,  open  all  the  drawers  and  doors  of  wardrobes,  wash 
stands,  etc.,  close  the  windows  and  shutters  tight,  stop  up  all 
the  cracks,  chimney  and  key  hole  tight,  then  it  is  ready  for 
disinfecting. 

Q.    Where  is  the  disinfectant  then  placed? 

In  the  middle  or  in  different  places  of  the  room. 
Q.    What  is  used  for  disinfecting? 

Formaldehyde  gas. 
Q.    How  is  it  used? 

Have  the  lamp  in  the  middle  of  the  room,  or  if  more 
than  one  is  used  at  different  places,  light  them  and  close  the 
door. 

Q.    What  may  be  used  besides  this? 

Either  chloride  of  lime  and  sulphuric  acid,  sulphur 
candles  or  some  other  disinfectant. 

Q.  What  must  the  sister  do  after  she  has  started  the 
disinfectant? 

Immediately  leave  the  room  and  close  it  tight. 
Q.    How  long  should  it  remain  closed? 
From  twelve  to  twenty-four  hours. 
Q.    What  must  then  be  done? 

The  windows  and  doors  should  then  be  opened  wide 
and  the  room  thoroughly  ventilated  for  several  hours. 

Q.    What  will  render  the  disinfecting  gas  more  effective? 
If  the  room  can  be  filled  with  steam  just  before  the 
disinfectants  are  placed  in. 

Q.  What  must  be  done  after  the  room  is  thoroughly  ven- 
tilated? 

It  must  be  cleaned. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  187 

Q.    What  will  be  necessary  in  some  cases'? 

That  the  furniture,  wall  and  everything  in  the  room 
be  washed  off  with  a  solution  of  bichloride  water. 

Surgical  Nursing. 

Q.    What  is  the  first  requisite  in  surgical  nursing? 

Absolute  cleanliness. 
Q.  oWhat  must  be  faultlessly  clean? 

( 1 ).    Everything  used  about  the  wounds,  patient  and 
the  bed. 

(2).    The  places  where  dressings,  instruments,  etc., 
are  kept. 

(3).    Everything  about  the  person  and  dress  of  the 
nurse. 

Q.    To  whom  does  the  care  of  these  things  belong? 

To  the  sister. 
Q.    When  must  all  instruments  be  cleaned  and  sterilized? 

Before  and  after  using  them  for  dressing  a  wound. 
Q.    What  should  not  be  allowed   if  oil  or  vaseline  is  re- 
quired? 

To  put  the  finger  into  the  bottle;  take  out  a  little 
with  a  spatul  or  a  piece  of  gauze. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  if  any  is  left? 

It  must  be  thrown  away? 
Q.    What  may  never  be  done  with  dressings  taken  from  a 
wound? 

They  must  never  be  carried  around  from  one  bed  to 
another. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  with  them? 

They  must  be  removed  from  the  room  at  once. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  dressings  which  have  been 
next  to  the  wound? 

They  should  be  burnt,  not  washed. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  such  as  are  to  be  washed? 
Thev  must  be  disinfected. 


188  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  should  be  avoided  in  handling  dressings'? 

To  soil  your  own  hands. 
Q.    In  what  should  old  dressings  be  carried  away'? 

In  a  basin  or  pail. 
Q.   In  what  case  should  the  fingers  not  be  used? 

If  a  forcep  will  do  just  as  well. 
Q.    In  what  must  the  hands  always  be  washed  before  go- 
ing from  one  case  to  another? 

In  a  disinfecting  solution. 
Q.    What  should  a  sister  do  if  the  skin  on  her  hand  is 
broken,  before  going  near  a  wound? 

She  should  protect  them  with  bits  of  plaster  or  col- 
lodion. 

Q.    What  may  be  the  consequence  of  a  slight  scratch? 

To  get  blood-poison. 
Q.    Upon  what  cannot  too  much  importance  be  laid? 

Upon  the  necessity  of  absolute  cleanliness  in  every 
way. 

Q.    What  is  cleanliness  in  its  broadest  sense? 

The  best  antiseptic. 
Q.    What  is  of  the  greatest  importance? 

To  have  the  hands  clean,  especially  finger-nails. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  organic  matter  wiil  find  a  lodgment  under 
them. 

Q.    Is  this  organic  matter  always  dangerous? 

Yes. 
Q.    What  has  it  undoubtedly  been  often  the  source  of? 

Of  many  a  case  of  blood-poisoning. 
Q.    What    is    important     before  beginning    a    surgical 
dressing? 

To  have  everything  on  hand  likely  to  be  needed, 
Q.    What  is  awkward  for  the  nurse  and  fatiguing  for  the 
patient? 

When  a  nurse  has  to  leave  in  the  midst  of  the  pro- 
cess, to  find  something  that  has  been  forgotten. 


The  Nuksing  Sister.  189 

Q.    What  can  a  sister  not  always  tell  when  the  doctor 
dresses  a  wound  the  first  time? 

What  he  may  just  call  for. 
Q.    But  what  must  she  always  have  ready? 

The  things  she  knows  he  will  want. 
Q.    What  should  the  sister  certainly  know  after  she  has 
seen  the  dressing  once? 

How  to  prepare  for  it  the  next  time. 
Q.    What  will  be  wanted  in  every  case? 

A    protector    for    the  .bed   (rubber  sheet  or    Kelley 
cushion),  towels,  scissors,  pins  and  basins. 
Q.    How  many  basins  must  be  ready? 

At  least  three — one  to  hold  the  fluid  for  washing  the 
wound  (irrigator),  one  to  receive  the  old  dressings  and  one  to 
hold  under  to  catch  the  discharge. 

Q.    What  kind  of  basins  are  most  convenient  to  catch  up 
the  discharge? 

Crescent  shaped,  as  they  fit  closely  to  any  part  of  the 
body. 

Q.    What  should  never  be  done  with  old  dressings? 

They  should  never  be  pulled  off  forcibly. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  they  stick  to  the  wound? 

They  should  be  irrigated  until  wet  enough  to  come  off 
easily. 

Q.    How  should  adhesive  plaster  strips  be  removed? 

By  taking  hold  of  both  ends  and  pulling  them  toward 
the  wound  from  both  directions  evenly. 

Q.    What   may  be  well  to  apply    before    removing    the 
plaster? 

New  strips  between  the  old  ones. 
Q.    What  will  this  prevent? 

The  wound  from  being  pulled  open. 
Q.    What  will  remove  the  traces  from  plaster? 
Alcohol,  ether  or  turpentine. 


190  The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    What  must  a  sister  do  if  she  is  obliged  to  leave  a 
wound  undressed? 

Cover  it  with  a  guard. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  for  this  purpose? 

A  piece  of  gauze,  dry  or  saturated  in  an  antiseptic  so- 
lution. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  with  dressings  before  they  are 
thrown  into  the  waste  pail? 

The  fluid  must  be  drained  off. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  before  dressings  are  applied? 

The  wound  should  be  washed  with  some  antiseptic 
solution. 

Q.    How  is  this  done? 

The  wound  is  irrigated  but  never  rubbed  until  quite 
clean. 

Q.    What  is  seldom  necessary? 

To  touch  the  wound. 
Q.    With  what  should  the  edges  be  dried? 

With  the  safest  lint. 
Q.    How  are    severe    burns    or   extensive    wounds    best 
dressed? 

Only  one  part  at  a  time. 
Q.    What  kind  of  dressings  are  the  best? 

Dry  or  absorbant  dressings. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  moisture  promotes  the  development  of  germs 
and  this  is  absorbed  by  absorbent  dressings. 

Q.    What  is  the  purpose  of  antiseptic  treatment? 

The  destruction  of  infectious  germs  or  the  prevention 
of  their  multiplication. 

Q.    Do  antiseptics  do  this? 

Yes;  they  hinder  the  development  of  the  germs  and 
arrest  their  decomposition. 

Q.    What  is  much  used  for  washing  wounds? 

Freshly  boiled  water,  cooled  in  covered  vessels. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  191 

Q.    How  are  dressings  sterilized?     < 

By  heat. 
Q.    Are  chemical  disinfectants  necessary  to  sterilize  them 
thoroughly? 

No. 
Q.    What  is  the  most  reliable  disinfectant  and  germicide? 

Bichloride  of  mercury  or  corrosive  sublimate. 
Q.    What  else  may  be  used? 

Carbolic  acid. 
Q.    Is  it  necessary  to  give  full  directions  for  the  different 
dressings? 

No;  because  each  doctor  has  his  own  method  and  new 
ones  are  coming  in  vogue  from  time  to  time. 

Q.    But  with  what  has  the  nurse  to  be  familiar? 

With  the  two  above  named  germicides. 
Q.    What  should  she  understand  well? 

How  to  manipulate  and  prepare  them  for  use. 
Q.    In  what  form  is  bichloride  of  mercury  bought. 

In  a  coarse  white  powder  or  in  tablets. 
Q.    In  what  is  it  soluble? 

In  boiling  water  or  alcohol. 
Q.    Of  what  strength  is  it  commonly  used? 

Varying  from  1-1000  parts  to  1-1500. 
Q.    How  can  you  prepare  a  solution  of  1-1000? 

By  dissolving  thirty  grains  of  the  powder  in  three  and 
one-half  pints  of  boiling  water. 

Q.    What  should  be  added  if  the  solution  is  not  used  at 


once? 


Thirty  grains  of  common  salt. 
Q.    Why  should  the  salt  be  added? 

Because  otherwise  the  solution  is  likely  to  decompose. 
Q.    What  is  the  strongest  solution  used  in  surgery? 

A  solution  of  1-1000. 
Q.    Upon    what   have   bichloride    solutions    a    corrosive 


effect? 


Upon  metals. 


192  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  can  it  therefore  not  be  used? 

For  disinfecting  instruments. 
Q.    By  what  are  gauze  bandages  and  other  materials  used 
for  dressings  rendered  antiseptic? 

By    impregnation    with    bichloride   after    prescribed 
methods. 

Q.    How  does  carbolic  acid  come  when  pure? 

In  transparent  crystals. 
Q.    What  is  the  strongest  solution  commonly  used? 

One  to  twenty  parts. 
Q.    How  can  carbolic  acid  be  liquified? 

By  placing  the  bottle  containing  the  crystals  into  hot 
water.  » 

Q.    How  can  you  prepare  a  twenty  per  cent,  solution? 
By  pouring  out  one  ounce  of  the  carbolic  acid  and  add- 
ing nineteen  ounces  of  boiling  water. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  after  they  are  poured  together? 
It  must  be  shaken  vigorously  until  they  are  thor- 
oughly mixed. 

Q.    Where  must  all  carbolized  solutions  and  dressings  be 
kept?    ' 

In  air-tight  receptacles. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  it  easily  evaporates  and  then  loses  its  strength. 
Q.    Why  must  they  both  be  handled  with  great  care? 

Because  they  are  both  powerful  poisons. 
Q.    What  symptoms  may  they  sometimes  produce? 

Toxic  symptoms. 
Q.    WThen  should  a  nurse  always  be  on  the  lookout  for 
constitutional  effects? 

When  any  powerful  drug  is  used  as  an  antiseptic. 
Q.    What   should  be  carefully  observed    when  carbolic 
acid  is  employed? 
The  urine. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  193 

Q.  What  is  one  of  the  earliest  symptoms  of  this  poison- 
ing? 

A  dark  green  color  of  the  urine. 
Q.    What  materials  are  most  frequently  used  for  surgical 
dressings? 

Plain,  sterilized  gauze,   iodoform,   bi-chloride  or  car- 
bolized  gauze,  absorbent  cotton,  cotton  wool,  lint,  etc. 

Q.  What  sutures  are  used  for  bringing  the  edges  of  a 
wound  together,  holding  them  in  place? 

Silk,  silver  wire,  cat  gut  or  silk  worm  gut. 
Q.    What  is  used  for  tying  arteries? 

Ligatures  of  heavier  silk  or  cat  gut. 
Q.    How  are  these  sutures  and  ligatures  prepared? 

In  various  methods. 
Q.    Are  sponges  used  frequently  for  operations? 

No;  they  are  seldom  use:l? 
Q.    In  case  they  are  used,  how  must  they  be  treated? 

They  must  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  made  aseptic. 
Q.    What  is  used  instead  of  sponges? 

Sponges  made  of  cotton  and  gauze  and  sterilized,  or 
pieces  of  aseptic  gauze. 

Q.  Is  the  care  of  sponges,  dressing  materials  and  instru- 
ments used  for  operations,  an  important  part  of  a  surgeon's 
nurse? 

Yes;  it  is  very  important. 
Q.    What  else  should  she  make  herself  acquainted  with? 

With  the  name-;  of  the  instruments. 
Q.    Why? 

So  she  can  hand  them  without  hesitation  when  called 
for  by  the  operator. 

Q.    What  is  she  expected  to  do  after  an  operation? 

To  clean  the  instruments  and  return  them  to  their 
cases. 

Q.    How  must  this  be  done? 

Thoroughly,  so  that  they  are  aseptically  clean. 

13— 


194  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  must  they  be  washed? 

Carefully,  because  they  are  expensive  and  many  of 
them  so  delicate  that  they  will  be  ruined  by  careless  hand- 
ling. 

Q.    How    should    instruments    with    cutting    edges    be 
washed*/ 

They  must  be  taken  by  themselves  and  washed  one 
by  one. 

Q.    Should  they  ever  be  thrown  in  a  heap  together? 

Never,  but  singly  laid  down,  so  that  they  will  touch 
nothing  to  blunt  their  fine  edges. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  with  all  instruments  as  far  as 
practicable':' 

They  should  be  disjointed,  catches  unlocked  and  tubes 
syringed. 

Q.    What  should  be  washed  off  the  instruments  with  soap 
and  water  before  they  are  put  in  any  disinfectant? 
The  blood. 
Q.    What  must  be  removed? 

Every  stain. 
Q.    How  should  rough  surfaces  be  cleaned? 
They  should  be  scrubbed  with  a  brush. 
Q.    How  can   instruments,  entirely  of    metal,  be  disin- 
fected? 

By  sterilizing  them  ten  to  fifteen  minutes. 
Q.    What  instruments  may  not  be  put  into  hot  water? 

Those  having  ivory  or  bone  handles. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  it  would  be  likely  to  crack  them. 
Q.    How  can  they  be  disinfected  after  they  are  washed? 

They  may  be  laid  to  soak  in  1-20  carbolic  solution. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  before  they  are  laid  away? 
They  must  be  perfectly  dry. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  195 


Wounds. 

Q.    What  is  an  incised  wound? 

A  simple  smooth  cut  like  that  of  a  knife. 
Q.    In  what  proportion  is  it  dangerous? 

In  proportion  to  its  depth. 
Q.    How  is  a  wound  called  if  the  edges  are  torn? 

A  lacerated  wound. 
Q.    Which  is  more  painful,  a  lacerated  cut  or  a  sharp  in- 
cision of  the  same  extent? 

A  lacerated  one. 
Q.    What  can  be  more  easily  controlled   in  a  lacerated 
wound? 

A  hemorrhage. 
Q.    What  is  a  crush  or  bruise? 

A  laceration  under  the  skin  (subcutaneous). 
Q.    By  what  is  a  crush  or  bruised  wound  generally  made? 

By  a  blunt  instrument. 
Q.    What  will  set  up  around  the  dead  parts  if  the  tissues 
are  injured  beyond  recovery? 

Ulceration. 
Q.    What  will  ulceration  do  in  a  wound? 

It  will  separate  the  tissues. 
Q.    As  what  is  this  ulceration  known? 

As  sloughing. 
Q.    How  are  gun-shot  wounds  called? 

Crushed  or  tubular  wounds. 
Q.    Are  they  painful? 

Yes,  they  are  very  painful. 
Q.    By  what  are  they  likely  to  be  accompanied? 

By  deep-seated  inflammation. 
Q.    What  are  punctured  wounds? 

Those  made  by  a  sharp-pointed  instrument. 
Q.    In  what  proportion  are  burns  dangerous? 

Not  so  much  in  proportion  to  their  depth  as  to  the 
extent  of  surface  they  involve. 


196  The  .Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    In  what  will  a  burn,  covering  half  the  surface  of  the 
body,  result*? 

In  death,  from  shock. 
Q.    Is  there  any  prospects  of  recovery  if  so  much  as  one- 
third  of  the  surface  is  burned? 
Yes. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  in  great  danger  in  severe  burns? 

The  vitality  of  the  part. 
Q.    What  will  often  be  the  consequence  in  such  cases? 
The  gangrenous  part  will  slough  off  gradually  with 
free  formation  of  pus. 

Q.    How  does  such  a  wound  heal? 

Slowly  by  granulation. 
Q.    What  are  similar  in  effects  to  burns? 

Scalds  and  frost-bites. 
Q.    How  many  degrees  are  there  of  frost-bites? 

Two. 
Q.    What  appearance  have  the  frost-bitten  parts  if  the 
vitality  is  merely  suspended? 
White,  stiff  and  numb. 
Q.    What  tendency  do  they  develop  upon  return  of  circu- 
lation? 

An  inflammatory. 
Q.    Does  vitality  remain  in  the  second  degree? 

Xo,  it  is  completely  destroyed. 
Q.    What  supervenes  upon  thawing? 

Gangrene. 
Q.    How  many  modes  are  there  by  which  a  wound  of  the 
soft  tissues  may  heal? 
Two. 
Q.    What  is  the  first? 

When  two  cleanly  cut  surfaces  brought  into  close  con- 
tact simply  grow  together. 
Q.    What  is  the  second? 
Granulation. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  197 

Q.    By  what  may  the  healing  of  the  granulating  surfaces 
he  hastened? 

By  skin-grafting. 
Q.    In  what  does  this  consist? 

In  placing  upon  it  small  portions  of  skin  freshly  cut 
from  some  parts  of  the  patient  or  some  other  individual  body. 
Q.    What  precautions  must  be  taken  in  grafting? 

Antiseptic.     The  place  where  the  skin  is  taken  from 
must  be  antiseptically  prepared. 
Q.    What  is  an  abscess? 

It  is  an  accumulation  of  pus  in  any  of  the  tissues  or 
organs. 

Q.    What  are  drainage  tubes  used  for? 

To  keep  wounds  open  until  they  heal  from  the  bot- 
tom and  to  carry  off  the  pus. 

Q.    What  are  drainage  tubes  mostly  made  of? 

Of  rubber  or  glass,  with  holes  in  the  sides,  so  that  the 
pus  may  flow  in  from  every  direction. 

Q.    What  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose? 

Strips  of  iodoform  gauze  and  antiseptically  prepared 
horse  hair. 

Q.    What  is  pus? 

Healthy  pus  is  a  thick,  cream-colored,  opaque  dis- 
charge, smooth  and  insoluble  in  water. 

Q.    By  what  is  the  formation  of  pus  accompanied? 

By  pain  and  throbbing. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  accompanied  if  extensive? 

By  fever  and  sometimes  chills. 
Q.    How  does  it  affect  the  system? 

It  is  a  steady  drain. 
Q.    What  must  a  patient  suffering  from  a  suppurating 
wound  therefore  have? 

The  most  nourishing  food  to  keep  up  his  strength. 


198  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    In  what  does  the  treatment  of  wounds  consist? 

(1).    In  checking  the  hemorrhage. 

(2).    In  removing  foreign  matters. 

(3).     In  bringing  separated  surfaces  into  apposition. 

(4).  In  excluding  the  air  by  some  antiseptic  dressing. 
Q.  Is  it  allowed  to  put  two  bad  cases  with  suppurating 
wounds  together  into  adjoining  beds  in  a  ward? 

No,  if  it  can  be  avoided. 

Operations. 
Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  prepared  the  day  before 
the  operation? 

By  giving  a  full  bath  and  a  physic  the  evening  before. 
Q.    How  should  the  part  which  is  to  be  operated  on  be 
prepared? 

It  should  be  shaved,  then  washed  thoroughly  with  a 
brush  and  green  soap,  rinsed  with  sterilized  water. 
(,>.    How  can  all  the  soap  be  removed? 
By  washing  the  part  with  alcohol. 
Q.    What  must  the  sister  do  after  she  has  washed  the- 
part  with  alcohol? 

Wash  her  own  hands  in  soap  and  water,  and  then  in 
an  antiseptic  solution. 

Q.    How  is  the  part  to  be  operated  on  then  prepared? 

A  bichloride  dressing  is  then  applied,  or  a  green  soap 
poultice,  and  held  in  place  with  a  bandage. 

Q.    May  the  patient  to  be  operated  on  eat  a  full  supper 
the  evening  before'? 

No,  only  a  light  supper. 
Q.    What  should  be  given  on  the  morning  of  the  opera- 
tion? 

A  thorough  enema. 
Q.    How  long  before  the  etherization  must  the  patient 
fast  entirely? 

At  least  three  hours.i 


The  Nursing  Sister.  199 

Q.    What,  as  a  rule,  is  given  to  the  patient  about  Ave  or 
six  hours  before  the  operation? 
A  large  cup  of  beef  tea. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  one  half  hour  before  the  opera- 
tion? 

A  dose  of  brandy  or  whisky  or  one-fourth  of  a  grain  of 
morphine  hypodermically. 

.  Q.    What  must  the  patient  do  before  going  to  the  oper- 
ating room? 

Pass  the  urine. 
Q.    How  should  the  hair  be  arranged? 
Well  combed  and  braided  tightly. 
Q.    What  must  be  taken  out  and  what  must  be  loosened? 
Artificial  teeth  must  be  taken  out  and  tight  clothes 
and  bands  loosened. 

Q.    What  clothes  should  be  put  on  the  patient? 
A  clean  chemise,  night-gown  and  stockings. 
Q.    How  should  the  clothing  be  arranged? 

So  that  they  will  be  out  of  the  way,  well  protected 
and  easy  to  change  if  necessary. 

Q.    Where  is  the  patient  taken  when  ready  for  operation? 

Into  the  anaesthetizing  room. 
Q.    What  is  put  on  the  patient  there? 

A  pair  of  sterilized,  cotton-flannel  stockings,  reaching 
up  to  the  thighs. 

Q.    What  is  used  for  anaesthetizing? 

Ether,  chloroform,  or  a  mixture  of  the  two. 
Q.    How  is  ether  administered? 

Pour  two  or  three  drams  at  a  time  on  an   inhaler 
made  large  enough  to  fit  over  nose  and  mouth. 
Q.    Why  must  this  inhaler  be  so  large? 

So  as  to  exclude  all  the  air. 
Q.    What  will  prevent  irritation  to  that  part  of  the  face 
which  is  covered  by  the  cone? 

Anointing  it  with  vaselin»3. 


?oo  The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    How  is  chloroform  given? 

A  few  drops  are  sprinkled  on  a  handkerchief  or  a 
small  cone  and  held  at  a  distance  of  two  or  three  inches  from 
the  face. 

Q.    What  must  be  avoided? 

Touching  the  patient's  face  with  the  cone. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

Because  a  mixture  of  atmospheric  air  is  needed. 
Q.    In  what  way  is  chloroform  a  better  anaesthetic  than 
ether. 

It  is  more  agreeable,  rapid  and  less  likely  to  nauseate 
Q.    In  what  way  is  it  more  dangerous? 

It  has  a  powerful  depressing  effect  upon  the  heart. 
Q.    In  what  position   must  the  patient  be  kept  while 
under  the  influence  of  an  anaesthetic? 
Flat  and  the  head  low. 
Q.    AVhich  are  the  signs  of  danger? 

A  feeble  pulse,  a  livid  face  or  extreme  pallor,  irregular 
and  gasping  respirations. 

Q.    Is  the  sister  who  is  charged   with  giving  the  anaes- 
thetic, allowed  to  divide  her  attention   to  anything  else  at 
the  time? 
No. 
Q.    Why? 

Because  the  patient  before  her  requires  her  undivided 
attention. 

Q.    Where  should  she  keep  her  finger  and  her  eyes? 

The  finger  on  the  pulse  and  the  eyes  on  the  face  of 
the  patient. 

Q.    What  should  she  do  at  the  first  warning  indication? 

Stop  giving  the  vapor. 
Q.    Under  whose  direction  and  in  whose  presence  should 
anaesthetic  be  given? 

Always  under  the  directions  and  in  the  presence  of 
the  doctor. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  201 

Q.    Where  is  the  patient  taken  after  he  is  anaesthetized? 
Into  the  operating  room  and  placed  on  the  operating 
table. 

Q.    What  has  the  sister  to  do  there? 

After  having  prepared  herself   for  assistance  at  an 
operation,    she    removes    the   dresssngs    and    surrounds  the 
operating  field  with  sterilized  or  bi-chloride  towels. 
Q.    What  must  be  placed  over  the  operating  field? 

After  it  is  washed  again,   a  piece  of  sterilized  or  bi- 
chloride gauze  is  placed  over  it  until  the  operator  is  ready. 
Q.    How  is  the  operating  room  prepared? 

It  must  be  antiseptically  clean,  well  ventilated  and 
warmed. 

Q.    With  what  should  everything  therein  be  washed  off'? 

"With  a  bi-chloride  solution. 
Q.    Wrhat  must  be  done  with  basins,  dressings,   towels, 
etc.,  used  at  the  operation,  and  the  clothes  of  those  assisting 
at  the  operation? 

They  must  be  sterilized. 
Q.    How  long  are  clothes  and  dressings  to  be  sterilized  in 
steam? 

Forty-five  minutes. 
Q.    Where  are  dressings,  sutures  and  other  articles  placed 
which  will  be  needed  at  the  operation'? 
On  the  dressing  table. 
Q.    How  should  the  sister  prepare  herself  for  assisting  at 
an  operation'? 

First,   wash  her  hands  thoroughly  with  brush  and 
soap  for  five  minutes,  then  trim  the  finger-nails  to  the  quick. 
Q.    What  will  she  then  put  on'? 

A  white  sterilized  overdress  and  also  a  white  veil. 
Q.    What  is  to  be  done  next  with  her  hands'? 

They  are  again  washed  with  brush  and  soap  for  five 
minutes,  then  with  alcohol  or  sterilized  water  two  to  three 
minutes. 


202  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  must  she  do  last? 

Immerse  the  hands  in  bi-chloride  solution  for  two 
minutes. 

Q.    Are  the  hands  always  prepared  with  these  solutions? 
No:  if  the  operator  wishes  another  method,   it  must 
be  followed. 

Q.    After  having  washed  her  hands,  is  the  sister  allowed 
to  touch  anything  not  sterilized? 
No. 
Q.    How  many  nurses  generally  assist  at  operations? 

Three  or  four. 
Q.    How  many  handle  the  instruments? 

Only  one. 
Q.    What  will  the  others  do? 

One  gives  the  anaesthetic,  the  other  gets  and  hands 
what  may  be  needed  and  called  for. 

Q.    What  must  the  sister  especially  guard  at  operations? 
Her  eyes,  avoiding  everything  that  she  is  not  obliged 
to  see  and  by  all  means  preserve  her  dignity  and  modesty. 
Q.    What  is  done  after  the  operation? 

The  wound  is  dressed  and  bandages  applied. 
Q.    On  what  is  the  patient  then  placed? 

On  the  wheel-stretcher  and  taken  back  to  bed. 
Q.    How  must  the  bed  be  prepared? 

Everything  must  be  perfectly  fresh  and  clean. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  in  place  of  a  pillow? 

A  towel. 
Q.    What  should  be  placed  in  the  bed  some  time  before 
the  patient  returns? 

Several  hot  water  bottles,   well  protected   and  cov- 
ered. 

Q.    Why  should  they  be  well  covered? 

They  may  cause  serious  burns  while  the   patient  is 
under  the  anaesthetic. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  203 

Q.    What  will  check  the  nausea  somewhat? 

By  applying  a  compress  saturated  with  vinegar  near 
the  mouth  and  nostrils,  so  the  patient  will  inhale  the  vinegar 
vapor. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  kept? 

Warm  and  as  quiet  as  possible,  and  free  from  all  ex- 
citement. 

Q.    What  must  be  allowed  under  no  circumstances? 

To  sit  up  for  any  purpose. 
Q.    How  should  the  wound  made  by  the  operation  be  ar- 
ranged? 

So  that  the  dressing  can  be  observed  without  waking 
the  patient. 

Q.    When  must  this  be  especially  watched  closely? 

During  the  first  twenty-four  hours. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

There  may  be  a  secondary  hemorrhage. 
Q.    With  what  must  the  patient's  strength  be  kept  up? 

With  nourishing  food  in  liquid  form. 
Q.    How  long  must  the  liquid  nourishment  be  kept  up? 

Until  the  doctor  permits  solid  food. 
Q.    What  occurs  frequently  after  an  operation  or  injury? 

A  shock. 
Q.    What  is  a  shock? 

A  complete  prostration  of  the  nervous  system. 
Q.    Which  are  the  symptoms  of  a  shock? 

The  patient  becomes  faint,  and  pale  or  trembling,  the 
mind  confused. 

Q.    With  what  is  the  surface  covered? 

With  perspiration. 
Q.    By  what  other  symptoms  is  a  shock  often  accom- 
panied? 

By  nausea  and  involuntary  passages. 
Q.    How  may  a  shock  easily  result? 

Fatally. 


204  The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    What  will  favor  a  shock? 

Loss  of  blood  or  debility. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  to  the  patient? 

Brandy  and  beef  tea. 
Q.    How  should  it  be  given  if  the  patient  cannot  swallow? 

By  enema. 
Q.    What  should  be  applied  to  the  extremities? 

Heat,  but  with  all  precautions  mentioned  above. 
Q.    Wi:at  is  especially  valuable  in  such  cases? 

Hypodermic  medication. 
Q.    What  will  prove  a  powerful  stimulant? 

A  hot  water  bag  over  the  heart,  but  great  precaution 
must  be  used. 

Q.    What  is  the  patient  never  allowed  to  do? 

To  make  any  effort  to  get  up  or  exert  himself. 
Q.    What  is  the  third  great  danger  to  which  the  patient 
is  liable  after  a  surgical  operation? 

Blood  poisoning  (pyaemia). 
Q.    What  is  the  most  contagious  form  of  pyaemia? 

Erysipelas. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  if  any  patient  developes  symptoms 
of  it? 

He  must  be  promptly  insolated. 
Q.    In  what  wounds  is  it  most  frequent? 

In  lacerated  wounds  and  in  those  of  the  head  and 
hands. 

Q.    How  do  the  edges  become? 

Bed  and  swollen. 
Q.    How  is  the  temperature  and  pulse? 

The  temperature  is  high,  the  pulse  quick. 
Q.    By  what  other  symptoms  is  it  accompanied? 

By  headache,  nausea  and  coated  tongue. 
Q.    In  how  many  days  may  the  disease  terminate  favor- 


ably? 


In  ten  to  fourteen  days,  but  it  is  often  fatal: 


The  NuRsrNG  Sister.  205 

Q.    By  what  is  pyaemia  usually  initiated? 

With  a  chill,  accompanied  by  high  temperature. 
Q.    By  what  is  this  temperature  followed"? 

By  profuse  perspiration. 
Q.    How  is  the  pulse  and  how  is  the  expression  of  the  face? 
The  pulse  is  fast  and  feeble,  the  expression  of  the  face 
anxious. 

Q.    Where  are  abscesses  liable  to  form? 

In  parts  of  the  body  distant  from  the  wound,  espe- 
cially in  the  joints. 

Q.    At  what  intervals  may  the  chill  recur? 

From  eight  to  twenty-four  hours. 
Q.    In  how  many  days  is  this  disease  usually  fatal? 

From  four  to  twelve  days. 
Q.    What  must  by  all  means  be  maintained? 

The  strength  of  the  patient  and  the  fever  kept  down. 
Q.    What  is  of  the  utmost  importance? 

Free  ventilation  and  utmost  cleanliness. 
Q.    What  is  a  ratner  less  dangerous  form  of  blood  poison- 
ing than  the  former? 
Scepticaema. 
Q.    Does  it  occur  with  repeated  chills? 

Nq, 
Q.    By  what  is  it  characterized? 

By  a  high  but  more  regular  fever  and  a  general  typhoid 
condition. 

Q.    What  is  usually  a  fatal  complication  with  wounds? 

Tetanous. 
Q.    What  wounds  does  it  generally  follow? 

Slight  wounds  oftener  than  severe  wounds. 
Q.    From  what  does  it  often  result? 

From  exposure  of  the  wound  to  cold. 
Q.    By  what  is  it  marked? 

By  a  certain  muscular  rigidity. 
Q.    How  does  this  rigidity  set  in? 
Very  abruptly. 


206  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    With  what  does  it  begin? 

With  the  muscles  of  the  throat  and  jaw? 
Q.    How  and  how  long  does  it  extend? 

It  extends  gradually  until  the  whole  body  is  in  contin- 
uous convulsions. 

Q.    What  is  important  in  these  cases? 

That  the  symptoms  be  recognized  early  and  reported 
to  the  doctor. 

Laporatomy. 

Q.  How  long  should  a  patient  who  is  to  be  operated 
for  laporatomy  or  abdominal  section  be  at  the  hospital  before 
the  operation? 

At  least  three  or  four  days. 

Q.    How  must  the  patient  be  prepared  for  the  operation? 

The  evening  or  the  day  preceding  the  operation  the 

patient  is  given  a  special  bath,  the  abdomen  is  shaved  and  a 

soap  poultice  applied,  which  is  kept  in  place  with  a  roller 

bandage. 

Q.    What  is  sometimes  preferred  to  the  soap  poultice? 

A  bichloride  dressing. 
Q.    How  long  is  this  left  on? 

All  night. 
Q.    What  is  done  in  the  morning? 

A  thorough  enema  is  given  and  a  specimen  of  urine 
saved  for  examination. 

Q.    What  is  then  removed? 

If  a  soap  poultice  has  been  applied,  that  is  removed, 
the  abdomen  is  then  first  thoroughly  scrubbed  and  washed 
with  alcohol. 

Q.    What  is  then  applied? 

A  towel  or  piece  of  gauze  soaked  in  1-1000  bichloride 
solution  and  wrung  out  fairly  dry  is  now  laid  on  the  abdomen 
and  secured  with  a  bandage. 
Q.    When  is  this  removed? 

Not  until  the  last  moment  before  the  operation. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  207 

Q.    What  is  laid  on  the  abdomen  when  the  bichloride 
dressing  is  removed? 

Four  sterilized  towels,  one  on  each  side,  one  at  the  top 
and  one  at  the  bottom,  leaving  a  space  in  the  center  for  the 
incision. 

Q.    How  are  the  corners  fastened  together? 

With  sterilized  safety  pins. 
Q.    What  is  placed  over  the  center  until  the  surgeon  is 
ready  to  make  the  incision? 

A  piece  of  bichloride  gauze. 
Q.    At  what  degree  is  the  operating  room  to  be  generally 
heated  for  laporatomy? 
Eighty  degrees. 
Q.    How  should  the  sister  enter  the  operating  room? 

With  surgically  clean  hands,  apron  and  veil. 
Q.    When  the  doctor  is  ready  what  will  be  the  duty  of  the 
sister? 

To  wait  on  the  doctor,  to  keep  out  of  the  way  and  to 
see  that  nothing  is  handed  to  the  doctor  which  has  touched 
any  doubtful  surface. 

Q.    What  must  the  sister  do  if  she  rests  her  hands  on  the 
table  or  touches  anything  that  is  not  sterilized? 

She  must  wash  her  hands  again  and  merely  dip  them 
in  an  antiseptic  solution. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  if  anything  should  chance  to  fall 
on  the  floor? 

It  must  be  laid  aside  and  on  no  account  be  used  again. 
Q.    When  the  operation  is  going  on  what  should  a  sister 
always  remember? 

That  she  is  present  as  an  assistant,  not  as  a  spectator. 
Q.    What  must  she  therefore  look  out  for? 

To  see  what  is  wanted  next  and  not  exactly  what  the 
surgeon  is  doing. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  after  the  operation  is  completed? 
The  dressings  are  to  be  applied. 


208  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  must  these  dressings  be? 

Aseptic  beyond  suspicion. 
Q.    What  is  done  after  the  dressings  are  applied? 

The  patient  is  put  to  bed. 
Q.    What  must  now  be  ready  for  the  patient? 

Hot  water  bottles  well  protected  and  stimulants. 
Q.    Why  is  generally  the  shock  in  laporatomy  so  great? 
On  account  of  the  number  of  nerve-centers  involved. 
Q.    When  may  the  pillow  be  placed  under  the  patient's 
head? 

Not  until  the  effects  of  the  anaesthetic  have  worn  off. 
Q.    How  should  the  abdomen  be  supported  if  there  is  any 
vomiting? 

It  should  be  supported  by  a  hand  on  each  side  of  the 
wound. 

Q.    What  will  this  avoid? 

This  will  avoid  any  strain  upon  the  sutures. 
Q.    What  is  very  important  to  distinguish  in  this  case? 
The  ether-vomiting  after  laparotomy  from  the  vomit- 
ing of  early  developing  of  peritonitis. 

Q.    How  does  the  vomiting  occur  if  caused  by  ether? 

Everything  is  rejected  as  soon  as  swallowed,  and  it 
stops  only  when  the  stomach  is  empty. 

Q.    How  may  it  be  in  acute  peritonitis? 

The  patient  may  take  nourishment  for  hours  and  then 
suddenly  throw  up  a  large  quantity  of  greenish  or  yellowish 
fluid,  having  a  sour  smell. 

Q.    In  what  time  does  peritonitis  usually  develop? 

In  twelve  to  forty  eight  hours  after  the  operation. 
Q.    What  will  frequently  control  the  ether-vomiting  if  it 
is  persistent? 

The  application  of  ice-cold  cloths  to  the  throat. 
Q.    Should  the  patient  be  allowed  to  overload  her  stom- 
ach with  ice  water? 

No,  water  must  be  withheld  as  much  as  possible. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  209 

Q.    What  will  allay  the  thirst  better  than  ice  water? 

Very  hot  water. 
Q.    Of  what  other  advantage  is  hot  water  in  this  case? 
It  will  not  leave  the  mouth  so  parch  as  ice  water,  nor 
is  there  any  danger  that  the  patient  will  desire  to  drink  too 
much  of  it. 

Q.    What  is  very  necessary  during  the  first  twenty-four 
hours? 

To  watch  for  any  symptoms  of  hemorrhage. 
Q.    What  should  the  nurse  do  if  she  suspects  a  hemor- 
rhage? 

She  should  remove  the  pillow,  elevate  the  foot  end  of 
the  bed  slightly,  apply  hot  water  bottles  to  the  extremities, 
and  notify  the  surgeon  at  once. 

Q.    How  often  should  the  urine  be  drawn? 

Unless  otherwise  instructed,  every  six  hours  for  the 
first  forty-eight  hours. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  urine? 

It  must  be  measured,  carefully  observed  and  a  speci- 
men saved  for  examination. 

Q.    What  is  important  to  note  about  the  bowels? 

Whether  the  bowels  have  moved  or  not,  and  the  char- 
acter of  the  defecations. 

Q.    What  is  one  of  the  possible  complications  to  be  looked 
out  for  in  this  case? 

Paralysis  of  the  intestines,  but  this  only  the  doctor 
can  decide. 

Q.    Is  it  important  that  the  clinical  record  be  kept  full 
and  accurate  in  these  cases? 
Yes. 
Q.    How  often  should  the  temperature,  pulse  and  respira- 
tions be  taken  and  marked? 

Every  four  hours,  the  first  few  days. 
Q.    What  nourishment  should  be  given? 

Always  in  liquid  form,   as  is  ordered  by  the  surgeon. 


210  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  nourishment  and  medication  may  be  necessary? 
Rectal,  which  should  be  administered  with  the  great- 
est care. 

Q.    How  may  tympanites  be  relieved? 

By  the  introduction  of  a  tube  into  the  rectum  through 
which  the  gas  may  escape. 

Q.    How  must  the  patient  be  turned  on  her  side  after 
permission  is  given  by  the  doctor  to  do  it? 

The  whole  body  is  turned  at  once  so  gently  that  no 
strain  or  twist  will  come  upon  the  wound. 

Q.    What  must  be  observed  when  the  time  has  come  for 
the  stitches  to  be  removed? 

The  same  antiseptic  precautions  as  when  they  were 
put  in. 

Q.    If  the  patient  is  not    taken  out    ot    bed,    with  what 
should  the  bed  be  protected? 

With  a  rubber  sheet  or  a  Kelly  cushion. 
Q.    What  must  be  spread  over  these? 

Towels  wrung  out  in  bi-chloride  1-1000. 

Rules  for  Sisters  in  the  Surgical  Ward  and  Operating 

Room. 

1.  Sisters  should  wear  clean  cotton  or  linen  over- 
dress with  sleeves  at  the  time  of  operation  and  when  the  sur- 
geon is  making  his  rounds. 

2.  Sisters  having  charge  of  surgical  cases,  should 
have  the  fingernails  carefully  trimmed  down  to  the  quick, 
and  they  should  use  the  nailbrush  with  soap  for  five  minutes 
before  each  operation.  They  should  not  do  any  work  which 
would  cause  the  hands  to  chap;  first,  because  the  dirt  gets  into 
chapped  places  and  cannot  be  easily  removed;  secondly,  they 
might  get  poison  in  the  chaps  and  blood-poison  would  be  the 
consequence. 

3.  After  the  hands  are  washed,  they  should  not  be 
used  about  the  nose,  mouth,  or  put  into  the  pocket. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  211 

4.  During  the  operation  the  hands  should  touch 
nothing  that  has  not  been  sterilized. 

5.  A  sister  who  handles  the  body  of  a  patient,  or 
gives  the  anaesthetic,  or  who  carries  water  or  removes  slops, 
should  not  touch  the  instruments  or  dressings. 

6.  Instruments  which  have  dropped  on  the  floor 
or  elsewhere  should  not  be  used  in  the  same  operation  again. 

7.  Bandages,  instruments  and  dressings  of  all 
kinds  should  be  sterilized  before  every  operation.  Pans  and 
dishes  and  instruments  should  be  scrubbed  with  sapolio  after 
each  operation  and  steamed. 

8.  All  patients  for  abdominal  operations  should 
have  a  thorough  warm  bath  the  evening  before. 

9.  One  sister  only  should  handle  the  instruments, 
gauze  and  thread,  and  she  should  do  nothing  else  during  the 
operation. 

10.  The  ordinary  scissors  should  not  be  used  for  cut- 
ting gauze  and  thread:  only  scissors  which  have  been  pre- 
pared for  it  should  be  used. 

11.  Solution  for  use  in  the  steamer  or  sterilizer: 
Carbonate  of  soda,  one-half  dram  to  one  quart  of  water. 

Gynaecological  Cases. 

Q.    How  are  disorders  of  the  female  reproductive  organ- 
ism classified*? 

As  gynaecological. 
Q.    What  is  the  first  important  thing    for  a  nurse  to 
understand  in  case  a  patient  is  to  be  examined? 

The  method  of  physical  examination  of  the  pelvic 
organs  and  what  assistance  the  physician  may  require  of  her. 
Q:    What  will  be  required  of  the  nurse  for  a  mere  digital 
examination? 

Very  little  besides  her  presence  and  to  wait  upon  the 
doctor  as  he  may  desire. 


212  The  Nursing  Sister. 


Q.    What  is   the  sister  never  allowed  to  do  at  such  an 
examination? 

To  leave  the  patient  alone  with  the  doctor. 
Q.    How  should  a  patient  be  prepared  for  the  exami- 
nation? 

If  possible,  she  should  have  a  bath,  a  vaginal  douche 
and  the  external  parts  must  be  clean. 

Q,    In  what  position  may  a  patient  be  placed  for  an  in- 
strumental examination? 

Either  in  a  dorsal,  knee-chest  or  lateral  position. 
Q.    How  must  the  patient  lie  in  a  dorsal  position? 

Flat  on  her  back,  with  the  knees  elevated. 
Q.    How  in  the  knee-chest  position? 

Just  the  reverse,  the  hips  elevated. 
Q.    On  what  does  the  weight  then  rest? 

On  the  knees. 
•Q.    What  should  lie  flat  against  the  table? 

The  chest,  and  should  be  supported  by  the  elbows. 
Q.    As  what  is  the  third    and    most  common  position 
known? 

As  Sims  position. 
Q.    On  what  side  is  the  patient  placed  in  this  position? 
On  the  left  side,  with  the  left  butt:  ck  on  the  extreme 
left  corner  of  the  table,  the  left  arm  behind  her,  and  the 
.knees  drawn  up,  the  right  above  the  left. 

Q.    Where  do  the  head  and  right  arm  of  the  patient  come? 

To  the  right  side  of  the  table. 
<Q.    From  what  must  the  patient  be  protected? 

From  unnecessary  exposure. 
Q.    How  should  the  limbs  be  protected? 

A  light  blanket  or  sheet  should  be  placed  lengthwise, 
•so  that  each  leg  is  covered  separate. 

Q.    What  should  a  sister  do  if  she  places  the  patient  in  a 
-dorsal  position? 

She  must  raise  the  patient's  knees  herself. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  213. 


Q.    What  will  she  avoid  by  this'? 

Any  strain  on  the  part  of  the  patient. 
Q.    Should  the  patient  ever  be  allowed  to  rise  from  her 
position  without  first  turning  to  the  side? 

Never,  because  the  strain  is  too  great. 
Q.    How  is  the  speculum  prepared  for  use? 

By  first  dipping  it  for  an  instant  into  hot  water  to> 
warm  it,  then  oiling  the  outer  surface. 

Q.    If  the  Sims  speculum  is  used,  who  must  hold  it  in  its- 
place? 

The  sister,  if  required. 
Q.    Where  must  she  stand? 

Behind  the  patient,  facing  the  operator. 
Q.    How  should  she  stand? 

Firm  on  both  feet,  in  a  position  that  she  can  maintain 
steadily  for  a  long  time  if  necessary. 

Q.    Where  may  she  rest  her  right  arm? 

On  the  right  hip  to  steady  it. 
Q.    What  hand  retains  the  speculum? 

The  right  hand. 
Q.    In  what  position  must  it  be  held? 

In  the  same  position  in  which  it  is  handed. 
Q.    What  other  instruments  are  needed  for  these  cases? 
Depressor,  sound,  probe,  tenaculum,  curette,  uterine 
dressing,  forceps,  applicator,  cotton  holders,  dilators  and  pes- 
saries . 

Q.    What  are  more  commonly  employed  in  the  treatment 
of  uterine  cases? 

Various  tampons  and  other  local  dressings. 
Q.    How  is  the  ordinary  tampon  made? 

By  cutting  a  strip  of  absorbent  cotton  about  three 
inches  wide  and  rolling  it  up,  not  too  tightly,  until  it  has  a 
diameter  of  about  an  inch  and  a  half. 

Q.    Where  is  the  twine  or  stout  thread  tied? 

About  the  middle  of  the  roll,  leaving  ends  of  about 
six  inches  hanging. 


214  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q,    For  what  are  these  ends  left? 
For  convenience  in  removal. 
Q,    For  what  purpose  are  they  used? 

They  are  used  to  keep  the  parts  in  proper  position  and 
to  apply  medication. 

Q.    How  is  the  butterfly  tampon  made? 

Take  a  thin,  flat  piece  of  cotton  with  a  string  tied 
about  the  middle. 

Q.    How  is  a  kitetail  tampon  made? 

It  is  a  series  of  bunches  of  cotton  tied  at  intervals  of 
two  or  three  inches  along  one  string. 

Q.    By  what  other  means  is  vaginal  medication  applied? 

By  means  of  suppositories  and  douches. 
Q.    What  is  used  for  a  douche? 

It  is  either  medicated  or  of  pure  water,  as  directed. 
Q.    At  what  temperature  are  hot  douches  usually  ordered? 

At  a  temperature  of  112  to  118  degrees  Fahr. 
Q.    How  are  they  given? 

They  are  usually  ordered  as  prolonged  douches,  from 
two  to  four  quarts  given. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  lie? 

The  patient  should  lie  on  her  back,  with  the  hips  ele- 
vated until  they  are  several  inches  higher  than  the  shoulders. 
Q.    Why  is  it  absolutely  necessary  to  have  the  patient  in 
this  position? 

Because  a  douche  taken  standing  or  sitting  is  of  very 
little  use. 

Q.    What  is  put  under  the  patient? 

A  douche  pan. 
Q.    What  syringe  is  used? 

A  fountain  syringe,  as  it  has  a  steady  flow  under  low 
pressure. 

Q.    How  should  it  be  held  or  hung? 

At  a  considerable  height  to  give  good  force  to  the 
flow. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  215 

Q.    What  kind  of  a  nozzle  should  be  used? 

A  long  nozzle  which  has  three  or  four  openings,  and 
it  must  be  introduced  well  before  the  water  is  injected. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  when  giving  a  hot  douche? 
That  the  mucous  membrane  is  not  blistered  by  the 
hot  tube. 

Q.    What  tubes  are  preferable  to  metal  ones? 

Ivory  or  hard  rubber. 
Q.    What  tubes  and  nozzles  are  mostly  used? 

Glass  tubes,  because  they  can  be  made  and  kept  per- 
fectly aseptic. 

Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

By  first  boiling  them  and  keeping  them  in  an  antis- 
eptic solution  or  a  piece  of  sterilized  gauze. 

Q.    Which  are  the  most  common  gynaecological  opera- 
tions? 

Those  for  laceration  of  the  cervix  and  perineum. 
Q.    What  must  be  carefully  noted  and  reported  in  the 
preparation  of  the  patient? 

The  previous  condition  of  the  bowels  and  the  char- 
acter of  any  vaginal  discharge. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  prepared? 

The  patient  should  have  a  full  bath  the  day  before 
and,  if  necessary,  the  parts  shaved. 
Q.    May  the  sister  shave  the  parts? 

No:  this  should  be  done  by  the  doctor  or  whoever 
may  be  appointed  by  him. 

Q.    What  should  be  given  in  the  evening? 

A  purgative,  and  in  the  morning  an  enema,  if  possi- 
ble six  hours  before  the  operation,  so  the  rectum  may  become 
empty  and  quiet. 

Q.    What  besides  this  must  be  given  in  the  morning? 

An  antiseptic  douche. 
Q.    About  what  should  the  nurse  obtain  definite  direc- 
tions from  the  surgeon  after  an  operation  of  the  cervix? 
About  emptying  the  bladder. 


216  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What    should    be    done   after   an   operation    of  the 
perineum? 

Tie  the  patient's  knees  together,   that  no  unconscious 
movement  on  her  part  may  bring  a  strain  upon  the  stitches. 
Q.    What  might  be  the  consequence  if  there  be  much 
strain  upon  the  stitches? 

The  desirable  result  will  be  hindered,   even  if  the 
stitches  are  not  torn  out. 

Q.    Of  what  does  the  treatment  consist? 

Of  rest  and  keeping  up  absolute  cleanliness. 
Q.    Upon  whom  does  the  failure  or  success  of  an  oper- 
ation largely  depend? 

Upon  the  nurse. 
Q.    What    may    a  little    careless    manipulation    on  her 
part  do? 

It  may  render  useless  the  best  skill  of  the  operator. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  if  the  patient  is  allowed  to  pass 
urine  voluntarily? 

The  sutured  parts  must  be  gently  irrigated  each  time. 
Q.    What  care  must  be  taken  if  the  patient  is  catherized? 

That  no  drops  of  urine  fall  upon  the  wound. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  avoided? 

By  placing  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton  between  it  and 
the  catheter. 

Q.    What  must  the  nurse  do  after  and  during  defecation? 

See  that  there  is  no  strain  upon  the  sutures. 
Q.    What  must  be  exercised  in  all  manipulation  in  such- 


cases 


The  utmost  gentleness. 
Q.    How  long  must  the  most  scrupulous  cleanliness  be 
kept  up? 

Until  the  stitches  are  removed,  which  is  about  the- 
ninth  day. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  217 

Fractures. 
Q.    What  are  the  most  common  injuries  of  bones? 

Fractures. 
Q.    What  is  a  simple  fracture? 

It  is  a  fracture  in  which  the  bone  is  only  divided. 
Q.    What  is  the  fracture  called  if  there  is  a  wound  of  the 
soft  parts  so  that  the  broken  bone  communicates  with  the 
outer  air"? 

A  compound  fracture. 
Q.    Does  every  flesh   wound,  existing    together    with    a 
fracture,  render  it  a  compound  fracture? 

No,  only  then,  when  it  leads  to  the  seat  of  the  frac- 
ture. 

Q.    What  is  it  called  if  the  bone  is  broken  in  two  or  more 
places? 

A  multiple  fracture. 
Q.    What  is  it  called  if  the  bone  is  broken  into  several 
small  fragments? 

A  communicated  fracture. 
Q.    What  is  it  called  if  some  joint  or  cavity  are  involved 
in  the  injury? 

A  complicated  fracture. 
Q.    What  is  it  called  when  one  end  of  the  broken  bone  is 
driven  forcibly  into  the  other? 
An  impacted  fracture. 
Q.    When  is  a  fracture  serious? 

When  there  is  a  great  injury  of  the  tissues,  or  when  a 
joint  is  involved. 

Q.    What  are  signs  of  a  fracture? 

Pain,  distortion,  loss  of  function  or  unnatural  move- 
ment or  crepitus. 

Q.    What  is  crepitus? 

It  is  the  grating  made  by  rubbing  together  the  ends 
of  the  broken  bone. 


218  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    By  what  is  a  fracture  of  the  spine  indicated? 

By  loss  of  sensation  and  power  of  motion  below  the 
point  of  injury. 

Q.    What  will  a  patient  complain  of  with  a  fractured  rib? 
Of  sharp  pain  when  he  takes  a  deep  breath  or  coughs, 
and  will  often  spit  blood. 

Q,    What  is  the  danger  from  a  fractured  rib? 

It  is  of  injury  to  the  heart,  lungs  or  large  blood- 
vessels. 

Q.    In  what  does  the  treatment  of  fracture  consist? 

In  putting  the  fragments  into  proper  position  by  the 
doctor  and  keeping  them  there  until  they  have  united. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  for  this  purpose? 

Splints  made  of  wood,  tin,  paste-board,  leather,  felt 
or  anything  that  will  hold  the  bone  accurately  and  firmly  in 
place. 

Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  splint  before  it  is  ap- 
plied? 

It  must  be  well  padded. 
Q.    What  are  frequently  used  in  place  of  splints? 

Bandages,  saturated  with  glue,  starch  or  plaster  of 
paris. 

Q.    What  is  usually  preferred  for  a  compound  fracture? 

A  fracture  box. 
Q.    How  should  this  be  prepared? 

It  must  be  padded  well. 
Q.    What  will  then  answer  the  purpose  of  the  splints? 

The  sides  of  the  box  to  which  the  limb  is  bandaged. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  with  the  limb  before  any  appa- 
ratus is  applied? 

It  must  be  carefully  washed  and  dried. 
Q.    What  must  be  dusted  over  it  to  absorb  perspiration? 

Fine  starch  or  toilet  powder. 
Q.    What  is  frequently  applied  in  fractures  of  the  thigh? 
An  extension  weight. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  219 


Q.    Where  is  this  attached? 

It  is  attached  to  the  foot  with  adhesive  straps. 
Q.    How  should  a  broken  limb  be  lifted? 

The  parts  both  above  and  below  the  point  of  fracture 
must  be  lifted. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken? 

Neither  to  shorten  nor  to  twist  the  limb. 
Q.    What  may  be  the  consequence  of  unskillful  handling? 
A  single  fracture  may  be  converted  into  a  compound 
one. 

Q.    What  is  dislocation? 

It  is  the  displacement  of  one  of  the  bony  structures  of 
a  joint  from  the  other. 
Q.    What  is  a  sprain? 

It  is  the  laceration  or  stretching  of  the  ligaments 
with  twisting  of  the  joint. 

Hemorrhage. 

Q.    What  is  a  hemorrhage? 

The  escape  of  blood  from  its  containing  vessels. 
Q.    How  may  it  be  described? 

As  arterial,  venous  or  capillary  hemorrhage. 
Q.    Of  what  color  is  the  blood  from  an  artery? 

Bright  red. 
Q.    How  will  it  spurt  out? 

In  jets  of  considerable  force  from  the  side  of  the 
wound  nearest  to  the  heart. 

Q.    Of  what  color  is  venous  blood? 

It  is  of  a  dark  purplish  hue. 
Q.    How  does  it  move? 

In  a  sluggish,  continuous  flow,  mainly  on  the  side 
farthest  from  the  heart. 

Q.    What  is  a  capillary  hemorrhage? 

A  mere  oozing  of  blood. 
Q.    Which  of  the  three  is  the  most  dangerous? 

The  first. 


220  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    If  a  hemorrhage  is  not  checked  promptly,  how  may  it 
prove  in  many  cases? 
•  Fatal. 
Q.  .  How  is  a  hemorrhage,  following  short  after  an  opera- 
tion, named? 

A  secondary  hemorrhage. 
Q.    How  long  is  there  any  danger  of  a  hemorrhage  after 
an  operation? 

The  first  twenty-four  hours,  but  it  is  by  no  means  over 
until  the  wound  is  well  healed. 

Q.    What  favors  the  formation  of  clots  and  the  arterial 
contraction? 

The  application  of  heat  or  cold. 
Q.    What  will  reduce  the  force  with  which  the  blood  is 
sent  to  the  artery? 

Elevating  the  injured  part. 
Q.    What  must  be  done  if  blood  is  spurting    from  an 
artery? 

Pressure  must  be  applied. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

With  the  linger,  by  pressing  upon  the  bleeding  point 
or  the  vessels  which  supply  it. 

Q.    What  may  be  done  if  the  bleeding  vessel  is  too  deep 
to  be  reached  by  the  finger? 

The  wound  can  be  plugged  with  gauze. 
Q.    How  can  this  be  done  most  effectively? 

Cut  a  number  of  small  bits,  each  a  little  larger,  begin- 
ning with  the  smallest,  press  them  well  into  the  wound. 
Q.    How  far  should  the  pile  extend? 

To  some  height  about  the  surrounding  level. 
Q.    By  what  may  it  be  secured? 

By  a  tight  bandage. 
Q.    Where  can  such  compression  be  made  successfully? 
Only  over  a  bony  surface. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  221 

Q.  In  what  cases  does  it  become  difficult  and  sometimes 
even  impossible  to  control  the  hemorrhage? 

If  the  artery  is  imbedded  in  the  muscles. 
Q.    How  are  wounds  of  the  head  and  face  apt  to  bleed? 

Profusely. 
Q.    How  can  this  bleeding  be  almost  always  controlled? 
By  direct  pressure,  as  the  skull  affords  firm   counter- 
pressure. 

Q.  What  may  be  applied,  in  case  the  pressure  of  the  fin- 
ger cannot  be  made  forcible  enough,  or  if  the  pressure  cannot 
be  kept  up  long? 

A  tourniquet. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  with  the  limb  before  the  tour- 
niquet is  applied? 

It  should  be  elevated  as  high  as  possible. 
Q.    What  may  be  used  in  the  absence  of  the  regular  ap- 
paratus? 

A  handkerchief  or  a  piece  of  muslin  with  a  hard  knot 
or  a  smooth  stone  tied  in  the  middle. 

Q.    How  should  this  be  fastened  around  the  limb? 

Rather  loose  and  twisted  with  a  stick. 
Q.    Where  must  the  knot  be  kept? 

Over  the  injured  artery  until  pressure  enough  is  made 
to  completely  occlude  it. 

Q.    How  long  may  a  tourniquet  remain  on  the  arm? 

One  hour. 
Q,    How  long  on  the  thigh? 

For  two  hours,  no  longer. 
Q.    For  what  reason? 

As  the  part  will  die  if  its  nutrition  is  cut  off  too  long. 
Q.   What  may  be  used  if  the  artery  cannot  be  reached 
with  a  tourniquet? 

The  handle  of  a  long  key,  or  a  blunt  stick,  suitably 
covered,  may  be  forcibly  pressed  against  it. 


222  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  often  used  to  prevent  hemorrhage  during  an 
operation  upon  the  limb? 

A  very  tight  rubber  bandage  spirally  from  its  extrem- 
ity to  a  point  above  the  site  of  the  proposed  incision. 

Q.    What  should  be  around  the  place  where  this  stops'? 
A  piece  of  rubber  tubing  with  hooks  at  the  end  to  be 
fastened. 

Q.    What  is  to  be  removed  when  the  circulation  will  be 
found  almost  completely  cut  off? 
The  rubber  bandage. 
Q.    What  should  be  kept  on  hand  where  there  is  clanger 
of  secondary  hemorrhage? 

A  piece  of  heavy  rubber  tubing,  which  may  be  used  in 
place  of  a  tourniquet. 

Q.    What  will  sometimes  aid  in  arresting  a  homorrhage? 

Flexion  of  a  limb. 
Q.    How  is  this  done? 

Put  in  the  joint  a  firm  roll  of  lint,  against  which  pres- 
sure will  come  when  the  joint  is  bent. 

Q.    What  may  the  patient  be  directed  to  do  in  case  of 
bleeding  from  the  palm  of  the  hand? 
To  clasp  closely  a  wad  of  lint. 
Q.    How  should  he  hold  the  hand  at  the  same  time? 

High  above  the  head. 
Q.    What  other  means  are  there  for  arresting  a  hemor- 
rhage? 

Application  of  medicines  externally,  such  as  perchlo- 

ride  of  iron,  alum,  gallic  acid. 

Q.    With  what  is  obstinate  bleeding  from  a  small  point 
sometimes  checked? 

By  touching  it  with  caustic. 
Q.    What  may  be  employed  by  the  surgeon  when    the 
bleeding  is  from  many  vessels  over  a  large  surface? 
A  cautery. 
Q.    What  is  a  cautery? 

The  application  of  a  hot  iron. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  223 

Q.    When  is  the  cautery  or  external  medicine  used? 

Only  then  when  no  other  means  will  answer. 
Q.    What  method  is  most  commonly  used  to  arrest  hemor- 
rhage of  the  artery? 
Ligation. 
Q.    How  is  this  done? 

The  artery  is  picked  up  with  a  pair  of  forceps  and  a 
ligature  tied  firmly  around  it. 

Q.    What  ligatures  were  formerly  used  for  this  purpose? 

Ligatures  of  strong,  soft  silk. 
Q.    What  ligatures  are  employed    now  in  wounds  which 
are  to  be  completely  closed? 

Cat-gut  ligatures,  because  they  absorb  and  do  not 
need  to  be  removed. 

Q.    Which  is  the  most  dangerous  form  of  venous  hemor- 
rhage? 

That  from  rupture  or  a  varicose  vein. 
Q.    Where  should  pressure,  heat  or  cold  be  applied  in  such 
a  case? 

Below  the  bleeding  point,  the  limb  being  elevated. 
Q.    Why  is  pressure  made  below  the  point  of  bleeding? 
Because  above  the  point   it   would  be  useless  and 
absurd. 

Q.    Why  is  ligation  avoided? 

Because  it  is  likely  to  cause  inflammation  of  the  vein. 
Q.    What  should  be  worn  in  cases  where  there  is  danger 
of  such  a  rupture? 

An  elastic  stocking  or  bandage. 
Q.    When  should  this  be  put  on? 

Before  getting  up  in  the  morning. 
Q.    Is  cappilary  hemorrhage  dangerous? 

No,  it  can  easily  be  checked  by  cold,  by  position  or  by 
hot,  not  merely  by  warm  water. 

Q.    How  must  the  hot  water  be  used? 
As  hot  as  it  can  be  borne. 


224  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Why  will  warm  water  not  do? 

Because  it  will  increase  the  flow  of  blood. 
Q.    How  does  the  blood  come  up  if  it  comes  from  the 
lungs? 

It  is  coughed  up,  is  bright  red  and  more  or  less  frothy. 
Q.    From  where  does  blood,  supposed  to  come  from  the 
lungs,  frequently  come? 

From  the  mouth  or  throat. 
Q.    What  is  this  called? 

Ha?motysis. 
Q.    What  is  the  vomiting  of  blood  called? 

Hasmatemesis. 
Q.    What  is  the  patient  likely  to  have  before  it  occurs? 

A  sense  of  fullness  and  oppression. 
Q.    How  does  the  blood  come  up? 

A  large  quantity  of  dark  blood,  mixed  with  food,  is 
thrown  up  without  much  nausea. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  kept  in  both  cases? 

Quiet  and  cool,  the  head  elevated. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  to  the  patient? 

Bits  of  ice,  which    should   be   swallowed    whole,  if 
possible. 

Q.    What  may  be  applied  externally? 

Ice-cold  cloths. 
Q.    What  kind  of  food  may  be  given? 

Only  fluid  food,  cold,  in  small  quantities. 
Q.    What  may  be  done  when  an  exhausting  hemorrhage 
has  occurred,  after  its  source  has  been  controlled? 

The  limbs  may  be  tightly  bandaged  from  their  ex- 
tremities to  the  trunk. 
Q.    For  what  purpose? 

To  prevent  the  circulation  of  blood  which  is  needed 
by  the  vital  organs. 

Q.    What  care  must  be  taken? 

Not  to  leave  them  on  too  long. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  225 

Q.    What  often  appears  in  the  stool  after  the  vomiting  of 
blood? 

Some  blood,  as  a  dark,  tarry  substance. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  for  a  hemorrhage  from  the  bowels? 

Ice-cold  injections  or  other  medicated  solutions  as 
ordered. 

Q.    What  should  be  applied  over  the  abdomen? 

Cold  applications. 
Q.    What  is  sometimes  ordered  internally? 

Small  doses  of  opium. 
Q.    In  what  cases  may  it  occur? 

In  the  course  of  typhoid  or  yellow  fever. 
Q.    What  is  most  commonly  the  cause  of  such  a  hemor- 
rhage? 

Hemorrhoids. 
Q.    How  must  the  patient  be  kept  in  this  case? 

Quiet  and  lying  down. 
Q.    From  where  does  blood  in  the  urine  come? 

From  the  kidneys,  bladder  or  urethea. 
Q.    What  must  be  noted? 

Whether  it  appears  at  the  beginning  or  at  the  end  of 
the  micturiation,  and  whether  the  passage  is  accompanied 
by  pain  or  not. 

Q.    How  is  the  blood  from  the  kidneys? 

Dark  and  clotted. 
Q.    How  is  it  from  the  bladder? 

Generally  clear. 
Q.    What  is  generally  ordered  in  cases  of  uterine  hemor- 
rhage, especially  when  following  an  operation? 

A  vaginal  douche  of  hot  water;  or  hot  solution  of 
alum. 

Q.    What  is  given  internally? 

Fluid  extract  of  ergot  or  gallic  acid. 
Q.    What  other  local  hemorrhage  needs  special  attention? 

Epistaxis  (bleeding  from  the  nose). 

15— 


226  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  often  the  cause  of  it? 

An  accident  or  a  spontaneous  outbreak. 
Q.    If  spontaneous,  as  what  may  it  be  looked  upon? 

As  an  effort  of  nature  to  relieve  the  head. 
Q.    But  if  this  is  too  severe,  how  can  it  be  checked? 

By  pressing  the  facial  artery  at  the  root  of  the  nose. 
Q.    Where  should  cold  applications  be  applied"? 

To  the  forehead  and  back  of  the  neck. 
Q.    What  position  should  never  be  taken'? 

Leaning  over  a  basin. 
Q.    How  should  you  make  the  patient  stand'? 

Erect,   throw  his  head  back  and  elevate  his  arms 
while  you  hold  a  cold,  damp  sponge  to  the  nostrils. 
Q.    What  is  done  if  the  bleeding  still  persists? 

The  nostrils  are  syringed  with  salt  and  water,  ice-cold, 
one  dram  to  one  pint,  or  with  a  solution  of  alum  or  iron. 
Q.    What  must  the  patient  avoid? 

Blowing  the  nose. 
Q.    What  is  necessary  if  all  other  means  fail? 

That  the  surgeon  plug  the  nose. 
Q.    Why  is  this  process  resorted  to  when  all  others  have 
proved  ineffectual? 

Because  it  is  very  painful. 

Emergencies. 

Q.    What  above  all  things  should  a  sister  show  in  case  of 
any  accident? 

Coolness  and  presence  of  mind,  no  hurry,  no  confusion 
whatever. 

Q.    What  is  often  the  consequence  of  any  severe  injury? 

A  complete  prostration  of  the  vital  powers. 
Q.    How  is  this  called? 

A  shock. 
Q.    How  does  the  patient  appear  in  this  state? 

Sometimes  conscious,  the  surface  of  the  body  pale  and 
covered  with  cold  perspiration. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  227 

Q.    What  is  the  temperature? 

Abnormal. 
Q.   -How  is  the  pulse? 

Feeble. 
Q.    How  are  the  nostrils? 

Dilated. 
Q.    How  are  the  eye-lids? 

Drooping. 
Q.    What  other  symptoms  may  be  observed? 

Mental  and  muscular  weakness. 
Q.    What  may  happen  in  less  severe  cases? 

Nausea  and  vomiting. 
Q.    How  should  the  head  be  kept? 

Low. 
Q.    What  should  be  given  to  the  patient? 

Stimulants  until  the  heart's  action  is  revived. 
Q.    To  what  parts  should  heat  be  applied? 

To  the  extremities  and  the  pit  of  the  stomach. 
Q.    What  is  the  best  stimulant  when  there  is  nausea? 

Brandy. 
Q.    What  is  to  be  done  if  the  patient  cannot  swallow? 

Inject  brandy  or  camphorated  oil  hypodermically. 
Q.    What  manifests  many  of  the  same  signs  as  a  shock? 

Fainting  or  syncope. 
Q.    By  what  is  this  unconsciousness  in  fainting    occa- 
sioned? 

By  insufficient  supply  of  blood  to  the  brain. 
Q.    What  must  never  be  done  with  the  head? 

It  must  never  be  raised,  but  kept  as  low  or  even  lower 
than  the  feet. 

Q.    What  is  next  important  for  the  patient? 

Plenty  of  fresh  air. 
Q.    What  may  be  given  by  inhalation? 

Ammonia,  but  not  too  strong. 


228  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Fractures  and  Dislocations. 
Q.    What  should  he  done  in  case  of  fracture  of  the  limb  if 
it  cannot  he  set  at  once. 

Temporary  splints,  made  of  paste-board,  shingles,  etc.* 
may  be  applied  until  the  surgeon  arrives. 

Q.    How  can  it  be  bandaged  if  no  splint  is  at  hand? 

To  a  straight,  padded  stick,  or  even  to  the  other  leg. 
Q.    What  should  be  applied  in  fracture  of  the  knee-cap 
bone  (patela)? 

The  foot  should  be  elevated  to  a  considerable  height 
and  the  leg  kept  straight  by  a  long  splint  at  the  back. 
Q.    What  should  be  put  under  the  knee? 

A  pad. 
Q.    What  should  be  applied  for  fractured  ribs? 

Keep  the  patient  quiet  in  bed,  put  a  broad  bandage 
tightly  around  the  chest. 

Q.    What  should  be  noted  particularly? 

Whether  there  is  any  blood  raised. 
Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  kept  if  skull  fracture  is 
suspected? 

In  a  quiet,  dark  room,  on  his  back,  with  head  slightly 
raised  and  cold  cloths  be  applied  to  head. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  for  fracture  of  the  jaw? 

The  mouth  should  be  closed  and  fixed  in  place  with  a 
bandage. 

Q.    Where  do  sprains  frequently  occur? 

At  the  wrist  and  ankle. 
Q.    How  can  they  be  treated? 

They  may  be  soaked  in  hot  water  and  bandaged  with 
hot  cloths. 

Q.    What  may  be  used  on  a  painful  crushed  finger  or  toe? 
It  may  be  wrapped  in  soft  cloths  wet  with  hot  water 
and  a  little  laudanum. 

Q.    About  what  must  special  care  be  taken  with  contused 
and  lacerated  wounds? 

The  cleaning  out  of  blood  clots. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  229 

Q.    la  what  cases  is  rest  especially  important? 

With  all  extensive  wounds,  especially  those  of  the 
thoric  and  abdominal  cavities. 

Q.    How  should  the  patient  be  laid  when  the  chest  is 
injured? 

Lay  the  patient  rather  on  the  wounded  side  than  on 
the  other. 

Q.    What  is  important  with  a  punctured  wound? 

To  keep  it  open  until  it  heals  from  the  bottom. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if   this  puncture  be  made  by 
splinter  or  thorn? 

The  splinter  must  be  entirely  removed,  not  by  poking 
at  it,  but  by  making  a  sharp  incision  along  its  course. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  the  splinter  goes  under  the 
tingernail? 

Trim  or  split  the  fingernail  down  to  the  end  of  the 
splinter. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  in  case  of  the  bite  of  a  venomous 
snake  or  other  probably  poisoned  wound? 

The  bleeding  should  be  rather  encouraged  than 
checked. 

Q.    How  can  this  be  done? 

The  limb  should  be  tied  tight  if  possible  above  the 
point  of  injury  at  once,  the  wound  should  be  sucked  or  cup- 
ping glasses  applied? 

Q.    What  else  may  be  applied? 

Ammonia  water. 
Q.    What  may  be  done  if  possible? 
The  wound  may  be  cauterized. 
Q.    What  may  always  be  regarded  as  suspicious? 

The  bite  of  any  animal. 
Q.    What  bite  is  said  to  be  more  dangerous  than  that  of  a 


dog 


a 


The  bite  of  a  rat  or  cat. 
Q.    How  should  stings  of  insects  be  treated? 
With  cool  lotions. 


230  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    With  what  may  the  eruption  caused  by  poisoning  he 
treated? 

With  a  saturated  solution  of  carbonate  of  soda. 
Q.    What  are  generally  the  most  alarming  accidents  that 
will  happen  from  time  to  time? 
Those  caused  by  fire. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  your  own  clothes  catch  on  fire? 

Lie  down  and  roll  and  keep  your  mouth  closed. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  .you  see  another  person  in  the 
same  danger? 

Throw  the  person  down  and  wrap  a  shawl,  rug  or  any 
heavy  woolen  thing  at  hand  to  extinguish  the  flames. 
Q.    Where  should  you  begin  to  wrap? 

At  the  head,  keeping  the  flames  as  much  as  possible 
from  the  face. 

Q.    What  is  always  the  great  danger  in  case  of  Are  acci- 
dent? 

That  of  inhaling  the  flames. 
Q.    What  is  the  first  object  in  the  treatment  of  burns  and 
scalds? 

To  exclude  the  air. 
Q.    What  will  this  at  once  allay? 

The  pain. 
Q.    What  can  be  done  if  the  injury  is  only  on  the  surface? 
Sprinkle  it  thickly  with  carbonate  of  soda  and  tie  a 
wet  bandage  over  it  until  the  pain  subsides. 

Q.    How  may  the  part  then  be  protected  from  the  action 
of  the  air? 

By  painting  it  over  with  the  white  of  an  egg. 
Q.    What  is  even  a  better  application? 

Flexible  collodian. 
Q.    What  other  plan  can  be  used  for  relief? 

Dust  the  surface  with  flour  and  cover  with  a  thick 
layer  of  cotton  wool. 

Q.    If  the  burn  is  severe  enough  to  have  blistered  or  de- 
stroyed the  outer  skin  (cuticle)  what  is  generally  used? 


The  Nursing  Sister.  231 

Carron  oil,  with  equal  parts  of  linseed  oil  and  lime 
water. 

Q.    What  is  even  better? 

Pure  olive  oil  or  vaseline. 
Q.    By  what  is  a  severe  burn  usually  accompanied? 

By  a  shock. 
Q.    How  are  burns  produced  by  strong  acids  treated? 

The  same  as  those  by  fire. 
Q.    What  may  make  a  severe  burn? 

Lime  or  caustic. 
Q.    How  may  these  be  treated? 

With  a  solution  of  diluted  vinegar  or  lemon  juice, 
about  a  teaspoonful  to  a  cup  of  water. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  fragments  of  lime  get  into 
the  eye? 

Bathe  it  with  a  solution  of  vinegar  or  lemon  without 
wasting  time  in  trying  to  pick  it  out. 

Q.    How  may  dust  or  cinders  be  cleared  out  of  the  eye? 
By  drawing  the  upper  lid  well  down  over  the  lower 
one  and  at  the  same  time  blowing  the  nose  forcibly. 

Q.    What  can  be  done  if  a  particle  gets  caught  in  the 
lower  lid? 

Draw  down  the  lower  lid   by  the  lashes,  direct  the 
patient  to  turn  the  eye-ball  toward  the  nose. 

Q.    With  what  can  any  foreign  body  then  be  wiped  out  of 
the  eye? 

With  a  soft  handkerchief. 
Q     What  can  be  done  if  it  is  under  the  upper  lid? 

This  can  be  turned  up  over  a  knitting  needle  or  a 
small  pencil  and  then  wiped  out. 

Q.    In  what  direction  should  the  eye  always  be  rubbed? 

Always  towards  the  nose. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  an  insect  gets  into  the  ear? 
The  sufferer  should  be  laid  on  the  other  side,  the  tube 
of  the  ear  be  straightened  by  pulling  the  tip  upward  and 
slightly  backward. 


232  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    With  what  should  the  ear  then  be  filled? 

With  olive  oil  or  glycerine;  then  the  insect  will  float 
on  the  surface. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  be  a  hard  substance  in 
the  ear? 

Hold  the  ear  downward  and  syringe  gently  with  warm 
water. 

Q.    What  special  care  must  be  taken  in  this  case? 

Not  to  close  the  opening  of  the  ear  with  the  syringe. 
Q.    In  what  cases  should  this  never  be  done? 

If  it  is  anything  that  will  swell  by  moisture,  as  a  bean 
or  pea. 

Q.    Is  it  advisable  to  poke  at  such  substances? 
Never,  for  it  may  be  driven  beyond  reach. 
Q.    Who  should  be  sent  for? 

The  doctor,  as  soon  as  possible. 
Q.    What  should  be  done  if  there  is  any  foreign  body  in 
the  nostril? 

Make  the  patient  take  a  full  breath,  then  close  the 
mouth  and  other  nostril  firmly,  when  the  air,  having  no  other 
way  to  escape,  may  expel  the  obstruction. 

Q.    What  should  be  done,  if  this  fails,  and  the  object  is 
in  sight? 

Compress  the  nostril  above  it  to  prevent  its  being 
pushed  up  farther,  and  hook  it  out  with  a  hair-pin  or  bent 
wire. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  if  anything  is  stuck  in  the  throat 
or  oesophagus? 

It  can  be  hooked  out  the  same  way,  if  it  is  too  far 
down  to  be  reached  with  the  finger? 

Q.    In  what  case  is  it  advisable  to  push  the  object  down? 

Only  in  case  it  were  digestible  substance. 
Q.    What  may  be  taken  to  carry  the  obstruction  down? 
A  piece  of  bread  may  be  swallowed. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  233 


Q.    By  what  is  a  foreign  body  generally  expelled  out  of 
the  windpipe? 

By  coughing. 
Q.    What  part  is  very  sensitive? 

The  trachea. 
Q.    What    will    sometimes    be   of    use    if  the  person  is 
choking? 

A  blow  on  the  back. 
Q.    What  can  be  done  if  it  is  a  child? 

It  can  be  taken  up  by  the  feet  and  held  head  down, 
while  several  blows  can  be  given  between  the  shoulders. 

Q.    What  may  be  done  if  a  person  is  apparently  drowned? 
Before  beginning  artificial  respiration,  turn  the  face 
down  for  a  moment  and  clean  out  with  the  finger  the  mucous 
that  may  be  at  the  base  of  the  tongue. 

Q.    In  what  other  cases  must  this  be  done? 

In  cases  of  strangulation. 
Q.    What  must  be  removed  from  the  neck? 

Everything  tight. 
Q.    From  where  must  a  patient  be  kept  suffering  from  se- 
vere cold? 

From  the  heat,  otherwise  there  is  danger  of  sloughing 
of  the  frost  bitten  parts. 

Q.    Where  should  a  person  be  taken  who  is  found  frozen? 
He  should  be  taken  to  a  cold  room,  undressed,  rubbed 
with  snow  or'wrapped  in  cloths  wrung  out  in  ice  water. 

Q.    How  long  should  the  friction  be  continued,  especially 
about  the  extremities? 

Until  circulation  seems  restored. 
Q.    What  may  be  resorted  to  if  the  natural  respiration  is 
at  a  standstill? 

Artificial  respiration. 
Q.    What  should  be  given  as  soon  as  the  patient  is  able  to 
swallow? 

Brandy  or  beeftea. 


234  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  should  he  he  brought  into  the  warmer  air'? 

Only  by  degrees. 
Q.    In  what  case  is  the  same  plan  pursued? 

With  any  frost  bitten  parts. 
Q.    What  should  the  aim  be? 

To  restore  vitality  without  inducing  sloughing. 
Q.    Will  a  person  always  feel  it  if  parts  of  the  body  are 
frozen? 

Parts  of  the  body  may  be  frozen  without  the  sufferer's 
knowledge,  as  numbness  precedes  the  latter  stages  of  freezing. 
Q.    What  should  not  be  done  with  a  tendency  to  chill- 
blains? 

Cold  feet  should  not  be  too  quickly  heated. 
Q.    How  should  the  feet  be  kept? 
Always  warm  and  loosely  clad. 
Q.    What  will  relieve  the  itching? 

Painting  them  with  iodine  will  relieve  the  itching. 
Q.    What  may  develope  if  neglected? 

Painful  and  intractable  ulcers. 
Q.    Where  does  a  hernia  of  the  peritonaeum  with  pros- 
tration of  the  abdominal  contents  take  place? 

Either  in  the  groin  or  lower  part  of  the  abdomen. 
Q.    What  does  the  tumor  often  contain? 

A  loop  of  small  intestines. 
Q.    Which  are  the  symptoms? 

Intense  pain,   obstinate  constipation  and  persistent 
vomiting. 

Q.    What  should  be  done  in  such  cases? 

Put  an  ice  bag  over  the  swelling,   give  no  food,   no 
physic,  very  little  drink,  and  send  for  the  surgeon  at  once. 

Q,    What  should  be  done  in  cases  where  a  patient  is  found 
insensible? 

The  head  should  be  kept  cool  and  get  medical  advice 
as  soon  as  possible. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  235 

Q.    What   should  be  done  if  poison  is  taken  into  the 
stomach? 

The  stomach  is  to  be  evacuated  by  emetics. 
Q.    What  makes  an  excellent  emetic? 

Warm  water  and  salt,   or  ground  mustard,   a  table- 
spoonful  mixed  in  a  cup  of  water  and  given  repeatedly. 
Q.    What  will  sometimes  produce  vomiting? 

Tickling  in  the  back  of  the  throat  with  the  finger  or 
a  feather. 

Q.    How  should  emetics  be  given? 

Half  a  pint  to  a  pint  at  the  time. 
Q.    What  should  be  given  after  some  irritant  poison? 

Some  bland  fluid  to  soothe  irritated  parts. 
Q.    What  may  be  given? 

The  white  of  an  egg,   milk,   flour  and  water,   gruel, 
olive  or  castor  oil. 

The  Human  Body. 
Q.    How  is  the  human  body  divided? 

Into  head,  trunk  and  limbs. 
Q.    Of  what  does  the  head  consist? 

Of  the  arched  skull,   and  this  is  covered  with  the 
scalp. 

Q.-  What  is  on  the  front  of  the  skull? 

The  forhead. 
Q.    What  is  below  the  forehead? 
Two  cavities  with  the  eyes. 
Q.    What  is  between  the  eyes? 

The  nose,  with  the  nostrils  adjusted  to  the  nasal 
bone. 

Q.    What  is  on  both  sides  of  the  nose? 

The  cheeks,  which  cover  the  upper  jaw  bone. 
Q.    How  far  do  the  cheeks  extend? 

Tney  extend  without  interruption  to  the  low  jaw 
bone. 


236  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  in  the  middle  of  the  face  below  the  nose'? 
The  mouth,  with  upper  and  lower  lip:  lower  down  is 
the  chin. 

Q.    What  are  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  head*? 

The  ear  trumpets,  which  collect  and  carry  the  sounds 
to  the  internal  ear. 

Q.    Through  what  is  the  head  united  to  the  trunk'? 

Through  the  neck. 
Q.    What  is  found  in  the  back  of  the  neck'? 

The  spinal  column. 
Q.    What  is  situated  in  the  front  of  the  throat? 

Commencing  Irom  the  spinal  column,  past  the  gullet 
(oesophagus),  farther  on  in  front  of  the  trachea  or  wind-pipe, 
with  the  larynx. 

Q.    What  does  the  larynx  contain'? 

The  vocal  cords. 
Q.    What  is  found  on  both  sides  of  the  throat'? 

Large  veins,  which  lead  and  bring  back  blood  from 
the  brain,  and  also  important  nerves. 

Q.    How  many  sides  has  the  trunk  of  the  human  body'? 

The  front  and  the  back. 
Q.    What  is  situated  in  front  of  the  shoulder-blade  on 
both  sides  of  the  throat? 

The  collar-bone  (clavicle). 
Q.    How  far  does  it  extend? 

From  the  upper  corner  of  the  breast-bone  to  the 
shoulder-blade. 

Q.    What  forms  the  upper  part  of  the  trunk? 

The  thorax. 
Q.    What  is  placed  in  the  chest  on  both  sides? 

The  lungs. 
Q.    What  is  situated  on  the  left  side  near  the  middle  line? 

The  heart. 
Q.    What  is  found  at  the  lower  end  of  the  chest  in  the 
center? 

The  pit  of  the  stomach. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  237 

Q.    What  is  noticed  on  the  back  of  the  trunk  at  the  top? 

Two  flat,  three-cornered  bones,  which  almost  meet  in 
the  center,  the  sh  lulder-blades  (scapula). 
Q.    What  follows  lower  down? 

The  ribs,  attached  to  both  sides  of  the  spinal  column. 
Q.    Where  are  the  upper  joints  connected  with  the  trunk? 

In  the  shoulder. 
Q.    Of  what  do  the  upper  limbs  consist? 

The  upper  arm,  the  lower  arm,  hands  and  fingers. 
Q.    What  is  the  space  called  between  the  chest  and  arm, 
there  where  the  arm  is  joined  to  the  shoulder? 

The  arm-pit  (axilla). 
Q.    Of  what  do  the  lower  limbs  consist? 

Of  the  thigh,  leg  and  foot. 
Q.    Where  are  the  lower  limbs  connected  to  the  trunk? 

In  the  hip. 
Q.    What  are  the  bones? 

They  are  the  frame-work  of  the  body. 
Q.    What  do  they  constitute  when  joined  as  in  a  living 


man; 


The  skeleton. 


Bones  of  the  Head. 

Q.    How  are  the  bones  of  the  head  divided? 

Into  the  bones  of  the  head  and  the  bones  of  the  face. 
Q.    How  many  bones  are  in  the  head? 

Eight. 
Q.    How  are  they  joined  together  in  a  grown  person? 

By  close-fitting  tight  seams  which  present  an  appear- 
ance along  their  edges  like  the  teeth  of  a  saw. 

Q.    What  is  inclosed  in  the  cavity  of  the  skull? 

The  brain  with  its  membranes. 
Q.    Are  the  bones  connected  firmly  in  the  skulls  of  child- 
ren? 

No;  they  are  joined  together  by  membraneous  con- 
nections. 


238  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  felt  through  the  skin  there,   where  two  or 
three  bones  meet? 

Soft,  impressible  places,  called  fontanelles. 
Q.    Where  can  one  of  them  be  distinctly  felt? 

On  the  top  of  the  head  somewhat  further  than  the 
forehead  (the  anterior  fontanelle). 
Q.    How  long  can  this  be  felt? 

Frequently  up  to  the  second  year. 
Q.    How  many  bones  form  the  frame  of  the  lower  part  of 
the  head— the  face? 
Fourteen. 
Q.    Which  is  the  most  moveable  bone  in  the  face? 

The  lower  jaw  bone,  which  moves  in  two  joints  just 
below  the  skull. 

Q.    What  is  found  in  the  upper  lower  jaw  bone? 

The  teeth. 
Q.    How  many  teeth  has  a  grown  person? 

Thirty-two  in  all — sixteen  above  and  sixteen  below. 

Bones  of  the  Trunk. 

Q.    How  many  bones  form  the  trunk? 

Fifty-seven. 
Q.    Of  what  do  they  consist? 

Of  the  spinal   column  or  backbone,   the  thorax  and 
basin  or  pelvis. 

Q.    Of  what  does  the  spinal  column  consist? 

It  is  built  out  of  single  round  bones  which  have  pro- 
jections? 

Q.    What  are  these  single  bones  called? 

Vertebrae. 
Q.    What  is  found  in  the  middle  of  these  round  bones 
built  upon  each  other  or  vertebrae? 

The  spinal  canal,  and  in  them  the  spinal  marrow  or 
spinal  cord. 

Q.   Where  is  the  spinal  column  joined  to  the  head? 
At  the  base  of  the  skull. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  239 

Q.    On  what  does  the  lower  part  of  the  spinal  column 
rest? 

On  the  small  of  the  back  or  sacrum. 
Q.    How  are  these  vertebra?  divided? 

There    are    seven  cervical  vertebra?,    twelve    dorsal 
vertebra?  and  five  lumbar  vertebra?. 
Q.    What  forms  the  thorax? 

The  ribs  and  breastbone  with  the  backbone. 
Q.    How  is  it  formed? 

The  ribs — twelve  on  each  side — are  joined  to  the  back- 
bone: they  come  around  like  an  arch  and  are  connected  in 
front  to  the  breastbone. 

Q.    How  many  ribs    are   joined    to    the   breastbone    or 
sternum? 

The  seven  upper  ones. 
Q.    What  are  they  called? 

The  true  ribs. 
Q.    What  are  the  lower  ribs  called? 

The  short  or  false  ribs. 
Q.    What  are  the  two  lowest  ribs  called? 

The  floating  ribs. 
Q.    What  is  the  thorax? 

It  is  the  second  large  cavity  containing  the  lungs  and 
heart. 

Q.    What  forms  the  basin  or  pelvis? 

The  lower  lumbar  vertebra?,  the  small  of  the  back  or 
sacrum  and  the  hip. 

Q.    What  is  found  on  the  outer  side  of  the  hip  bone? 

A  socket  into  which  the  head  of  the  thigh  bone  (or 
famur)  fits. 

Q.    What  do  the  above  mentioned  bones  form  with  their 
membraneous  and  soft  parts? 

The  third  large  cavity,  which  contains  the  stomach, 
the  intestines,  the  liver,  the  spleen,  the  kidneys  and  bladder. 


240  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Bones  of  the  Upper  Limbs. 
Q.    What  is  situated  on  the  upper  end  of  the  back? 

A  flat,  three-cornered  bone,  called  shoulder-blade  (or 
scapula). 

Q.    What  rests  upon  this  bone? 

The  collar-bone  (clavicle). 
Q.    To  where  does  the  collar-bone  extend? 

To  the  upper  corner  of  the  breast-bone  (or  sternum). 
Q.    What  is  situated  at  one  corner  of  the  shoulder-blade? 

A  hollow  with  a  smooth  surface,  into  which  the  head 
of  the  upper  arm-bones  are  placed. 

Q.    What  kind  of  a  bone  is  the  upper  arm-bone,  or  so- 
called  humerus? 

It  is  a  long,  strong,  round  bone. 
Q.    What  has  it  at  its  lower  end? 

A  kind  of  a  roll,  which  is  joined  to  the  two  bones  of 
the  fore-arm. 

Q.    How  many  bones  has  the  fore-arm? 

Two— one  on  the  side  of  the  thumb  and  the  other  on 
the  side  of  the  little  finger. 

Q.    How  is  the  bone  on  the  side  of  the  thumb  called? 

The  radius. 
Q.    How  the  one  on  the  side  of  the  little  finger? 

The  ulna. 
Q.    With  what  are  the  two  bones  joined  movable  together? 

With  ligaments. 
Q.    To  what  are  they  joined  at  the  lower  end? 

To  the  wrist. 
Q.    How  is  the  hand  divided? 

Into  the  wrist  (or  carpus),  palm  (metacarpus)  and 
fingers  (or  phalanges). 

Q.    What  forms  the  wrist? 

Eight  short  irregular  bones. 
Q.    How  are  they  joined  together? 

By  ligaments,  into  a  compact  bunch. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  241 

Q.    What  forms  the  palm  of  the  hand'? 

Five  long  tube-shaped  bones  (metacarpal  bones). 
Q.    How  many  bones  has  the  fore-finger? 

Three  (called  phalanges). 
Q.    How  many  the  thumb? 

Two. 

Boxes  of  the  Lower  Limbs. 
Q.    How  is  the  lower  limb  divided? 

Into  hip,  thigh  and  foot. 
Q.    What  is  the  part  ca  led  between  the  knee  and  hip? 

The  thigh. 
Q.    What  is  the  part  called  from  the  knee  to  the  foot? 

The  leg. 
Q.    How  are  the  lower  limbs  joined  to  the  trunk? 

By  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone  (femur),  which  fits  into 
a  socket  of  the  hip-bone. 

Q.    Which  is  the  longest  and  strongest  bone  in  the  human 
body? 

The  thigh-bone  (femur). 
Q.    What  is  found  at  its  lower  end? 

A  broad,  round  surface  for  the  knee-joint. 
Q.    To  what  is  the  surface  of  the  thigh-bone  (or  femur) 
joined? 

To  the  strongest  bone  of  the  leg,  the  shin  (tibia). 
Q.    What  does  this  connection  form? 

The  knee-joint. 
Q.    What  is  in  front  of  the  knee-joint? 

A  small,  three-cornered  bone,  with  round  edges,  called 
the  knee-pan,  knee-cap  (or  patella). 

Q.    With  what  is  the  knee-pan  (or  patella)  joined  to  the 
thigh  and  leg? 

With  ligaments. 
Q.    How  many  bones  has  the  leg? 

It  has  two,  the  shin-bone  (or  tibia)  and  the  fibula. 

16— 


242  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  kind  of  a  bone  is  the  shin-bone  (tibia). 

It  is  strong,  three-cornered,  tube-shaped  bone. 
Q.    Where  is  it  situated? 

At  the  innerside,  on  the  side  of  the  big  toe,  and  is  the 
principal  bearer  of  the  body  while  walking  and  standing. 
Q.    What  kind  of  a  bone  is  the  fibula? 

A  long,  slender  bone  on  the  outer  side  of  the  leg  and 
much  weaker  than  the  shin-bone. 

Q.    Where  is  it  joined  to  the  shin-bone? 

Above  and  below. 
Q.    To  what  are  both  bones  joined  at  the  lower  end? 

To  the  ankle-bone  of  the  foot. 
Q.    Of  what  does  the  foot  consist? 

Of  the  tarsus  or  middle  foot,  or  metatarsus,   the  toes 
or  phalanges. 

Q.    How  many  bones  are  in  the  tarsus? 

Seven  irregular  bones. 
Q.  What  do  they  form":' 

The  ankle,  the  heel  and  instep. 
Q.    What  do  the  middle  foot  or  metatarsal  bones  form? 

The  flat  of  the  foot  and  part  of  the  instep. 
Q.    How  many  are  in  each  foot? 

Five. 
Q.    What  are  joined  to  these  five  bones? 

Fourteen  phalanges,  forming  the  toes. 
Q.    How  is  the  foot  shaped? 

It  is  arched  and  elastic. 
Q.    Where  does  the  weight  rest? 

On  the  heel  and  ball  of  the  toes. 

Skin. 

Q.    With  what  is  the  human  body  covered? 

With  a  soft,  smooth  but  strong  covering  called  skin. 
Q.    How  many  layers  has  the  skin? 

Two. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  243 

Q.    What  is  the  top  layer  called? 

The  epidermis  or  cuticle, 
Q.    What  is  the  deep  layer  of  the  skin  called? 

The  true  skin  or  derma. 
Q.    What  is  imbedded  in  the  true  skin? 

The  sweat  glands  and  sebatious  glands. 
Q.    Where  do  they  end? 

On  the  surface  of  the  top  skin. 
Q.    Of  what  does  the  top  skin  or  epidermis  consist? 

Of  a  thin,  almost  transparent,  layer. 
Q.    What  does  this  top  layer  do  constantly? 

It  scales  off  and  is  renewed  as  it  wears  off. 
Q.    What  grows  on  some  parts  of  the  body  from  the  chin? 

Hair;  the  roots  of  them  lie  deep  in  the  skin. 
Q.    What  grows  from  the  skin  besides  the  hair? 

The  nails  on  fingers  and  toes. 
Q.    What  do  the  sebatious  glands  manufacture? 

They  manufacture  an  oily  fluid. 

Muscles. 

Q.    What  are  muscles  commonly  called? 

Flesh. 
Q.    What  are  muscles? 

Dark  red  masses  gathered  up  in  bundles. 
Q.    Where  are  the  muscles  situated? 

They  are  arranged  over  the  skeleton,  most  of  them 
being  attached  to  a  bone  at  each  end. 
Q.    What  ability  do  they  possess? 

The  ability  to  expand  and  contract. 
Q.    Is  this  ability  alike  in  all  muscles? 

No;  in  some  it  is  greater  than  others,   according  to 
their  size  and  use. 

Q.    How  are  all  the  muscles  of  a  limb  arranged  in  a  living 
body? 

They  are  bound  together  and  covered  with  a  fibrous 
tissue. 


244  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    Through  what  are  the  muscles  commonly  attached  to 
the  bone? 

By  means  of  tendons. 
Q.    What  are  tendons? 

Glistening  cords  of  fibrous  tissue. 
Q.    How  many  muscles  are  in  the  body? 

More  than  five  hundred. 
Brain. 
Q.    Where  is  the  brain  found? 

It  fills  the  chief  cavity  of  the  skull. 
Q.    What  color  has  it? 

It  is  a  grayish,  white  mass. 
Q.    Is  it  only  one  mass? 

No;  there  are  several  masses  joined  together. 
Q.    How  is  it  divided? 

Into  the  large  brain  (cerebrum )  and  small  brain  (cere- 
bellum). 

Q.    Where  is  the  large  brain  or  the  cerebrum  placed? 

> 
It  is  placed  in  the  cavity  of  the  skull  from  the  fore- 
head to  the  back  of  the  head. 

Q.    Where  is  the  smaller  brain? 

It  is  in  the  back  of  the  head,  low  down. 
Q.    Of  what  service  is  the  brain? 

It  is  the  organ  employed  to  think,  feel  and  will. 
Q.    What  is  a  continuation  of  both,   the  cerebrum  and 
cerebellum? 

The  spinal  cord  which  occupies  the  spinal  canal  in 
the  backbone. 

Q.    How  thick  and  how  long  is  this  cord? 

It  is  about  half  an  inch  thick  and  eighteen  inches 
long. 

Q.    What  originates  from  the  brain  and  spinal  cord? 

Small  white-yellowish  strings — the  nerves. 
Q.    To  where  do  they  extend? 

They  go  out  of  the  spinal  canal  through  openings  be- 
tween the  vertebrae,  and  extend  to  all  parts  of  the  body. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  245 

Q.    What  is  connected  by  them? 

The  different  parts  of  the  body  are  connected  with 
the  brain  spinal  cord. 

Q.    To  what  may  the  nervous  system  be  compared? 

To  the  telegraphic  system  of  a  railroad. 
Q.    What  place  do  the  nerves  take? 

They  are  the  wires  which  take  and  carry  messages 
from  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  to  the  most  exterior  parts  of 
the  body. 

Q.    What  has  each  muscle? 

Each  muscle  has  its  nerve  which  gives  it  the  power  to 
move,  to  contract  or  relax. 

Q.    What  is  the  consequence,  if  the  nerves  of  feeling  are 
cut  off  from  a  certain  part  of  the  body? 

It  will  no  longer  obey  your  will;  will  not  move:  is 
lame. 

Q.    What  will  the  sensory  nerves  do? 

They  carry  messages  from  the  outside  or  the  deep 
parts  of  the  body  to  the  brain. 

Q.    What  is  the  consequence  if  the  sensory  nerves  are  cut 
off  from  the  brain? 

That  part  is  without  feeling;  feels  no  pain;  no 
warmth;  no  cold;  no  pressure. 

Q.    What  does  a  third  kind  of  nerves  rule? 

They  rule  the  unwilled  actions,  called  reflex  actions, 
such  as  heart  action,  digestion,  respiration. 

The  Organs  of  Sense. 
Q.    What  rules  the  organs  of  sense? 

A  special  group  of  nerves. 
Q.    With  what  do  we  smell? 

With  the  nerves  of  smell. 
Q.    Where  do  they  spread? 

In  the  top  of  the  nasal  cavities. 


246  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    With  what  do  we  taste? 

With  nerves  of  taste,  which  spread  on  the  top  of  the 
tongue  and  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

Q.    By  what  are  external  sounds  perceived,  such  as  noise, 
etc.? 

By  the  nerve  of  hearing. 
Q.    Where  are  external  sounds  carried  to'? 

To  the  ear-drum. 
Q.    To  where  is  it  carried  from  the  ear-drum? 

To  a  chain  of  small,  fine  bones,  the  nerves  of  hearing, 
and  then  to  the  brain. 

Q.    With  what  do  we  see  and  distinguish  light  from  dark? 

With  the  nerves  of  sight  or  optic  nerve. 
Q.    Where  are  these  nerves? 

In  the  eye. 
Q.    How  are  the  eyes  shaped? 

They  have  an  oval  form  and  are  constructed  out  of 
several  membranes. 

Q.    Where  are  the  eyes  situated? 

In  the  cavities  of  the  skull,  called  orbits. 
Q.    What  is  the  middle  of  the  eye? 

The  pupil. 

The  Lungs. 

Q.    Where  are  the  lungs? 

They  are  in  the  chest  and  occupy  almost  entirely  this 
cavity 

Q.    What  are  the  lungs? 

They  are  soft  masses  of  little  cells  with  very   thin 
walls. 

Q.    With  what  are  the  lungs  covered? 

With  the  pleurae. 
Q.    What  is  the  pleurae? 

Two  air-tight  sacs,  one  for  each  lung,  one  layer  covers 
the  lung  and  the  other  lines  the  chest  wall. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  247 


Q.    To  what  are  the  lungs  tlrst  connected? 

To  the  bronchial  tubes,  higher  up  with  the  trachea, 
then  with  the  larynx,  with  mouth  and  nose,  and  by  these  with 
outside  air. 

Q.    For  what  purpose  do  the  lungs  serve? 

For  breathing. 
Q.    How  is  it  done? 

By  the  expansion  and  contraction  of  the  chest  and  the 
descending  and  the  ascending  of  the  diaphragm. 
Q.    What  may  this  be  called? 

Inspiration  and  expiration. 
Q.    What  is  inhaled  with  the  act  of  inspiration? 

Air,  which  is  a  material  substance,  composed  of  gases 
and  acid. 

Q.    What  comes  in  contact  with  this  air  in  the  lungs? 
The  dark  red  blood  which  circulates  in  various  veins 
in  the  lungs. 

Q.    What  effect  has  this  upon  the  blood? 

It  is  purified,  gets  a  bright  red  color  and  is  rendered 
fit  for  circulation  and  sustaining  of  the  body. 

Q.    What  is  thrown  off  from  the  blood  by  expiration? 

Carbonic  acid  gas. 
Q.    What  is  the  consequence  of  this? 

That  in  a  room  where  there  are  many  persons  and  no 
renewal  takes  place,  the  air  becomes  close  and  injurious. 

The  Heart. 

Q.    What  is  the  heart? 

It  is  a  muscular  mass  which  contains  several  cavities 
and  is  about  as  large  as  a  fist. 

Q.    As  what  is  it  characterized? 

As  a  hollow  muscle. 
Q.    How  is  it  shaped? 

Like  a  pear,  with  the  small  end  pointing  down,  and  to 
the  left. 


248  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    How  is  the  interior  of  the  heart  divided? 

Into  four  cavities.    The  upper  cavities  are  called  aur- 
icles, the  lower  ones  ventricles. 

Q.    What  enter  into  each  auricle? 

Large  veins,  which  bring  blood  back  from  the  body. 
Q.    What  is  found  between  the  auricle  and  ventricle? 

A  valve,  which  consists  of  three  thin  flaps. 
Q.    What  does  this  prevent? 

It  prevents  the  blood  from  passing  back  from  the  ven- 
tricle into  the  auricle. 

Q.    From  where  does  the  blood  flow  out  of  the  right  ven- 
tricle? 

Into  the  large  pulmonary  artery,  which  soon  divides 
into  two  branches  and  extends  into  both  lungs. 
Q.    What  opens  out  of  the  left  ventricle? 

The  great  artery  of  the  body,  the  aerta,  which  gives 
off  numerous  branches,  which  go  to  all  parts  of  the  body. 

Blood  Vessels. 
Q.    With  what  are  all  arteries  and  veins  connected? 

With  the  heart. 
Q.    WThat  are  blood  vessels? 

They  are  pipes  which  serve  for  the  circulation  of  the 
blood. 

Q.    What  are  the  blood  vessels  called? 

Veins,  which  carry  dark  red  blood,  and  arteries  which 
carry  bright  red  blood. 

Q.    What  are  connected  to  the  arteries  and  veins? 

Numerous  small  blood  vessels,  called  capillaries. 
Q.    What  is  formed  by  the  capillaries? 

The  connection  between  arteries  and  veins. 

The  Most  Important  Arteries. 

Q.    What  arteries  carry  the  blood  to  the  head? 

The  carotid  arteries:  they  pass  up  on  each  side  of  the 
neck. 


The  Nursing  Sister.  249 

Q.    What  arteries  lie  behind  the  collar-bone'? 

The  sub-clavian. 
Q.    How  far  does  it  extend? 

To  arm-pit,  and  is  called  axillary  artery. 
Q.    To  where  does  it  then  go? 

To  the  elbow,  and  is  called  brachial. 
Q.    What  does  it  do  at  the  elbow?       I 
,     It  is  divided  into  the  radial  and  ulnar:  the  radial  lies 
at  the  thumb  side  of  the  fore-arm  and  is  the  onedjn  which  the 
pulse  is  commonly  felt. 

Q.    What  is  the  artery  called   which  caferies  the  main 
stream  to  the  thigh? 

The  femoral  artery;  it  proceeds  from  the  groin  to  the 
knee  close  along  the  bone. 

Q.    What  is  it  called  in  the  leg? 

The  tibial  artery;  lower  down  it  divides  into  several 
branches  leading  to  the  foot. 

Veins. 

Q.    Where  do  arteries  extend  to  at  last? 

Into  the  small  blood  vessels  or  capillaries? 
Q.    What  takes  its  beginning  in  these  capillaries? 

The  veins,  which  bring  the  blood  back  from  the  ex- 
tremities into  always  larger  vessels  and  finally  to  the  heart. 
Q.    Where  do  the  veins  run? 

Generally  along  side  of  the  arteries. 
Q.    Where  does  the  venous  blood  come  together  finally? 

In  two  large  veins,  which  empty  themselves  into  the 
right  auricle. 

Blood. 

Q.    What  is  blood? 

It  is  a  red  fluid,  not  transparent,  having  a  salty  taste. 
Q.    Of  what  does  blood  consist? 

Of  blood  corpuscles,  watery  substance  called  plasma, 
and  a  coasrulative  substance. 


250  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Circulation  of  the  Blood  in  the  Body. 
Q.    What  does  the  heart  do? 

It  moves  constantly  from  the  first  moment  of  life 
until  death. 

Q.    Where  is  its  beat  felt? 

On  the  left  side  of  the  chest. 
Q.    What  causes  the  beating? 

The  extension  and  contraction  of  the  auricles  and 
ventricles. 

Q.    What  is  forced  out  by  this  movement? 

The  blood  contained  in  the  cavities,  so  as  to  make 
room  for  another  supply. 

Q.    To  where  is  the  blood  forced  from  the  left  ventricle? 

Into  the  large  artery  called  aorta. 
Q.    To  where  is  it  led  from  this? 

Into  always  smaller  branches  to  the  most  distant  parts 
of  the  body. 

Q.    How  is  the  blood  brought  back  to  the  heart? 

After  it  flows  from  the  capillaries  of  the  arteries  into 
the  capillaries  of  the  veins,  then  always  into  larger  veins, 
which  finally  bring  it  back  to  the  heart. 

Q.    Into  where  do  the  veins  empty  the  blood? 

Into  the  right  auricle. 
Q.    Where  is  it  forced  to  from  here? 

Into  the  right  ventricle. 
Q .    What  is  caused  by  the  contraction  of  the  right  auricle? 
The  blood  is  forced  through  the  pulmary  artery  into 
the  lungs. 

Q.    What  is  done  in  the  lungs? 

The  blood  is  purified  and  becomes  bright-red  again. 
Q.    To  where  does  it  return  then? 

To  the  left  ventricle  and  commences  its  circulation 
again. 


The  Nuesing  Sister.  251 


Digestion. 

Q.    In  what  does  digestion  take  place? 

In  the  alimentary  canal. 
Q.   Where  does  this  commence? 

In  the  mouth,  and  ends  in  the  large  intestine. 
Q.    "With  what  is  nourishment  tasted  after  it  is  taken 
into  the  mouth? 

With  the  tongue  and  palate. 
Q.    With  what  is  it  chewed? 

With  the  teeth. 
Q.    With  what  is  food  mixed  while  chewing  is  going  on? 
With  saliva,  which  is  produced  by  the  saliva  glands 
in  the  mouth,  and  is  thereby  formed  into  a  mass,  so  as  to  ren- 
der it  so  that  it  can  be  swallowed. 

Q.    How  does  the  food  reach  the  stomach? 

By  passing  from  the  mouth  through  the  oesophagus. 
Q.    What  is  the  stomach? 

It  is  a  membraneous  sack  situated  on  the  left  side  of 
the  trunk  somewhat  below  the  short  ribs,  and  extends  to  the 
pit  of  the  stomach. 

Q.    What  does  digestion  mean? 

The  changes  that  take  place  in  the  food,  as  it  passes 
through  the  alimentary  canal,  by  which  it  is  fitted  to  be 
taken  up  into  the  blood. 

Q.    What  is  connected  with  the  stomach? 

The  intestines,  first  the  small,  then  the  large  intes- 
tine. 

Q.    How  long  is  the  intestine? 

About  six  times  the  length  of  the  human  body. 
Q.    With  what  is  it  lined? 

With  mucus  membrane. 
Q.    What  is  connected  with  the  small  intestines? 

The  gall  bladder,  which  furnishes  bile  needed  for 
digestion. 


252  The  Nursing  Sister. 

Q.    What  is  the  liver? 

It  is  a  large  organ  or  gland,  situated  at  the  lower  bor- 
der of  the  ribs  on  the  right  side? 
Q.    What  does  the  liver  make? 

It  makes  the  bile. 
Q.    What  are  the  kidneys? 

They  are  two  organs  situated  on  each  side  of  the 
small  of  the  back. 

Q.    What  do  they  do? 

They  carry  off  waste  and  matters  from  the  blood . 
Q.    What  shape  have  they? 

The  shape  of  a  bean. 
Q.    Where  is  the  urine  carried  to  from  the  kidneys? 

Into  the  bladder. 


. 


ST.  JOHNS  LIBRARY 


sjnn?7ftR4